5CO02 1 And 2
Briner-The-Basics-of-Evidence-Based-Practice.pdf
The Basics of Evidence-Based Practice By Rob Briner
Evidence-based practice is nothing new or complicated or mind-blowing. It isn’t a disruptive paradigm-shifting
solution to every problem. It doesn’t involve convoluted equations, and you don’t need a team of brainiacs. It won’t
push your thinking way outside the box with awesome concepts. It will do something much more exciting,
interesting, and important than all of these put together: It will help you to make better decisions.
We all use evidence of some sort for everything we do: booking a vacation, buying a refrigerator, deciding which
movie to watch, or designing a new talent management strategy. Why? What’s the point?
This sounds like a pretty strange question to ask as the answer seems so obvious the question hardly needs to be
asked. Strange as it may seem, thinking about why we nearly always choose to use evidence sheds light on the
often taken-for-granted principles behind using evidence and the underlying rationale for evidence-based practice
(EBP).
Put simply, we use evidence because by doing so we’re more likely to get the outcomes we want: A relaxing
vacation, a refrigerator that fits neatly in the gap in the kitchen, a movie that will make us laugh, or a talent strategy
that will reduce unwanted turnover and streamline succession. Using evidence is just about making more-informed
decisions.
Put a bit less simply and a bit more precisely, there’s more to it than this. Making a more-informed decision isn’t
about using just any old bit of evidence we stumble across in any way we fancy. Rather, the evidence used should
be both trustworthy and applicable to the specific context. Indeed much of the work and skill involved in actually
doing EBP is ensuring that the evidence you obtain is the best available and addresses your particular
circumstances: the most reliable and the most relevant.
What is evidence-based practice and how is it likely to be different from the ways we usually use evidence?
Everyone gets the idea that using evidence in our personal or professional lives will increase the chances of
obtaining desired outcomes. EBP is about taking exactly this same principle and extending it so we can apply it
more effectively. What are the key likely differences between the way we generally make use of evidence in
everyday life to help make decisions and the specific ways we use evidence in EBP?
Key Difference 1: Conscientious, Explicit, and Judicious
As the definition of EBP makes clear, it’s about making a conscientious, explicit, and judicious use of the best
available evidence. Conscientious means, obviously, that we try hard and make a real effort to gather and use
evidence. How hard usually do we try to gather and use evidence? We all try to some extent but there are also many
obstacles such as time constraints, the challenges of finding the right evidence, or if any decent evidence exists at
all. In such circumstances we are likely to call off the evidence search and just go with what we’ve already got to
hand or what we can easily access. EBP is therefore not only about finding and using evidence. It’s about being
prepared to commit effort and resources to doing so in order to overcome these and other obstacles.
We’ve all been in meetings where someone claims to “just know” that some proposed solution won’t work as it’s
“obvious” or a “no-brainer” even though that same someone is also unable to back up their judgement with much, if
any, evidence. Similarly, someone says they’re sure that some other solution will work as they read a great article
about it in some good business magazine written by a brilliant professor or consultant or someone senior at Google.
Yet again, they can’t quite remember exactly what evidence was presented in the article.
The need to be explicit is therefore an essential part of EBP because if we don’t spell out and describe in detail the
evidence on which we are basing our claims, the trustworthiness or value of that evidence can’t be scrutinized and
therefore can’t be used effectively to help us make better decisions.
Being conscientious and explicit is good but not enough. We also need to find the best available evidence. EBP is
not about using all the evidence or information we have gathered in to help our decision-making. Rather, it’s about
focusing on the more reliable and trustworthy evidence.
In everyday life and in business we are bombarded by information of various types from many sources. However,
much, if not most, of this is likely to be noise: unreliable and misleading. How do we cut through the distracting noise
to get to whatever signal might be there? The answer is to be judicious: to make judgements of or to critically
appraise the quality of the evidence. The more reliable the evidence we use to help inform our decision, the more
likely it is we’ll get the outcome we want.
Key Difference 2: Multiple Sources
If you’ve ever watched a courtroom drama, you’ll appreciate exactly why gathering evidence from multiple sources
is essential for determining the accused’s guilt or innocence and the probabilities of such. In a murder case, to
choose a grisly example, there may be forensic evidence, eyewitness testimony, other witness accounts, expert
witnesses, physical evidence, CCTV footage, and so on.
Each source of evidence might be judged to be more or less reliable or relevant. Different sources or types of
evidence may tell the same or quite different stories. Evidence from one source may cast doubt on, reinforce, or
clarify evidence from another. By pulling together different kinds of evidence from multiple sources and using it in a
conscientious, explicit, and judicious way, we build up a picture of what happened, why it happened, and the
probability that the accused is actually guilty.
Part of the excitement of doing EBP is that we don’t start with assuming that something is or is not the case. Similar
to jury members, we need to keep an open mind and pay attention to, evaluate, and use the evidence. We may
have our own initial views and that’s fine, but the purpose of doing EBP, like using evidence to make legal decisions,
is to find out, given the available evidence, what is more likely to be true.
When we apply EBP to management decisions, the four main sources of evidence used are scientific literature,
organizational data, stakeholders’ concerns, and professional expertise. What does this look like in practice?
One way of describing this process is by listing some of the questions a group of practitioners might ask and then
try to answer by gathering evidence from each of these sources. Note that exactly the same EBP approach is
adopted both to identifying possible problems (or opportunities) and possible solutions. After all, there is absolutely
no value in discussing the evidence for possible solutions until and unless the problem is well understood and the
diagnosis of that problem is based on good quality evidence.
As an aside, even though it has no value, we frequently do engage in lengthy debates about the efficacy of possible
solutions without having a clear answer to the question we need to answer first: What’s the problem we’re trying to
fix?
Suppose an organization believes it has a problem with low employee engagement (EE). Before they consider
possible remedies, they want to ensure they have a sound understanding of what that problem actually is, if indeed
they have one. What types of questions should be asked to establish the extent to which low employee engagement
might be a problem for their organization? See chart below.
If, and only if, the organization discovers that low EE is likely to be a significant problem for their organization would
they then repeat the exact same process by asking similar questions to each of the four sources in order to identify
likely solutions.
Can you imagine what might happen if you and your colleagues took this EBP evidence-gathering approach and
applied it to something you’re working on right now? When I work with organizations to do exactly this, people seem
to find it quite revealing, sometimes surprising, and not always comfortable. Here are some common themes:
We often prefer some types or sources of evidence and would rather just ignore the others.
One or two sources of evidence are always used but we rarely consider three or four.
Some sources and types of evidence are not there or hard to access.
We may feel we lack the skills required to judge the quality or trustworthiness of the evidence.
The quantity, quality, and nature of the evidence we uncover is nearly always a surprise.
We may constantly want to jump to conclusions rather than waiting until we have more evidence to provide
better answers to our questions.
There can be a lot of cherry-picking such that we emphasize evidence that supports our position and
downplay evidence that doesn’t.
It sometimes seems that the most common answer to the questions we ask to gather evidence across the four
sources is “I don’t know,” which can be frustrating. However, we should not stop there. We may not know but we can
try to find out. We can only uncover useful evidence by first being aware of what it is we don’t yet know but need to
know. And having gaps in our knowledge or knowing we don’t know things doesn’t stop us making decisions.
Rather we can still make a decision and do so with a clear understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of and
gaps in the evidence on which that decision was based.
Key Difference 3: A Structured Approach
As the questioning process described above shows, an EBP approach is a more structured approach than we might
usually take. The six basic steps around which EBP is structured are described in the figure at right. Returning to our
example of how and whether the organization has a problem with low EE, what might each step entail?
1. Ask: The perceived problem of low EE needs first to be translated into answerable questions (e.g., Does low
EE have negative effects on employee performance?) in order to find evidence about whether or not low EE
is likely to be a problem and therefore one which needs tackling.
2. Acquire: Ask the questions within each of the four sources and gather evidence from each which helps to
answer the questions (e.g., Looking at organizational data, what happens to customer satisfaction levels
when EE goes up or down?).
3. Appraise: Examine the evidence obtained and make a judgement about its trustworthiness (e.g., Given our
question, how reliable and relevant are these findings from scientific studies?).
4. Aggregate: Pull together the best available evidence (not all the evidence) from each of the four sources to
build an overall picture of the answer to the questions (e.g., Putting all this best-quality evidence we have
together, what can we say about whether and to what extent low EE is likely to be having negative effects?).
5. Apply: Use the answers obtained to make a better informed decision about what, if anything, to do (e.g.,
Given the answers we have to our questions, it appears unlikely that low EE is having strongly negative
effects on performance, therefore, we decide not to intervene to increase EE and rather explore other ways
to enhance performance.).
6. Assess: Evaluate the effects of any decisions taken (e.g., What happens over time to EE and performance
levels in the absence of interventions to increase EE?).
Responding to Concerns and Objections
We use evidence for almost everything we do. We do it because it’s based on the underlying principle that the more
informed our decision, the more likely we are to get the outcome we want. EBP takes this fundamental principle and
extends it by proposing that we need to be conscientious, explicit, and judicious in our use of evidence, gather it
from multiple sources, and take a structured approach to deciding both what the problem and possible solutions
might be.
Given this compelling logic, you may wonder why we aren’t all already doing EBP—or something very much like it.
One important barrier is the concerns and objections people raise to EBP even before they’ve tried to do it.
Here are some of the most common I’ve
come across in teaching students and
training managers and HR professionals how
to do EBP, along with my usual response.
EBP looks complicated and difficult
—it’s just not worth it. Yes, it’s
harder than making decisions
without much good evidence or
analysis but it’s a cost-benefit thing.
Don’t do it for every single decision
—just the most important where
getting the outcome you want is
significant for the organization. And
agree in advance a point in time at
which you’ll stop collecting evidence
and make a decision.
We need to make decisions fast,
and this will slow us down. How
often do decisions really need to be
made quickly? Decision points may
be more predictable than is
assumed. Build EBP into the
planning process rather than waiting
for a surprise. Do you want to make
a good decision or a fast decision?
We already do a ton of data
analytics; we don’t need this as
well. Analyzing organizational data is
a good thing but EBP is about
looking across multiple data sources.
Organizational data, no matter how
thoroughly analyzed, are only a part
of the evidence picture.
What’s the point? You can never
prove anything for sure anyway.
Apart from math and logic, that’s
true. Fortunately, EBP is absolutely
not about trying to prove anything or
discover the truth. Rather it’s about
making a better-informed decision.
Page 7 of 7https://www.hrps.org/resources/people-strategy-journal/Winter2019/Pages/EBP-briner.aspx
© 2019 HR People + Strategy. All Rights Reserved.
It’s about probabilities and likelihoods (this is more likely to fix the problem), not certainties (this definitely
will fix the problem).
This will just lead to analysis paralysis. Analyzing evidence doesn’t in itself stop us making a decision. The
main thing that does is not wanting to make a decision.
We can’t do EBP properly and thoroughly so there’s no point in even trying. EBP is certainly not an all-or-
nothing thing. Using some evidence is better than using no evidence at all. Using more evidence is likely to
be better still. This is not about making perfect decisions.
After reading this article, you may share many of these concerns and have others. I’ve provided responses to some
that I hope go some way to alleviating such concerns but, in the end, I think the best course of action is to try it out.
As you and your team make plans for the medium-term future and contemplate all the actions you could do, can I
make a suggestion? Rather than trying something new or complicated or mind-blowing, why not try something that
will help you make better decisions and improve the chances of getting the outcomes you want? After all, that’s the
whole point of using evidence.
Rob Briner is Professor of Organizational Psychology at Queen Mary University of London and Scientific Director
at the Center for Evidence-Based Management (www.cebma.org). He can be reached at [email protected]
CEBMa What is EBP?.pptx
Evidence based management:
What is it?
Postgraduate Course
Evidence?
outcome of scientific research, organizational facts & data, benchmarking, best practices, collective experience, personal experience, intuition
Postgraduate Course
All managers base their decisions on ‘evidence’
Postgraduate Course
However ...
Postgraduate Course
Many managers pay little or no attention to the quality of the evidence they base their decisions on
Postgraduate Course
Trust me, 20 years of management experience
Postgraduate Course
SO ...
Teach managers how to critically evaluate the validity, and generalizability of the evidence and help them find ‘the best available’ evidence
Postgraduate Course
Evidence-based decision
Postgraduate Course
9
EBP is a means to improve decision quality.
It’s a career, not a course.
Postgraduate Course
Evidence-based practice:
Focuses on the decision making process
Thinks in terms of probability (instead of golden bullets).
Postgraduate Course
11
Multidisciplinary: Incorporate and aggregate information from different sources (regardless of their origin)
Adaptable: Update (or change) their decision when newer or better information becomes available
Self-critical: Acknowledge the limitations of their abilities and are cautious not to be overconfident
Cautious: Express their predictions in probabilistic terms and consider multiple options.
Empirical: Rely more on observation than theory
Evidence-based managers are
Postgraduate Course
The 5 steps of EBP
Formulate a focused question (Ask)
Search for the best available evidence (Acquire)
Critically appraise the evidence (Appraise)
Integrate the evidence with your professional expertise and apply (Apply)
Monitor the outcome (Assess)
Klik om de modelstijlen te bewerken
Tweede niveau
Derde niveau
Vierde niveau
Vijfde niveau
Postgraduate Course
13
Intuition or evidence-based decision?
Postgraduate Course
Chesley Sullenberger, USAIR pilot, has been a visiting scholar at UC Berkeley’s Collaborative for Catastrophic Risk Management since 2007
Does research on how to make decisions to maintain safety despite technological complexity and crisis conditions
1. Use of Scientific Findings
Postgraduate Course
Has written and analyzed aviation accident reports for over 20 years
2. Reliance on Reliable and Valid Organizational Facts
Postgraduate Course
Used Decision Aids to Support Good Decision: As Sully considered what decision to make that day, he had his copilot review and follow all checklists on board relevant to crash landings
Formal Education to Prime His Skills: Sully is a graduate of the U.S. Air Force Academy and holds masters degrees from both Purdue University in Industrial Psychology and the University of Northern Colorado in Public Administration
3. Mindful Decision Making & Decision Awareness
Postgraduate Course
The last person to leave the plane, Chesley Sullenberger twice walked the plane’s aisle to check all passengers were off
Sully’s last act onboard was to grab the passenger list. Used on-shore to verify rescue of all passengers and crew
4. Ethics and Responsibility to Stakeholders
Postgraduate Course
In Sullenberger’s Own Words…
“One way of looking at this might be that
for 42 years, I've been making small,
regular deposits in this bank of experience, education and training.
And on January 15, the balance was sufficient so that I could make a very large withdrawal.”
Postgraduate Course
Get Evidence into the Conversation
Use Relevant Scientific Evidence
Use Reliable and Valid Business Facts
Become “Decision Aware” and Use Appropriate Processes
Reflect on Decision’s Ethical and Stakeholder Implications
Five Good EBP Habits
Postgraduate Course
Set learning goals (2-5)
Pre-test: where does learner stand on learning goal before course?
Build opportunities for practicing those learnings throughout course (curriculum)
Post-test: Measure progress on each learning goal and provide feedback
Feedback & Redesign: Use feedback to make course more effective over time
Five Good EBP Teaching Habits
Postgraduate Course
How can we supplement your experience?
21
CIPD evidence-based-practice-factsheet.pdf
15 Apr 2021
Evidence-based practice for effective decision- making Effective HR decision-making is based on considering the best available evidence combined with critical thinking.
Introduction
Evidence-based practice is about making better decisions, informing action that has the desired impact. An evidence-based approach to decision-making is based on a combination of using critical thinking and the best available evidence. It makes decision makers less reliant on anecdotes, received wisdom and personal experience – sources that are not trustworthy on their own. It’s important that people professionals to adopt this approach because of the huge impact management decisions have on the working lives and wellbeing of people in all sorts of organisations worldwide.
This factsheet outlines the four sources of evidence considered key to effective evidence- based practice, before highlighting the importance of combining these to ensuring actions have the greatest chance of success. It outlines and refutes a number of misconceptions about evidence-based practice, before looking at literature which demonstrates the effectiveness of evidence-based practice. Finally, the factsheet explains the practical implications of applying evidence-based practice to real-life organisational scenarios.
What is evidence-based practice?
At the heart of evidence-based practice is the idea that good decision-making is achieved through critical thinking and drawing on the best available evidence. Evidence-based
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 1 of 8
practice leads to decisions and actions that are more likely to have the desired effect and are less reliant on anecdotes, received wisdom and personal experience – sources that are not trustworthy on their own. Evidence-based HR practice draws together published research and people analytics with professional expertise and stakeholder opinions.
Why is evidence-based practice important?
In their report Evidence-based management: the basic principles, Barends, Rousseau and Briner of the Center for Evidence-Based Management (CEBMa) outline the challenge of biased and unreliable management decisions. They show that it’s common in decision- making for popular ideas of management, and personal experience which is highly susceptible to errors and bias, to be prioritised ahead of sound, critically-appraised evidence. They argue that individuals at all levels of employment have a moral obligation to use the best available evidence when making important decisions.
Assessing the reliability and validity of evidence becomes more important as the mass of opinion and claims continue to grow. As discussed in our reports Cognition, decision and expertise and Our minds at work: the behavioural science of HR, because people have limited cognitive resource and time, our minds use mental shortcuts or ‘heuristics’ to make decisions easier: our brains are less able to multi-task than we expect. This opens us to various types of bias. For example, the ‘availability heuristic’ means we judge the likelihood of an event based on how readily a memory of that event comes to mind. More specifically, ‘confirmation bias’ can lead recruiters to form an early opinion of a candidate, based on a personal characteristic that won’t affect their performance, and then look for examples that align with this positive or negative impression.
Received wisdom and the notion of ‘best practice’ also creates bias. One organisation may look to another as an example of sound practice and decision-making, without critically evaluating the effectiveness of their actions. And while scientific literature on key issues in the field is vital, there’s a gap between this and the perceptions of practitioners, who are often unaware of the depth of research available.
Even when looking at research, we can be naturally biased. In our In search of the best available evidence report, we note the tendency to ‘cherry-pick’ research that backs up a perspective or opinion and ignores research that does not, even if it gives stronger evidence on cause-and-effect relationships. This bad habit is hard to avoid – it's even common among academic researchers. So we need approaches that help us determine which research evidence we should trust.
Our ‘insight’ article When the going gets tough, the tough get evidence explains the importance of taking an evidence-based approach to decision making in light of the COVID-19 pandemic. It emphasises and discusses how decision makers can and should
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 2 of 8
become savvy consumers of research.
The four sources of evidence
Barends, Rousseau and Briner define evidence as information, facts or data supporting (or contradicting) a claim, hypothesis or assumption.
The issues above demonstrate the limitations of basing decisions on personal experience alone. It’s important to consider other factors that will most benefit an organisation and its employees. Decision-makers should find out what is known by analysing four key sources.
Scientific literature on management has become more readily available in recent years, particularly in academic journals. Other topics, such as psychology and sociology, also apply to many issues facing managers. Their ability to search for and appraise research for its relevance and trustworthiness is essential.
Organisational data must be examined as it highlights issues needing a manager’s attention. This data can come externally from customers or clients (customer satisfaction, repeated business), or internally from employees (levels of job satisfaction, retention rates). There’s also the comparison between ‘hard’ evidence, such as turnover rate and productivity levels, and ‘soft’ elements, like perceptions of culture and attitudes towards leadership. Gaining access to organisational data is key to determining causes of problems, solutions and implementing solutions.
Expertise and judgement of practitioners, managers, consultants and business leaders is important to ensure effective decision-making. This professional knowledge differs from opinion as it’s accumulated over time through reflection on outcomes of similar actions taken in similar contexts. It reflects specialised knowledge acquired through repeated experience of specialised activities.
Stakeholders, both internal (employees, managers, board members) and external (suppliers, investors, shareholders), may be affected by an organisation’s decisions and their consequences. Their values reflect what they deem important, which in turn affects how they respond to the organisation’s decisions. Acquiring knowledge of their concerns provides a frame of reference for analysing evidence.
Combining the evidence
One very important element of evidence-based practice is collating evidence from
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 3 of 8
different sources. There are six ways – depicted in our infographic below – which will encourage this.
1. Asking – translating a practical issue or problem into an answerable question. 2. Acquiring – systematically searching for and retrieving evidence. 3. Appraising – critically judging the trustworthiness and relevance of the evidence. 4. Aggregating – weighing and pulling together the evidence. 5. Applying – incorporating the evidence into a decision-making process. 6. Assessing – evaluating the outcome of the decision taken so as to increase the
likelihood.
Through these six steps, practitioners can ensure the quality of evidence is not ignored are able to evaluate the trustworthiness of evidence available. Appraisal varies depending on the source of evidence, but generally involves the same questions:
1. Where and how is evidence gathered? 2. Is it the best evidence available? 3. Is it sufficient to reach a conclusion? 4. Might it be biased in a particular direction? If so, why?
Evidence based practice infographic
(536 KB)
Misconceptions in evidence-based practice decision-making
There are some misconceptions and barriers which prevent the uptake of an evidence- based approach. However, each can be rebuffed:
Evidence-based practice ignores practitioner’s professional experience: This simply contradicts the above arguments. Evidence-based practice does not prioritise one source of evidence over any other. Rather, accumulating evidence from the four sources discussed is most important.
Evidence-based practice is all about numbers and statistics: While critical and statistical thinking is important, the process is not exclusively about numbers and quantitative methods.
Managers need to make decisions quickly and don’t have time for evidence-
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 4 of 8
based practice: Even quick decisions require the most robust and trustworthy evidence.
The unique nature of each organisation means evidence from scientific literature does not apply: Different organisations tend to face similar issues and respond in similar ways.
Briner argues that barriers exist in both academic and organisational spheres. He claims that students are often taught to learn theories, which may be questionable. Instead, they should be taught to think critically and for themselves, while questioning the quality of information. In organisations, political and career incentives may once again encourage sticking with the status quo, or current processes, which may not be effective.
Evidence of evidence-based practice effectiveness
CEBMa research indicates that an evidence-based approach is more effective in various ways than less structured decision-making processes which often favour personal experience over sound research:
Risk assessments based on the accumulated experience of many people are generally more accurate than those based on one person’s experience, ensuring forecasts are made independently before being combined.
Judgements based on hard data and statistics are more accurate than those based on individual experience.
Knowledge from scientific literature is more accurate than expert opinions.
Decisions made through a combination of critically-appraised evidence from multiple sources yield more effective outcomes than those based on a single source of evidence.
These points reinforce the value in adopting a critical mindset – questioning assumptions and trustworthiness – with the goal of answering the question ‘Is this the best available evidence?’
How to carry out evidence-based practice
Pietro Marenco of ScienceForWork states that much research on evidence-based practice
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 5 of 8
has focused on what it is and why it is needed, rather than how to do it. However, a more practical approach has been encouraged in recent years, with practitioners in organisations being trained on the principles and know-how to make evidence-based decisions. A three-day training course on evidence-based management, the first of its kind, took place in Belgium in 2017 and focused on applying the theory of the evidence- based approach to real-life management decisions.
As the professional body for HR and people development, the CIPD takes an evidence- based view on the future of work – and, importantly, what this means for our profession. By doing this, we can help prepare professionals and employers for what’s coming, while also equipping them to succeed and shape a changing world of work.
Our Profession Map has been developed to do this. It defines the knowledge, behaviours and values which should underpin today’s people profession. It’s been developed as an international standard against which an organisation can benchmark its values. At its core are the concepts of being principles-led, evidence-based and outcomes driven. This recognises the importance of using the four forms of evidence in a principled manner to develop positive outcomes for stakeholders. As evidence is often of varying degrees of quality, it’s important that people professionals consider if and how they should incorporate the different types of evidence into their work.
Evidence-based practice is a useful concept for understanding whether practices in HR lead to the desired outcomes, and whether these practices are being used to the best effect. Listen to our podcast Evidence-based practice for HR: beyond fads and fiction which features a discussion on what evidence-based practice is, why it matters, and how to apply it at work.
One example of evidence-based practice could be the decision to implement a performance management system. In this situation, performance management data from the business, scientific evidence, insights from key stakeholders, and professional HR expertise would be used to develop the best performance management system for the specific organisational context. Examples of evidence for and against forms of performance management is given in our report Could do better? Assessing what works in performance management.
We’ve also published evidence reviews on a number of other topics, including employee engagement, employee resilience and flexible working and diversity. All our evidence reviews will be featured on our Evidence Hub page, launching soon. For a learning and development perspective, listen to our Evidence-based L&D podcast. There's alsoh Using evidence in HR decision-making: 10 lessons from the COVID-19 crisis, part of our coronavirus webinar series.
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 6 of 8
Useful contacts and further reading
Contacts
Center for Evidence-Based Management (CEBMa)
ScienceForWork - Evidence-based management
Books and reports
BARENDS, E. and ROUSSEAU, D. (2018) Evidence-based management: how to use evidence to make better organizational decisions. Kogan Page: London
RANDELL, G. and TOPLIS, J. (2014) Towards organizational fitness: a guide to diagnosis and treatment. London: Gower.
Visit the CIPD and Kogan Page Bookshop to see all our priced publications currently in print.
Journal articles
BRINER, R. (2019) The basics of evidence-based practice. People + Strategy. Vol 42, No 1. pp16-21.
LAGUNA, L., POELL, R. and MEERMAN, M. (2019) Practitioner research for the professionalization of human resources practice: empirical data from the Netherlands. Human Resource Development International. Vol 22, No 1. pp68-90. Reviewed in In a Nutshell, issue 84.
ROUSSEAU, D. (2020) Making evidence based-decisions in an uncertain world. Organizational Dynamics. Vol 49, Issue 1, January-March. Reviewed in In a Nutshell, issue 96.
SEVERSON, E. (2019) Real-life EBM: what it feels like to lead evidence-based HR. People + Strategy. Vol 42, No 1. pp22-27.
WRIGHT, P.M. and ULRICH, M.D. (2017) A road well traveled: the past, present, and future journey of strategic human resource management. The Annual Review of Organisational Psychology and Organisational Behaviour. Vol 4. pp45-65.
CIPD members can use our online journals to find articles from over 300 journal titles relevant to HR.
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 7 of 8
Members and People Management subscribers can see articles on the People Management website.
This factsheet was written by Jake Young.
© Copyright Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2021, 151 The Broadway, London SW19 1JQ, UK Incorporated by Royal Charter, Registered Charity no. 1079797 123 Page 8 of 8
ethical-decision-making-2015-eight-perspectives-on-workplace-dilemmas_tcm18-9564.pdf
Research report August 2015
Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
The CIPD is the professional body for HR and people development. The not-for-profit organisation champions better work and working lives and has been setting the benchmark for excellence in people and organisation development for more than 100 years. It has 140,000 members across the world, provides thought leadership through independent research on the world of work, and offers professional training and accreditation for those working in HR and learning and development.
1 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas Research report
Acknowledgements 1
Foreword 2
Introduction 3
Executive summary 6
1 The Fairness Lens 8
2 The Merit Lens 12
3 The Markets Lens 16
4 The Democracy Lens 20
5 The Well-being Lens 24
6 The Rights and Duties Lens 29
7 The Character Lens 34
8 The Handing Down Lens 39
Conclusion 43
Contents
Acknowledgements This review was written by Dr Sam Clark, Lancaster University, for the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development.
2 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 3 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
As the professional body for HR and people development, our goal is to support the profession in championing better work and working lives. We remain focused on finding the sweet spot between the construct of work itself and people’s experience at work, and championing people management systems and practices that create value for the employees, businesses, economies and society.
We are continuously advancing HR knowledge in the areas of work, workforce and workplace to evolve standards for ‘good’ people management. But, as the world of work is evolving fast and is growing more diverse, there’s no ‘golden rule’ or ‘best practice’ that enables HR professionals to operate effectively in this rapidly changing environment. Deliberation and situational judgement, informed by the latest evidence, are among the core skills that will define the HR profession of the future.
Practitioners’ ability to recognise and resolve ethical dilemmas is fundamental to remaining effective and gaining trust with its key stakeholders, when exercising professional judgement. Tailoring people management solutions inevitably raises questions of fairness, trade-offs between the short-term and long-term horizons, and the interdependencies between businesses and the local communities they operate in. Should work always be good for people, or do difficult times call for difficult measures? Do talented, hard-working people deserve to make more money than those
who need it the most? Should people have a say in what happens to them at work, or would that conflict with efficient business operations?
This review is focused on helping practitioners navigate their choices about designing and implementing HR systems and practices, by describing key ethical perspectives on work, highlighting the tensions which practitioners are likely to face when making a decision. Conscious deliberation of these options, we believe, will help create organisations that aren’t just effective in pursuit of their instrumental interests, but are sustainable, because they create shared value for people, the business and society.
Ultimately this review will feed into our People Profession: now and for the future strategy. It will help us develop a clearer definition of what better work and working lives means; identify the basic principles that constitute good people management and development, regardless of the context; and explore how the CIPD and the HR profession of the future will help organisations put those principles into practice.
Foreword
‘This review will help us develop a clearer defnition of what better work and working lives means.’
3 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Work is fundamental to all our lives. It’s a central arena in which we understand and shape our lives and ourselves. We inhabitants of modern state-capitalist societies spend far more of our lives at work than, for example, hunting and gathering peoples, and our work is also distinctive in kind: most of us work as employees in bureaucratic organisations which divide labour into distinct specialisms, and especially into head (supervisory, planning) and hand (order- following, menial) work. The historically peculiar volume and nature of modern work makes it a pressing ethical problem for us.
Contemporary moral and political philosophy has had surprisingly little to say directly about work (with some honourable exceptions, for which see ‘Further reading’ below). But work vividly raises questions which are central to philosophical ethics: about the justice of institutional processes and structures, about giving people what they deserve, about choosing and following rules, about collective decision-making and self-command, about living well, about rights, about what kind of person each of us should aspire to be, and about how individuals relate to our larger contexts in the world and over time. We can therefore bring philosophical approaches to those questions to bear on the subject of work.
The guiding question of this review is: what ways of thinking about work does philosophical ethics offer? This question is distinct from a question we won’t address: why should I do what ethics requires?
The review describes ways people can and do think, but doesn’t attempt to show that it makes sense to think in these ways, or to decide between or criticise different ways of thinking.
What use are these ideas from philosophy? First, ethical questions – questions about what we should do and be – aren’t optional for us. Ethics isn’t just for private life: to say, for example, ‘I just pursue my organisation’s aims when I’m at work’ already is an ethical decision, and a very dubious one – compare it with ‘I was just following orders’. Philosophical ethics addresses an inescapable part of our experience.
However, second, there is no algorithm for deciding what to do, and no option to delegate our dilemmas. The ideas described in this review are ways of elaborating, reshaping and expanding our responses to the choices that each of us can’t avoid, not alternatives to choice or to thought. Thinking about what to do and be is never going to be a mechanical application of a rule: it’s always going to require effort, imagination and judgement, and it’s often going to be inconclusive. Philosophical ethics is a help, not a substitute, for ethical thinking.
We will answer the review’s guiding question by describing eight ethical ‘lenses’: ways of seeing and re-imagining our ethical predicament. They are: fairness, merit, markets, democracy, well- being, rights and duties, character, and handing down. Each draws on a major tradition of thought
Introduction
‘Ethics aren’t just for our private lives, ‘‘I just pursue my organisation’s aims when I’m at work’’ already is an ethical decision.’
4 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 5 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
in philosophical ethics, but the territory could be mapped in other ways, and the review makes no claim to be comprehensive.
These lenses aren’t necessarily mutually exclusive. Some might co-exist but be appropriate to different kinds of decision or situation. Some might support one another (the best case for democracy might be that democratic voice is a human right, for example). But there are also some tensions and potential confusions between them: some can’t be applied at once (fairness versus well-being, for example); some are easy to conflate, but give very different advice once distinguished (merit versus markets, for example).
The rest of this review sets out these eight lenses. Each lens gives three layers of detail: a ‘bumper- sticker’ one-sentence description; a more detailed layman’s description; and its philosophical background. We then consider the application of the lens to a running example, which can apply to a real-life situation in a business. That example is as follows:
The Faculty of Arts and Humanities at Sun City University needs a new dean. (A dean is a senior academic administrator, typically responsible both for the strategic management of a faculty – a group of academic departments – and for representing that faculty in university- level planning.) What ethical considerations should we bring to our search for someone to take up this post, and to the situation more generally?
For each lens, we will offer appropriate direction to thought about this case in order to help with application, but not to decide the case: again, there are no algorithms for ethical decision-making, and no option to avoid thinking about our ethical dilemmas. Each lens then ends with suggestions for further reading.
5 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Modern and non-modern work:
BOURDIEU, P. et al (1999) The weight of the world: social suffering in contemporary society. Cambridge: Polity.
BRAVERMAN, H. (1974) Labour and monopoly capital: the degradation of work in the twentieth century. New York: Monthly Review Press.
DONKIN, R. (2001) Blood, sweat and tears: the evolution of work. London: Texere.
GINI, A. (2001) My job my self: work and the creation of the modern individual. London: Routledge.
LASLETT, P. (1965) The world we have lost. London: Methuen.
WRIGHT MILLS, C. (2002) White collar: the American middle classes (50th anniversary edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
SAHLINS, M. (1974) Stone age economics. London: Tavistock Publications.
SENNETT, R. (2006) The culture of the new capitalism. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
TERKEL, S. (2004) Working: people talk about what they do all day and how they feel about what they do (with a new foreword). New York: New Press.
Ethics of work:
ARENDT, H. (1999) The human condition (2nd edition). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
CLARK, S. (2015) Good work. Journal of Applied Philosophy. Advance online publication. doi: 10.1111/japp.12137.
CRAWFORD, M. (2011) The case for working with your hands: or why office work is bad for us and fixing things feels good. London: Penguin.
LANE, R.E. (1991) The market experience. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
MCCLOSKEY, D.N. (2006) The bourgeois virtues: ethics for an age of commerce. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
MUIRHEAD, R. (2004) Just work. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
WALZER, M. (1983) Spheres of justice: a defense of pluralism and equality. New York: Basic Books: Chapters 6 and 7.
Introductions to moral and political philosophy:
BENN, P. (1998) Ethics. London: Routledge.
BLACKBURN, S. (2001) Being good: an introduction to ethics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
MILLER, D. (2003) A very short introduction to political philosophy. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
KNOWLES, D. (2001) Political philosophy. London: Routledge.
NORMAN, R.J. (1998) The moral philosophers: an introduction to ethics (2nd edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
SWIFT, A. (2001) Political philosophy: a beginner’s guide for students and politicians. Oxford: Polity.
WILLIAMS, B. (2003) Morality: an introduction to ethics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
WOLFF, J. (2006) An introduction to political philosophy (revised edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Further reading on philosophy
6 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 7 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
A large proportion of our lives is spent at work, and so the workplace becomes a central arena through which we understand and shape our lives and ourselves. For example, work, and the outcomes of working – such as the decline of trust in large corporates and growing wage inequality – raise fundamental questions about the role of business in society, the legitimacy of bureaucratic structures, and the meaning of organisational justice.
Ethical questions about what we should do and how we should behave at work aren’t inescapable. Avoiding responsibility, for example, by saying, ‘I just pursue my organisation’s aims when I’m at work’ is an ethical choice in itself, and a very dubious one – compare it with ‘I was just following orders’.
At the same time, there is no algorithm for navigating workplace dilemmas, as different situations and contexts highlight different ethical tensions. There will never be a ‘golden rule’ that fits all ethical decisions: it’s always going to require effort, imagination and judgement, and the outcome is often going to be inconclusive.
This review aims to aid ethical decision-making by describing the possible ways of thinking about work as offered by philosophical ethics. It identifies eight lenses, none of which represent the ‘right’ or ‘wrong’ ways of making decisions in the workplace, but offer different perspectives on work dilemmas. The lenses are:
1 Fairness Everyone in an organisation should be able to agree to it, whatever their place in it.
To see what universal agreement requires, ask yourself, ‘How would I design this if I knew I was going to be in the worst position my design creates?’ So, for example, if you’re designing a disciplinary procedure, you should ask yourself, ‘How would I want this to work if I were falsely accused of a firing offence?’ A procedure which you wouldn’t accept if you were in that position wouldn’t be accepted by whoever actually occupies that position, and therefore couldn’t be accepted by everyone, and should be rejected as not fair.
Executive summary
Fairness
Everyone in an organisation should be able to agree to it, whatever their place in it.
Well-being
Work should be good for us.
Merit
Jobs and their rewards should track talent and hard work.
Rights and Duties
Everyone has rights to do some things and to be free of some things, and everyone has duties not to violate others’ rights.
Markets
Jobs and their rewards should follow from voluntary market exchanges.
Character
Each of us should work to develop the best ethical character for our roles.
Democracy
No one should be subject to a regime in which they have no say.
Handing Down
We can’t reinvent or master the world, and are instead responsible for conserving and maintaining the small part of it over which we currently have stewardship, and for passing it on undamaged to our descendants.
Summary of the eight lenses
7 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
2 Merit Jobs and their rewards should track talent and hard work.
According to this lens, workplaces should be designed to guarantee equal opportunities: to prevent interference from irrelevant characteristics such as gender, race, sexuality and social class, and to allow actual merit (worth, quality, personal value) to show itself. So, for example, hiring procedures should exclude irrelevant information about gender and race, and avoid bias, by anonymising CVs.
3 Markets Jobs and their rewards should follow from voluntary market exchanges.
This lens suggests that ethical rules neutrally referee and put bounds on our voluntary interactions, but don’t pursue any particular outcome. Any distribution of positions and their rewards which results from exchanges and agreements between individuals, within the rules, is an ethically acceptable distribution, whether or not it tracks merit or any other pre-existing pattern. Some people are lucky enough to have scarce qualities which are in demand: it’s ethically acceptable, even though not merited, that they command high wages. So, for example, the just wage for a CEO or a nurse is the current market rate for CEOs or nurses, and nothing to do with how talented they are, nor how hard they work, nor equal distribution, nor any other patterned distribution.
4 Democracy No one should be subject to a regime in which they have no say.
The democratic perspective says that if a decision affects your interests, you should be involved in making it, and that includes decisions about how your workplace is organised and run. Workplaces should be designed to create effective voice for everyone whose interests are at stake. So, for example, corporate policy should be made democratically by all employees (and perhaps by members of wider communities whose interests are also at stake in corporate decisions). Corporate policy-making by an unelected CEO or board is tyranny, just as state policy-making by an unelected monarch is.
5 Well-being Work should be good for us.
Work is one of our main arenas of practice towards living well or having well-being, or one of the main threats to doing so. According to this lens, workplaces should be designed to promote well-being for its own sake, not just because of its instrumental benefits for morale or efficiency.
6 Rights and Duties Everyone has rights to do some things and to be free of some things, and everyone has duties not to violate others’ rights.
Through the Rights and Duties Lens, human rights forbid some actions and demand other actions, regardless of their consequences. The idea of rights is immensely successful in practice, as shown for example by the influence of the United Nations’ Universal Declaration of Human Rights – even though it raises troubling problems in philosophical theory. So, for example, workplaces ought to respect human rights to equal pay for equal work and to join unions.
7 Character Each of us should work to develop the best ethical character for our roles.
A character is a set of deep, consistent, closely connected psychological tendencies to feel and act in the right way (these tendencies are sometimes called virtues). Having character involves committing to and caring for particular individuals and institutions. According to this lens, we should face ethical dilemmas by trying to become more like our heroes and to treat the particular people and things we care about rightly and lovingly, rather than by trying to apply abstract general rules. So, for example, if you’re offered a bribe, you should think about what the best people you know would do in this situation and try to be like them, rather than trying to find a rule to follow or to reason your way impartially to an answer.
8 Handing Down We can’t reinvent or master the world, and are instead responsible for conserving and maintaining the small part of it over which we currently have stewardship, and for passing it on undamaged to our descendants.
This covers the institutions we work in, the wider political and social world they depend on, and the natural environment we all depend on. According to this lens, workplaces should be designed and assessed with an eye to what we were given to look after by our predecessors, and which we’ll hand on to our descendants. So, for example, keeping a firm in family ownership might be more important than maximising its short-term profits, and maintaining a natural resource might be more important than exploiting it.
9 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
2 The Merit Lens
1 The Fairness Lens Everyone in an organisation should be able to agree to it, whatever their place in it.
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
9 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background This lens is based on the influential work of the twentieth-century political philosopher John Rawls.
Rawls’s view is a development of the social contract tradition. Social contract theories begin with a story:
Once upon a time, humans lived without a government, without settled social institutions, without hierarchy, perhaps even as isolated individuals. Then, because that state of nature was less than ideal, we decided to get together and jointly agree to organise – to set up government or society – to make things better. And because we all agreed to it, what we set up was justified, that is, endorsed by morality or reason or rationality.
The contrast is with another, more realistic story:
Once upon a time, humans lived without government. Then, a group of bandits got fed up of living in tents and riding from village to village stealing, and settled down in one place. They intimidated the people there into paying them for ‘protection’, started telling their subjects what to do and punishing them when they disobeyed, made up stories about how the gods wanted them to be in charge… and turned into government. And because this government was set up by force and fraud, not by agreement, it wasn’t justified.
Social contract theory at root says: the system or institution which was
(or could have been) set up by mutual agreement between free and equal people is ethically okay; the system which was (or could only have been) set up as a protection racket – for the benefit of some at the cost of others – is not. Any system or institution is to be morally assessed by investigating whether or not there would be compelling reasons for everyone to agree to it if we were setting it up out of the state of nature.
This story – from state of nature to agreement to justification – is a way of dramatising the idea that there are no natural hierarchies or institutions or authorities among people. Everyone starts as a free, uncommitted individual with equal standing. ‘In the beginning, there were no kings, no landlords, no bosses.’ In some earlier contract theories, for example John Locke’s or Jean-Jacques Rousseau’s, this starting equality is imagined as a real prehistorical time before humans formed communities. But of course there was no such time – we’ve been social animals since long before we were biologically human – and more recent contract theories have tended to use starting equality not as a description of prehistory, but to make vivid the basic moral equality or equal standing of all humans.
Contract theories’ question is: Given that there is no natural order, what artificial order should we make? They answer it by considering what order free and equal individuals would have reason to make together. Most actual systems and institutions
According to the Fairness Lens, everyone in an organisation should be able to agree to it whatever their place in
it. To see what such a universal agreement requires, ask yourself, ‘How would I design this if I knew I was going
to be in the worst position my design creates?’ So, for example, if you’re designing a disciplinary procedure, you
should ask yourself, ‘How would I want this to work if I were falsely accused of a firing offence?’ A procedure
which you wouldn’t accept if you were in that position wouldn’t be accepted by whoever actually occupies that
position, and therefore couldn’t be accepted by everyone, and should be rejected as not fair.
‘To see what universal agreement requires, ask yourself, ‘‘How would I design this if I knew I was going to be in the worst position my design creates?’’’
10 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 11 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
have complex and ambiguous histories involving mixtures of violence and agreement, and most actual humans are not really free, factually equal, uncommitted individuals, but modern contract theorists are interested in whether our institutions could be agreed to rather than whether they actually were. Contract theorists’ specific answers to their question differ, but the basic ideas behind them are (1) impartial (2) construction (3) by agreement.
(1) Starting equality in the state of nature is one form of impartiality: if we’re all equally important, no one should get more creative authority than anyone else. Imagining yourself in positions other than your own is a way of dramatising and encouraging that impartiality. By thinking about what’s acceptable from different perspectives, you can respect the equal standing of other people.
(2) If there’s no natural order, we need to construct one to meet our needs. Order comes from us, not from outside (from gods or nature or tradition), and it’s therefore up to us what order we make for ourselves to live in. And if the order we find ourselves in doesn’t suit us, we can remake it.
(3) If the order we live in is up to us, and we are all morally equal, all of us need to agree to an order for it to be morally acceptable. No one has authority to impose an order on others, because authority is only created by the order we make together. One way of understanding that idea is as democracy: actually deciding on an order by debate and agreement from our different perspectives (see further Lens 4: Democracy). But contract theorists use the idea of consent in a different way: they try to show that it would be reasonable for an abstract
representative person to agree to a particular order, and therefore that everyone hypothetically consents or can consent to that order. This is why, in the short description above, I say, ‘A procedure which you wouldn’t accept if you were in that position wouldn’t be accepted by whoever actually occupies that position, and therefore couldn’t be accepted by everyone’. One reply is, ‘perhaps whoever actually occupies that position has different needs or wants from me’, which might be true, but misses the point about starting equality and its representation in contract theory.
Rawls calls his particular version of contract theory ‘justice as fairness’. The detail is beyond our scope here, but at its root is the same idea of impartial construction by agreement. Rawls’s equivalent of the state of nature is the original position, behind the veil of ignorance: we are to imagine ourselves as competent adults who know general facts about humans and human societies, but know nothing about our own particular abilities, character, life-plans, talents, gender, race, nationality or social position. Rawls’s equivalent of the agreement is an argument that any such individual would agree only to institutions which
equally divide all the benefits of social co-operation (or which allow inequalities only when they make the worst off better off than they would be in the equal division, for example by incentivising talented people to become doctors). To agree to anything else would be to risk finding oneself in an unacceptably bad position when the veil is removed.
Think of dividing a cake between children: the best tactic is to give the knife to the oldest child and tell her she can cut any way she likes, but that she’ll get last pick of the slices she makes. Because everyone behind the veil of ignorance is the same – all our differences are veiled – that any one individual would agree only to equality shows that everyone has reason to agree only to equality. So, only the egalitarian society is justified.
The original position and veil of ignorance obviously aren’t real or even possible: they’re a way of dramatising the kind of impartial thinking we need to do – imagining that we might be the person made worst off by the institution we’re designing or assessing – if we’re to ensure fairness in our actual institutions.
The new dean According to the Fairness Lens, we should focus on the institutions and processes by which we create and assign the role of dean: it’s right to have such a system at all only if everyone could agree to it, and we test for that agreement by considering whether we’d accept being in the worst position we create. We need to think, for example, about whether our hierarchy incentivises talented, hard-working and decent people to train for and seek roles high in it, and about whether our recruitment procedures reliably pick out such people. We need to think about the situation of those potentially most badly affected by the dean’s decisions – staff on short-term contracts, for instance. Would we accept being under the authority of the dean if we were in their position? What would the dean need to be and do, and how would they need to be selected, to gain our acceptance? Is there some other institutional arrangement which would better meet the demand for universal acceptance?
11 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Rawls’s relevant works: RAWLS, J. (1971, rev. ed. 1999) A theory of justice. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
RAWLS, J. (2001) Justice as fairness: a restatement. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
RAWLS, J. (1993, expanded ed. 1996) Political liberalism. New York: Columbia University Press.
Overviews: http://philosophyfaculty.ucsd. edu/faculty/rarneson/Courses/ Rawlschaps1and2.pdf
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ original-position/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ public-reason/
Textbooks and introductions: FREEMAN, S. (2007) Rawls. London: Routledge.
KYMLICKA, W. (2003) Contemporary political philosophy: an introduction (2nd edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press: Chapter 3.
LOVETT, F. (2011) John Rawls’s ‘A theory of justice’: a reader’s guide. London: Continuum.
More advanced work on Rawls and Rawlsianism: DANIELS, N. (ed.) (1975) Reading Rawls: critical studies on Rawls’ ‘A theory of justice’. London: Basil Blackwell.
FARRELLY, C. (ed.) (2004) Contemporary political theory: a reader. New York: Sage: Parts 1 and 2.
FREEMAN, S. (ed.) (2003) The Cambridge companion to Rawls. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
GOODIN, R.E. and PETTIT, P. (eds) (1997) Contemporary political philosophy: an anthology. London: Blackwell: Part 3.
MATRAVERS, D. and PIKE, J. (eds) (2003) Debates in contemporary political philosophy: an anthology. London: Routledge: Parts 2 and 3.
NUSSBAUM, M.C. (2006) Frontiers of justice: disability, nationality, species membership. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
Historically important contract theories: HOBBES, T. (1994 [1651]) Leviathan (ed. Edwin Curley). Indianapolis, IN: Hackett.
LOCKE, J. (1980 [1689]) Second treatise of government (properly An essay concerning the true original, extent, and end of civil government) (ed. C.B. Macpherson). Indianapolis, IN: Hackett.
ROUSSEAU, J-J. (1994 [1762]) The social contract (trans. Christopher Betts). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
KANT, I. (1970 [1793]) On the common saying: ‘this may be true in theory, but it does not apply in practice’. In: Political writings (ed. Hans Reiss, trans. H.B. Nisbet). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
These texts are available in multiple editions, as well as free online in many cases. The editions suggested here are scholarly as well as easily available.
Significant contemporary work in the contract tradition: BARRY, B. (1995) A treatise on social justice, volume 2: justice as impartiality. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
GAUTHIER, D. (1986) Morals by agreement. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
HAMPTON, J. (1986) Hobbes and the social contract tradition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
KAVKA, G.S. (1986) Hobbesian moral and political theory. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
SCANLON, T.M. (1998) What we owe to each other. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
Further reading on the Fairness Lens
13 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 The Fairness Lens
2 The Merit Lens Jobs and their rewards should track talent and hard work.
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
13 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background A meritocratic institution assigns position, wealth, power, status and other rewards in accordance with individual merit. Compare meritocracy with aristocracy as an alternative way to assign rewards: an aristocratic institution assigns rewards in accordance with ‘blood’, that is, accidents of birth. (The word ‘meritocracy’ was coined by the journalist Michael Young in his 1958 dystopia The Rise of the Meritocracy, 1870–2033, but his original satirical intent is now mostly forgotten.)
Meritocracy is one, popular version of the idea that the ethical thing to do is to give people what they deserve. This runs all through popular morality and common sense: we say that hard work deserves to be rewarded, that the better team deserves the championship (even if they didn’t actually win on the day), that good deeds deserve recognition, that criminals deserve to be punished, and so on.
Claims about desert have a distinctive three-part structure:
A person deserves a treatment (good or bad) in virtue of a desert base.
All three parts raise technical questions, but we’ll concentrate on desert bases: the base for deserving something might be a performance in an appropriate context (you deserve the gold medal because you won the 100-metre sprint final); it might be a mere random event (you deserve the jackpot because your lottery numbers came up); it might be an ongoing property (someone else deserved
to win the medal, because she’s the better athlete; you were just lucky on the day). We’re interested in this last kind of case, where the desert base is some deep and consistent property which belongs to someone.
In one sense, all theories of justice are desert theories, if justice is giving people what they are due. Some of these theories are egalitarian. We could say that the relevant desert base is ‘being human’, for example: all humans deserve equal treatment. But other theories, including the meritocratic theory, take it that the proper desert base for social reward is unequally distributed: some of us have more of it than others, and should therefore get a larger share of the available rewards than others.
The meritocrat typically claims two things:
1 The proper desert base for position, wealth, power and status is merit, understood as some combination of talent and hard work. One might have been born rich or poor, noble or common, white or black, male or female, but these things are matters of luck, and should not affect the distribution of rewards. Talent and hard work, on the other hand, should.
2 There are real facts of desert, and institutions should be designed to discover and respond to them.
Claim 1 challenges the pre-modern aristocratic idea of noble birth and patronage, and was radical in its day even if – at least to some cultures – it seems obvious now.
‘We further need to think about substantive rather than just formal equal opportunities: are some groups systematically disadvantaged in the education which develops these qualities?’
According to the Merit Lens, jobs and their rewards should track talent and hard work. This means workplaces
should be designed to guarantee equal opportunities: to prevent interference from irrelevant characteristics such
as gender, race, sexuality and social class, and to allow actual merit (worth, quality, personal value) to show itself.
So, for example, hiring procedures should exclude irrelevant information about gender and race, and avoid bias, by
anonymising CVs.
14 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 15 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
The meritocrat takes talent to be an innate property, not much affected by environment, and discoverable by scientific testing. A meritocratic educational system, for example, is supposed to discover and encourage talent, and so allow each person to fulfil their distinct individual potential. Talent has to be independently discoverable in some way – we have to be able to tell that someone’s real talent was wasted because of lack of opportunity, for example – or else meritocracy collapses into the unhelpful theory that anyone who is successful deserves to be.
The meritocrat takes hard work, in contrast to talent, as a matter of responsible choice. In particular, people who don’t work hard are supposed to have chosen not to, and therefore to be responsible for the effects this has on their prospects.
Claim 2 makes the distribution of social rewards analogous to criminal justice: the accused is either guilty or innocent; the purpose of a trial is to discover which, and treat them appropriately. Similarly, merit is independently real, and institutions should be set up to discover and respond to it.
These two claims jointly lead to a demand for equality of opportunity: the removal of barriers to success grounded in such irrelevant matters as race, gender, social class, and so on, leaving the way clear for innate talent, nurtured by a choice to work hard, to show itself and be justly rewarded.
Equality of opportunity can be understood either as formal or, more demandingly, as substantive. There is formal equality of opportunity when rewards are assigned not by birth, gender, race, and so on, but by procedurally fair competition: an exam which anyone can take and which is marked anonymously, for example. But imagine a society run by a hereditary warrior class which goes through a ‘careers open to
talent’ revolution, so that warriors are now chosen by a competition anyone can enter, instead of by birth. We might find that, although anyone can compete to be a warrior, the winners who actually become warriors are almost all from the same hereditary class as before: they are better nourished and therefore taller and stronger than their competitors from other classes, they train from an early age in the skills the competition tests, and they easily find sympathetic mentors and role models among those who are already warriors. This society is meritocratic in a formal sense. But we might think that there is still something wrong here, which would be remedied by making sure children from other classes get more food, by setting up mentoring programmes and scholarships to military academies, by making the rare warriors from other classes visible as role models, and so on. These interventions would move us towards substantive equality of opportunity: not only can anyone compete, everyone has adequate background for being actually competitive.
(By analogy, imagine a society in which everyone has formal equality of opportunity to run for president, but almost all presidents actually come from the same social class, often having attended one of the same few elite universities, sometimes even coming from the same wealthy family over generations.)
One of the few things that John Rawls and his major early critic
Robert Nozick agreed about was that desert has nothing to do with how a society should distribute its rewards: meritocracy is a mistake.
Rawls attacked meritocracy by arguing that there is no meaningful difference between the claims of blood – being a member of the hereditary warrior class – and the claims of talent and hard work. Talent is innate, not something we choose or are responsible for – no one chooses whether or not to have a good ear for music or to be quick at maths. The capacity for hard work is a result of early childhood experience setting up motivational structures, including especially the ability to defer gratification, in ways which are also not matters of choice. So, the only consistent positions are: (a) accept that being an aristocrat does mean that you deserve a sinecure; or (b) reject the idea of meritocratic desert entirely. Rawls of course argues that we should pick (b), say that there are no natural hierarchies – of talent any more than of blood – and instead distribute social rewards fairly (see Lens 1: Fairness).
Nozick attacked meritocracy from a different direction, arguing that social rewards should be distributed by voluntary agreement in a market rather than on any pattern (see Lens 3: Markets), and that the only way to reward merit would be to set up a monstrous state bureaucracy to decide each individual’s fate: ‘you may want to be a musician, but our tests say your talents lie in accountancy.’
The new dean According to the Merit Lens, we should consider what qualities are needed for the role, and design a selection procedure to pick out those qualities while bracketing other, irrelevant qualities. We further need to think about substantive rather than just formal equal opportunities: are some groups systematically disadvantaged in the education which develops these qualities? Should we aim to hire someone from a historically disadvantaged group, for example a woman? Pulling back a bit from our immediate problem, is a hierarchy involving the position of dean the best way to recognise and reward merit?
15 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ desert/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ equal-opportunity/
Textbooks and introductions: FARRELLY, C. (2004) An introduction to contemporary political theory. New York: Sage: Chapter 4.
OLSARETTI, S. (2003) Introduction. In: OLSARETTI, S. (ed.) Desert and justice. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
More advanced work on desert and equality of opportunity: ANDERSON, E. (1999) What is the point of equality? Ethics. Vol 109. pp287–337.
BARRY, B. (1989) A treatise on social justice, volume 1: theories of justice. Oakland, CA: University of California Press: Chapters 5–6.
BARRY, B. (2005) Why social justice matters. Cambridge: Polity.
CAVANAGH, M. (2002) Against equality of opportunity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
CUPIT, G. (1996) Justice as fittingness. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
DWORKIN, R. (2002) Sovereign virtue: the theory and practice of equality. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
FEINBERG, J. (1970) Doing and deserving: essays in the theory of responsibility. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
MILLER, D. (1999) Principles of social justice. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
OLSARETTI, S. (2004) Liberty, desert, and the market. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
RAWLS, J. (1971, rev. ed. 1999) A theory of justice. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press: section 17.
SANDEL, M. (1998) Liberalism and the limits of justice (2nd edition). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press: Chapter 2.
SHER, G. (1987) Desert. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
TEMKIN, L.S. (1993) Inequality. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
WILLIAMS, B. (2005) In the beginning was the deed (ed. Geoffrey Hawthorn). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press: Chapter 8.
Further reading on the Merit Lens
17 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 The Fairness Lens
3 The Markets Lens Jobs and their rewards should follow from voluntary market exchanges.
2 The Merit Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
17 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background Rawls’s critic Robert Nozick agrees with him that individuals have equal moral standing: for Nozick, the self-ownership of each individual requires that they not be treated in certain ways without their consent: ‘Individuals have rights, and there are things no person or group may do to them (without violating their rights)’ (Nozick 1974, pix).
But Rawls and Nozick differ in almost every other way. For Nozick, Rawls’s focus on the pattern of distribution is a mistake. History matters, in two ways: 1 the hypothetical history of the
minimal state 2 the real history of entitlement to
property and position.
Together these add up to Nozick’s main claim:
The night-watchman state of classical liberalism, which neutrally referees social interaction by enforcing contracts, preventing violence, and punishing rights-violations, is justified; but no more extensive state or other institution is.
The central disagreement here is between an ethics based on pattern – whether Rawlsian or meritocratic or any other pattern – and an ethics based on rule-governed process.
Nozick’s (1) is another version of the social contract tradition
(discussed in Lens 1: Fairness). I’ll concentrate here on his (2): the real history of entitlement to property and position.
Nozick asks: How do people come to be entitled to their property? Rawls’s answer is holist and to do with pattern: I’m entitled to some reward if, and only if, it’s a fair share of the total rewards in my society. Nozick’s answer is individualist and to do with history.
I justly own something, according to Nozick, if I came to have it by some historical chain made up of only two kinds of events:
1 just acquisition 2 just transfer from someone who
justly owned it.
I justly acquire something by making it out of the unowned or commonly owned material of the world. Creative work – whether to make a wheat crop, a painting, or a new chemical process – produces ownership. I come to own something already made by voluntary transfer from someone else who justly owns it: gift or exchange, but not theft. So, I justly own something if each link in the chain by which it came into my possession was just. The distribution of property between people is irrelevant: what matters is the history of each individual owning. So, for example, I own my watch not because others have an equal share of all the watches; and not because
‘We tend to rationalise even random results to try to show that they follow from the character and choices of the person they happen to, rather than from luck.’
According to the Markets Lens, jobs and their rewards should result from voluntary market exchanges. This
suggests that ethical rules neutrally referee and put bounds on our voluntary interactions, but don’t pursue any
particular outcome. Any distribution of positions and their rewards which results from exchanges and agreements
between individuals, within the rules, is an ethically acceptable distribution, whether or not it tracks merit or
any other pre-existing pattern. Some people are lucky enough to have scarce qualities which are in demand: it’s
ethically acceptable, even though not merited, that they command high wages. So, for example, the just wage for
a CEO or a nurse is the current market rate for CEOs or nurses, and nothing to do with how talented they are, nor
how hard they work, nor equal distribution, nor any other patterned distribution.
18 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 19 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
I deserve a watch as a reward for my talent and hard work; but only because my mother gave it to me, and she bought it from a shop, and they bought it from Seiko, and Seiko made it using raw materials and designs that they paid for, and so on all the way back to some origin (or, more likely, to a point at which we can’t find out anything more).
This logic can be applied to more abstract goods such as money, jobs and status: what matters in deciding the legitimacy of my having a particular job, wage or standing is whether I came by it through some historical chain of creation and free transfer. It has nothing to do with who else has such goods or how much they have, and nothing to do with whether I’m clever and dedicated rather than slow and lazy.
It’s important to keep the distinction between this lens and Lens 2: Merit clear. Markets aren’t meritocratic, although we have a strong tendency to imagine that they are.
Markets are not meritocratic, because they reward the value of someone’s service to others (as judged by those others), not the deep properties of the person – if any – which give rise to that value.
The market’s valuation of a good – its price – depends on how much of it there is – supply – and how much people want it – demand. Price isn’t sensitive to whether or not it took talent or hard work to produce the good: what it responds to is results, not their causes. Someone who luckily has a rare quality that’s now in demand – looking like a particular celebrity, for example – is entitled to whatever rewards others voluntarily choose to give them, but they don’t merit such rewards, because they did nothing to deserve them.
Our strong tendency to imagine that market results are meritocratic may be an example of a deep human psychological tendency known as the just world illusion: in general, we tend to believe that people get what they deserve and deserve what they get, and will
rationalise even random results to try to show that they follow from the character and choices of the person they happen to, rather than from luck.
One line of criticism of the market view is that it wrongly conflates material objects such as watches, which are properly understood as commodities, with human standing and worth, which aren’t. Critics including Elizabeth Anderson, Michael Sandel and Debra Satz have argued that some things – for example personal relationships and public spaces – should not be for sale, because understanding them in market terms fails to recognise their distinctive values. The question, to which different answers have been given, is then where and how to draw the boundary between what is properly subject to markets and what isn’t.
The new dean According to the Markets Lens, we should focus on playing our hand well within the rules. We should consider our purchasing power, bid appropriately on the employment market for deans and attempt to reach mutual agreement with a candidate. We may find it to our advantage to look at applicants from non-conventional backgrounds, since the market may be underpricing their skills. For example, the market typically rewards women less than men for similar work, and a female applicant might therefore be a bargain.
19 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main sources: HAYEK, F.A. (1960) The constitution of liberty. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.
NOZICK, R. (1974) Anarchy, state, and utopia. New York: Basic Books.
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ markets/
http://oll.libertyfund.org/ groups/104
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ property/#4
Textbooks and introductions: FARRELLY, C. (2004) An introduction to contemporary political theory. New York: Sage: Chapter 2.
GOODIN, R.E. and PETTIT, P. (eds) (1997) Contemporary political philosophy: an anthology. London: Blackwell: Part 3.
KYMLICKA, W. (2003) Contemporary political philosophy: an introduction (2nd edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press: Chapter 4.
The just world illusion: BENABOU, R. and TIROLE, J. (2005) Belief in a just world and redistributive politics. National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 11208, http:// www.nber.org/papers/w11208
LERNER, M.J. (1980) The belief in a just world: a fundamental delusion. New York: Springer.
More advanced work on the ethics of markets: ANDERSON, E. (1993) Value in ethics and economics. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
COHEN, G.A. (1995) Self-ownership, freedom, and equality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
FOURCADE, M. and HEALY, K. (2007) Moral views of market society. Annual Review of Sociology. Vol 33. pp14.1–14.27.
LANE, R.E. (1991) The market experience. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
MCCLOSKEY, D.N. (2006) The bourgeois virtues: ethics for an age of commerce. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
OLSARETTI, S. (2004) Liberty, desert, and the market. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
RADIN, M.J. (1996) Contested commodities: the trouble with trade in sex, children, body parts and other things. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
SANDEL, M. (2012) What money can’t buy: the moral limits of markets. London: Penguin.
SATZ, D. (2010) Why some things should not be for sale: the moral limits of markets. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Further reading on the Markets Lens
21 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 The Fairness Lens
4 The Democracy Lens No one should be subject to a regime in which they have no say.
2 The Merit Lens
3 The Markets Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
21 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background The basic democratic demand is self-rule: people should govern themselves; the distinction between ruled and rulers should be abolished. This is another way of expressing the fundamental idea of the equal moral standing of individuals which has appeared in other lenses, for example Lens 1: Fairness. But in democratic thought that idea is understood as political equality: every member of the group has equal authority to take part in real-world decision-making for the group. There are no natural hierarchies: power and authority are ours to give or to take away.
Democracy is therefore not the same as several other ideas often associated with it. First, it’s not identical with majority rule or with representation by elected officials. These are tactics sometimes used to enact democratic political equality, but they’re not required by it. Some democratic theorists, for example, have defended deliberative democracy, in which decision-making is by debate, persuasion and consensus-building involving all citizens, rather than by the majority rule tactic of weighing up pre-existing opinions by a ‘show of hands’. Some theorists have defended direct democracy, in which decisions are made in assemblies of all citizens (who may delegate particular tasks and roles, but who retain all authority) rather than by officials who are elected to positions of discretionary power.
Second, democracy is distinct from liberal defences of the rule
of law, individual rights, the split between public and private, and constitutional limits on government power. Liberal democracy is a tense historical complex, not a stable unity: democrats have often rejected liberal limits on what the self-ruling people may decide, and liberals have often worried about democratic threats to property and privacy.
Third, democracy is distinct from the social contract idea explored in Lens 1: Fairness. Contract theory imagines a once-and- for-all-time agreement between identical, independent individuals. Democracy points instead to contestation and joint celebration between different individuals in groups – especially in the ultimate group, the self-governing people.
The basic democratic ideal, and its distinction from liberal ideals, can be cashed out in many different ways. One important way is the idea of freedom as non-domination. Liberal thinkers such as F.A. Hayek have typically thought of freedom as the absence of coercion: you act freely so long as no one is using violence or threats to make you act on their plans rather than your own. This is often called negative liberty or just liberty, and can usefully be contrasted with other understandings of freedom. Liberty is not actually getting what you want – you can freely try and fail through mere bad luck. It’s not self- command – you can be free but weak-willed or confused. It’s not power or wealth or capacity – you can be free without the internal or
‘Decision-making is by debate, persuasion and consensus-building involving all citizens, rather than by the majority rule tactic of weighing up pre-existing opinions by a ‘‘show of hands’.’’
According to the Democracy Lens, no one should be subject to a regime in which they have no say. So, if a
decision affects your interests, you should be involved in making it, and that includes decisions about how your
workplace is organised and run. Workplaces should be designed to create effective voice for everyone whose
interests are at stake. So, for example, corporate policy should be made democratically by all employees (and
perhaps by members of wider communities whose interests are also at stake in corporate decisions). Corporate
policy-making by an unelected CEO or board is tyranny, just as state policy-making by an unelected monarch is.
22 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 23 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
external means to get what you want. It’s not having a range of possibilities to choose between – often your options are constrained by circumstance, but if no other person constrains you, you still have liberty. And most importantly here, it’s not democratic freedom, having a say in communal decision- making – you can have liberty in a dictatorship. The ideal liberal regime is then a government which uses a minimum of coercion (police, courts and prisons, for example) to defend individuals against coercion and therefore protect their liberty.
An alternative democratic understanding of freedom, often called republican, is that you are free so long as you are protected against domination. Someone dominates another to the extent that they are able to interfere on an arbitrary basis in the other’s choices. Ability to interfere means that the master can interfere whenever they choose, even if they don’t now choose to do so: they have power even when they’re not using it. Arbitrary interference means that power is controlled only by the master’s choice, without reference to the subordinate’s desires or interests or speech. Non-arbitrary interference would be interference secure against arbitrariness. If the master could choose to interfere without constraint by the subject’s interests and choices, they have arbitrary power, even if they don’t use it: the lazy master is still a master. If a power-holder is constrained to
consult the desires and interests, to listen to the voices, of those they have power over; and if they have powers to resist the power- holder; the power-holder no longer dominates and they are no longer subordinates. They are political equals. On this picture, democracy secures freedom by ensuring that those with power cannot use it arbitrarily (because, for example, they can be recalled by the people who gave them authority).
There is a fourth distinction between democracy and ideas often associated with it: democratic demands aren’t limited to governments. Business employees are typically not free in the republican sense: they are under the arbitrary power of their managers (who are themselves subordinate to higher managers, in a nested structure of subordination). So, the democratic demand for self-rule can be made of businesses in just the same way as of governments. One way of responding to that demand is by
making employees participants in the decision-making of their firms, rather than mere objects and victims of those decisions: that is, by instituting workplace democracy, or even by having workers own their firms. In a democratic workplace such as John Lewis in the UK or Mondragon in Spain, unlike most current corporations, the people who work in the firm also jointly run it, typically by a combination of direct voting and delegation of authority to elected representatives and/or contracted professionals. The demand can be pushed further: the people affected by the decisions of corporations aren’t just employees, but also their families, people who work in other businesses which supply those corporations, local residents whose communities would be damaged if a large local employer moved its operations overseas, and so on. On democratic grounds, these people should get a say too, perhaps especially in decisions about investment and disinvestment.
The new dean According to the Democracy Lens, our focus should be on the accountability of power. The dean has powers to affect the interests of other staff, so they should have a say in who will have the role and what they do with it. Perhaps the dean should be elected from existing staff (as was the case in most UK universities until very recently); perhaps the role should be replaced by a representative committee; perhaps dean-level decisions should be taken by meetings of all faculty. In any case, the search for a dean should not be regarded as a matter only for HR and administration, but for everyone over whom the dean will have power.
23 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main sources: BOWLES, S. and GINTIS, H. (1986; new ed. 2011) Democracy and capitalism: property, community, and the contradictions of modern social thought. London: Routledge.
DAHL, R.A. (1998) On democracy. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
PETTIT, P. (1997) Republicanism. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
WRIGHT, E.O. (2010) Envisioning real utopias. London: Verso.
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ democracy/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ republicanism/
http://www.democracyatwork.info/
Textbooks and introductions: ARBLASTER, A. (2002) Democracy (3rd edition). London: Open University Press.
HELD, D. (1996) Models of democracy (2nd edition). Oxford: Polity.
SAWARD, M. (2003) Democracy. Oxford: Polity.
Significant contemporary democratic theory: BEITZ, C. (1989) Political equality: an essay on democratic theory. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
CHRISTIANO, T. (1996) The rule of the many: fundamental issues in democratic theory. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
GOODIN, R.E. (2003) Reflective democracy. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
GOODIN, R.E. and PETTIT, P. (eds) (1997) Contemporary political philosophy: an anthology. London: Blackwell: Part 2.
GOULD, C.C. (1998) Rethinking democracy: freedom and social cooperation in politics, economics and society. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
MOUFFE, C. (2005) The democratic paradox. London: Verso.
PETTIT, P. (2012) On the people’s terms: a republican theory and model of democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
YOUNG, I.M. (1990) Justice and the politics of difference. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Philosophies of freedom: BERLIN, I. (1969) Two concepts of liberty. In: Four Essays on Liberty. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
CARTER, I. et al (eds) (2007) Freedom: a philosophical anthology. London: Blackwell.
FRIEDMAN, M. and FRIEDMAN, R.D. (2002) Capitalism and freedom (40th anniversary edition). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
NUSSBAUM, M.C. (2011) Creating capabilities: the human development approach. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
RAZ, J. (1986) The morality of freedom. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
SEN, A. (1999) Development as freedom. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
SKINNER, Q. (1998) Liberty before liberalism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
TAYLOR, C. (1985) What’s wrong with negative liberty. In: Philosophical Papers vol. 2: Philosophy and the Human Sciences. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
VAN PARIJS, P. (1995) Real freedom for all: what (if anything) can justify capitalism? Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Workplace democracy: BENELLO, C.G. (1992) From the ground up: essays on grassroots and workplace democracy (ed. Len Krimerman et al). Quebec: Black Rose Books.
DAHL, R.A. (1985) A preface to economic democracy. Oakland, CA: University of California Press.
PATEMAN, C. (1970) Participation and democratic theory. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
ROEMER, J.A. (1994) A future for socialism. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
ROTHSCHILD, J. and WHITT, J.A. (1986) The cooperative workplace: potentials and dilemmas of organizational democracy and participation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
SCHWEICKART, D. (2011) After capitalism (2nd edition). Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield.
VANEK, J. (ed.) (1975) Self- management: economic liberation of man. London: Penguin.
ZWERDLING, D. (1978) Workplace democracy: a guide to workplace ownership, participation, and self- management experiments in the United States and Europe. New York: Harper Row.
Further reading on the Democracy Lens
25 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 The Fairness Lens
5 The Well-being Lens Work should be good for us.
2 The Merit Lens
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
25 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
‘For the utilitarian, corporate efficiency is only good to the extent it produces well-being.’
Philosophical background This lens is based on utilitarianism, the moral and political theory that actions and institutions should be designed to promote human well- being. Utilitarianism builds on three basic and widely shared intuitions about ethical conduct: about myself and others, about good and bad, and about what I should do.
1 About myself and others: I am not special. Others have their own lives to live, and their own perspectives on those lives, just as I do. Good things are good and bad things are bad for them just as for me. There is no magic in the pronoun ‘my’. This intuition is expressed, for example, in how we teach basic ethics to children: we appeal to the golden rule, ask ‘how would you like it?’, suggest imagining themselves in the other person’s shoes, and so on. That is, utilitarianism maintains another version of impartiality, in the form everyone counts for one, and no one for more than one.
2 About good and bad: some things are bad (for me and for everyone) – most obviously pain, but also terror, loss, damage, waste – and others are good (for me and for everyone) – pleasure, happiness, love, success, self- development, living out my life in peace and without fear, getting to do what I want to do with my life. That is, utilitarianism is impartial about all human lives going well. For utilitarians, only individual human lives going well for the individuals whose lives they are has value. Call this value well-being, and compare the value of natural beauty or of the survival of a nation or a species, for example: for utilitarians, these
things can only have derivative rather than intrinsic value, by contributing to individuals’ lives going well, if they have any value at all.
3 About what I should do: if I’m faced with a choice between bringing about bad or bringing about good, I should bring about good. In general, I should bring about as much good and as little bad as possible, and this will often involve trade-offs. The right response to what’s good is to maximise it overall, and to what’s bad is to minimise it overall. What we ought to do in all circumstances is whatever has the best overall consequences (compare ‘we should do what’s fair’, for example, which might mean producing a lower total amount of value in order to make sure that it’s equally distributed). This view is known as consequentialism.
More formally, utilitarianism is impartial well-being consequentialism.
I concentrate here on (2) and consider arguments about the nature and significance of well- being. (I return to (3) in Lens 6: Rights and Duties, and to (1) in Lens 7: Character.)
It’s important that utilitarians take well-being as the only intrinsic value or ultimate goal: it’s not to be pursued because it brings anything else about, but for its own sake, and it’s the only thing with that status. Utilitarians claim that our actions and institutions are to be ethically assessed according to how well they bring about this goal compared with the possible alternative actions and institutions.
The Well-being Lens says that work is one of our main arenas of practice towards living well or having well-being,
or one of the main threats to doing so. Therefore, workplaces should be designed to promote well-being for its
own sake, not just because of its instrumental benefits for morale or efficiency.
26 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 27 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Compare the view that employee well-being, in particular, should be pursued because it’s good for corporate efficiency. That may be true in many cases, but for the utilitarian it’s irrelevant: corporate efficiency is only good to the extent it produces well-being, not vice versa.
The classical utilitarians – Jeremy Bentham (1748–1832), John Stuart Mill (1806–1873), and Henry Sidgwick (1838–1900) – are usually understood as arguing that the good life is the pleasant life: well- being is pleasure. Utilitarians and others have developed both this account and a variety of alternative accounts of well-being.
Significant philosophical accounts of well-being include hedonism, life satisfaction, desire satisfaction, both actual and idealised, and objective lists.
Hedonism: The classical utilitarian view (which has a history stretching back to the ancient Greek philosopher Epicurus) is that well-being consists in having as much as possible of a distinctive mental state, pleasure or enjoyment, and as little as possible of its opposite mental state, pain or suffering. If Epicurus was right about what gives humans the most pleasure, the best life consists in having enough to eat and drink, a safe and comfortable place to sleep, and a few good friends to talk to.
One standard objection to hedonism is to point out that different pleasures and pains don’t have any single way they feel in common, such that they could be compared or added up: the first sip of a cold drink on a hot day, finishing a gruelling run with a personal best time, and watching your child sleep are all pleasures,
but what do they have in common? Exactly how many ‘run personal bests’ would add up to the value of one ‘watching child sleep’? The question doesn’t even make sense. In general, it makes no apparent sense to say that each of these pleasures instantiates a different quantity of a single stuff, a different number on a one-dimensional scale of pleasure, such that we could do arithmetic with them, or find out what to do by deciding what would maximise pleasure.
A reply is to move from focusing on how particular pleasures and pains feel to the attitudes we take to our experiences or to our lives as a whole. One such account is:
Life satisfaction: The account used in much contemporary empirical research into happiness is that your well- being consists in sincerely judging that your life is going well. If you judge your life experience positively, you have well-being. We now have a great deal of data on the conditions of that judgement: for example, we know that above a certain minimum, money doesn’t make us happy (although having more money than your neighbours may do so).
A standard objection to both this and the hedonistic account is that well-being can’t be entirely a subjective matter: we can imagine cases where how you feel or judge doesn’t seem to be all that matters for how well your life is going. Consider the life of someone who takes great pleasure and satisfaction in what she believes is the love and respect of her friends and the achievement of her life goals, but is actually completely deceived: her ‘friends’ despise her and her goals have all come to nothing. Her pleasure and life- satisfaction are identical to those of
her twin whose friends are real and goals really successful, but her life apparently goes worse.
A reply is to move away from states of mind and towards states of the world, but to keep a connection with the individual’s goals:
Desire satisfaction: The account used in much economic theory is that your well-being consists in what you want actually being the case: you want to be wealthy and you are wealthy; you want your friends to love and respect you and they do; and so on.
It’s important to distinguish this from the previous two accounts: they make your well-being depend on what things are like for you, ‘in your head’; desire satisfaction accounts make your well-being depend on what the world is like, ‘out there’. Your life goes well when you want your friends to love and respect you and they do, whether or not you know it: you could be wrong about your own well-being because you think they do when they don’t, like the deceived person above.
A standard objection to this is that people often want things which are bad for them, from cigarettes to disastrous marriages, and that the desire satisfaction account can’t recognise this obvious truth. It makes sense to say to someone that ‘marrying him would ruin your life’ no matter how much she now wants to marry him, and an account of well-being which can’t catch that sense has gone wrong.
A reply is to move away from actual desires to desires improved in some way:
Ideal desire satisfaction: You have well-being when you get – not what you actually want now – but what you
27 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
would want if you had your ideal desires: if you knew and could fully imagine what it would be like to get it (the misery of being married to him after five years), or what you would want if you knew what was good for you (a different husband).
The problem with this account is that it’s unstable: if it appeals to what getting what you now want will really feel like (as in the first version above), it seems to be moving back towards mental state accounts such as hedonism, with all of their problems. If it appeals to what you would want if you know what was good for you (as in the second version), it hasn’t yet answered the question we were asking: what is good for you? – that is, what is well-being?
If we go in the second direction, we move away from desire accounts and towards:
Objective list accounts: You have well-being when you achieve the items on an objective list of intrinsic goods, whether or not you want them or enjoy them when you get them. For example, Aristotle argued that you have well- being when you fully develop and express the human rational essence in an ideal life of practical and theoretical
wisdom. Other objective list accounts are pluralistic, and typically include goods such as pleasure, personal achievement, knowledge and friendship.
One standard objection to this is that it’s offensively paternalistic: what’s good for a person is up to them, not to be decreed from outside. A reply is to suggest that one of the items on the objective list of goods is autonomy: being in rational command of your own life, making and following through on your own decisions and life plans. You have well-being when you are autonomous (even if it’s sometimes painful, or if you sometimes wish someone else would look after you).
Each of these different accounts of well-being has different consequences for how we ethically assess work and workplaces. For example, take the idea that autonomy is at least a significant part of well-being. Many jobs offer little opportunity for the development and use of autonomy, because they consist in repetitive tasks under someone else’s direction, aiming at the realisation of someone else’s plans. But if well-being requires autonomy, and if work should be good for us, such non-autonomous work should be transformed. This might be an argument from well-being for a democratic conclusion (see Lens 4: Democracy).
The new dean According to the Well-being Lens, we should be most concerned with what our institutions and practices do to the lives of the individuals caught up in them. The institutional structure involving the dean should be understood as aimed at promoting the well-being of all of its members, rather than as promoting efficiency or other external goals. The difficult question we must then consider is what well-being is, and our answer could have large consequences. For example, if being in command of oneself – autonomy – is part of living well, work tasks should be organised and distributed to promote it: no one should be stuck always doing menial work, never exercising their powers of decision, planning and self-command, because people in that position don’t develop the capacity for autonomy. And this will mean that everyone should do some of the unavoidable menial work – the dean should sometimes clean the toilets. Or perhaps better, everyone should have a chance to exercise powers of decision, planning and self-command, and the dean’s responsibilities should therefore be distributed rather than concentrated in one person.
28 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main source: GRIFFIN, J. (1986) Well-being: its meaning, measurement, and moral importance. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ consequentialism/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ well-being/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ utilitarianism-history/
Textbooks and introductions: EGGLESTON, B. and MILLER, D.E. (eds) (2014) The Cambridge companion to utilitarianism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
KYMLICKA, W. (2003) Contemporary political philosophy: an introduction (2nd edition). Oxford: Oxford University Press: Chapter 2.
Important historical accounts of well-being: ARISTOTLE (1999) Nicomachean ethics (trans. Terence Irwin) (2nd edition). Indianapolis, IN: Hackett.
MILL, J.S. and BENTHAM, J. (1987) Utilitarianism and other essays (ed. Alan Ryan). London: Penguin.
These texts are available in multiple editions, as well as free online in many cases. The editions suggested here are scholarly as well as easily available.
Significant contemporary philosophical work on well-being: CRISP, R. (2006) Reasons and the good. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
DARWALL, S. (2002) Welfare and rational care. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
FELDMAN, F. (2004) Pleasure and the good life. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
HAYBRON, D.M. (2008) The pursuit of unhappiness: the elusive psychology of well-being. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
NUSSBAUM, M.C. and SEN, A. (eds) (1993) The quality of life. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
SUMNER, L.W. (1996) Welfare, happiness, and ethics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
TIBERIUS, V. (2008) The reflective life: living wisely with our limits. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Empirical happiness studies: KAHNEMAN, D., DIENER, E. and SHWARZ, N. (eds) (1999) Well- being: the foundations of hedonic psychology. New York: Russell Sage.
LAYARD, R. (2006) Happiness: lessons from a new science. London: Penguin.
SEARLE, B.A. (2008) Well-being: in search of a good life? Bristol: The Policy Press.
Well-being and work: ARNESON, R.J. (1987) Meaningful work and market socialism. Ethics. Vol 97. pp517–45.
ATTFIELD, R. (1984) Work and the human essence. Journal of Applied Philosophy. Vol 1. pp141–50.
CRAWFORD, M. (2011) The case for working with your hands: or why office work is bad for us and fixing things feels good. London: Penguin.
ELSTER, J. (1989) Self-realisation in work and politics: the Marxist conception of the good life. In: ELSTER, J. and MOENE, K.O. (eds) Alternatives to capitalism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
MORRIS, W. (1973 [1885]) Useful work versus useless toil. In: MORTON, A.L. (ed.) Political writings of William Morris. London: Lawrence & Wishart.
SCHWARTZ, A. (1983) Meaningful work. Ethics. Vol 92. pp634–46.
SENNETT, R. (2008) The craftsman. London: Penguin.
Further reading on the Well-being Lens
1 The Fairness Lens
2 The Merit Lens
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens Everyone has rights to do some things and to be free of some things, and everyone has duties not to violate others’ rights.
30 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 31 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background Utilitarianism, as described in Lens 5: Well-being, is consequentialist: it claims that what we ought to do is bring about as much value as possible. But consequentialism is resisted by what is perhaps the pre-eminent moral idea in Western culture: human rights. Imagine the following case:
You are a surgeon with five patients waiting for life-saving transplants. A healthy young postal worker walks into your hospital to deliver a package. You could break her up for spare parts: her liver to one of your patients, her heart to another, blood for all of them during surgery, and so on, saving their lives by killing her. Should you?
According to the utilitarian, the situation here is that you must decide between one death and five deaths. Compare another imaginary case:
Your ship has been torpedoed and sunk. You managed to get to a lifeboat, but many others are in the water. You can either pick up a group of five people, or instead pick up one person, but you can’t do both. Should you pick up the five, leaving the one to drown, or pick up the one, leaving the five to drown?
In both cases, consequentialism says: you ought to do whatever has the best consequences available, and one death is better than five. So you should pick up the larger group, and use the postal worker’s organs to save the larger group.
The obvious reply is that this would violate the postal worker’s rights: she has human rights to life and to bodily integrity which you have a duty to respect, independent of the consequences (but, perhaps, no one has such a right to be saved from drowning). We can think of the future as a garden of forking paths, where each fork is a decision: this way or that way? Human rights are barriers which limit which paths we may take, no matter what wonderful place they lead to. Consequentialism goes wrong in letting the ends justify the means. We can cash this idea out as follows:
Human rights are entitlements to be treated in certain ways and not treated in certain other ways, which belong to human persons just as such, and which trump the maximisation of good in our decisions about what to do. Rights have correlative duties, which are obligations to act in certain ways and not to act in certain other ways. Because we have rights and duties, there are some actions which are forbidden and some actions which are obligatory, whatever increase or decrease in value would result from them.
The idea of human rights has a paradoxical status. On one hand, it’s immensely successful in practice: rights claims and rights- based legislation are widespread and powerful, although also often challenged and violated; rights talk is the lingua franca of
‘Human rights are barriers which limit which paths we may take, no matter what wonderful place they lead to.’
According to the Rights and Duties Lens, everyone has the rights to do some things and to be free of some
things, and everyone has duties not to violate others’ rights. This means human rights forbid some actions and
demand other actions, regardless of their consequences. The idea of rights is immensely successful in practice, as
shown for example by the influence of the United Nations’ Universal Declaration of Human Rights – even though
it raises troubling problems in philosophical theory. So, for example, workplaces ought to respect human rights to
equal pay for equal work and to join unions.
31 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
international moral concern and action. There has been a global human rights revolution over the last few decades. On the other hand, this practical success is not matched by robust theory, so that much argument about particular rights is inconclusive. I’ll sketch the triumphant history of the practice before returning to the problems in theory.
Rights are a recent and local idea: they began to be developed out of earlier ideas of natural law in the early modern period, from the late fifteenth century onwards, in Europe and its colonies. Since then, they have turned up in more and more historically important places. The Bill of Rights from the British ‘glorious revolution’ of 1688, for example, included the right to live under laws approved by Parliament without arbitrary royal interference and the right not to be subjected to cruel or unusual punishment. The 1776 American Declaration of Independence famously added rights to life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness. The 1789 French Declaration of the Rights of Man and Citizen added rights to freedom of speech and presumption of innocence.
Rights then went out of fashion for much of the nineteenth century and the first half of the twentieth, partly giving way to utilitarian talk of maximising well-being. But the United Nations’ 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights, followed by a series of conventions on racial discrimination (1969), discrimination against women (1979), the rights of the child (1990), and so on, both reaffirmed rights from earlier declarations, and added, for example, rights to recognition as a person before the law; to have a nationality, to change nationality, and to return home; to equal pay for equal work; to religious freedom; and to an
education. The list of human rights which have been asserted over these few hundred years is long, various and expanding over time: from political rights (especially rights-based attempts to limit the power of states) to economic to social to cultural rights.
Rights talk and rights legislation grew up in consort and conflict with another product of the early modern period in Europe: the nation-state. Over the same period as the rise of rights, centralising monarchs and their innovative bureaucracies won the competition for power with feudal nobles, self-governing towns, the Christian Church and the Holy Roman Empire. They began the growth of a world system of distinct, non-overlapping territorial states understood as having sovereignty of two kinds: internal – the sovereign (at first identified with the monarch and later with the people) is the only legitimate power within its territory; and external – no other state may interfere in what goes on in that territory. Respecting and enforcing human rights has come to be thought an important part of states’ duties, but the idea of rights also challenges sovereignty of both kinds. It challenges internal sovereignty in asserting that some actions are forbidden even to the state; and it challenges external sovereignty in implying international duties of enforcement. The recently influential idea of humanitarian intervention is a practical expression of that challenge.
The result of this history is that ‘[t]oday, if the public discourse of peacetime global society can be said to have a common moral language, it is that of human rights’ (Beitz 2009, p1).
Despite this practical success, there is no consensus on a range of fundamental philosophical problems which rights raise:
1 How are we to justify the idea of rights? Why should we think that there are any such things? Relatedly, what limit does that justification set on the expanding list of rights? How can we distinguish between justified and unjustified assertions of rights? Are our particular in-practice rights claims justified? What justificatory argument can we offer to someone who denies the existence of a right to ‘equal pay for equal work’ (UNUDHR 23.2), for example, or even of rights in general?
2 What is the relation between moral and legal rights, and between rights and other cultural norms? Do rights trump legal denials or cultural rejections of rights? For example, does the right ‘to form and to join trade unions’ (UNUDHR 23.4) make state legislation against unions illegitimate, or stand as a moral criticism of cultures with different understandings of the relation between employer and employee? Do rights have the universality they claim, even in the face of cultural and legal difference?
3 How are we to manage conflicts between individual rights? For example, what are we to do when the right ‘to manifest… religion or belief in teaching, practice, worship and observance’ (UNUDHR 18) clashes with other rights, as when some community manifests their belief that women are inferior to men by denying women the right ‘to own property’ (UNUDHR 17)?
Do rights really exist in the absence of enforcement mechanisms and a definite authority with responsibility to provide and protect what those rights claim? Various states and other organisations assert many rights, but their actual enforcement is notoriously inconsistent and
32 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 33 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
often ineffectual, and it’s not clear what institution actually has authority to demand, or power to ensure, global compliance. Is rights talk merely talk?
The beginnings of answers to these questions may be found in two competing kinds of theory of rights: interest theories and will theories.
Interest theories connect rights with well-being: a right is a shield against damage to some aspect of a person’s living a life which is good for them, or in their interests. The problems above can then be addressed by connecting particular rights claims and rights legislation to aspects of well-being. For example, the existence of a right to equal pay for equal work will depend on the relation of that demand to human well-being: does your life go worse for you if someone else is paid more than you are for the same work? The answer to that question will depend on what account of well-being we find compelling, so the question is moved rather than immediately answered, but at least we have a way of pursuing an answer. (See further Lens 5: Well-being.)
Will theories instead connect rights with capacity for choice: a right invests its holder with some specified control over their situation. The problems above can again be addressed by considering the connection between particular rights and the importance of particular capacities of control. For example, the existence of a right to join a union will depend on the relation of union membership to important capacities of control (see also Lens 4: Democracy).
The new dean According to the Rights and Duties Lens, our main concern should be the rights and duties asserted in local and wider culture and law. The problem here is that there are many such assertions, but we’re unclear how to distinguish genuine from improper assertions, or how to manage conflict between particular rights and duties. At minimum, we need to be aware of the potentially inconsistent demands on us: some will be institutionalised in local employment law (in the UK, where universities are semi-public institutions, there are legal requirements on how jobs are advertised, for example); some are part of international law or convention, demandingly phrased but inconsistently enforced (the right to equal pay for equal work); some are not legally instantiated at all, but are rather part of local, regional and international cultures (assumptions about ‘women’s work’).
To make the example more specific (drawing on cases described at http://hrbdf.org/dilemmas/Gender/#.VT9NeyFVhBc): suppose that Sun City University is in a country that legally prohibits women from working in higher education, but that a woman has applied for the post of dean. On one hand, we might think that we should respect international human rights law (specifically the United Nations’ 1979 Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women) and give all applicants equal consideration regardless of their gender. On the other hand, this will open us to prosecution for breaching national law, and – perhaps more importantly – is an attempt to set ourselves up as above a law which may have as much (or as little) legitimacy as the international rights convention. Or, changing the example, suppose that the university is in a country that despite legal equality has an entrenched culture of sexism which creates harassment, pay gaps, lack of promotion and pregnancy discrimination for working women. The lack of a clear justification for rights claims against this sexism means that we will be left wondering how to respond to that culture: what can we say to the senior professor on the hiring committee who thinks that women just can’t do the kind of serious abstract thinking required by the job? Bare appeals to rights are unlikely to change his mind.
33 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main sources: BEITZ, C. (2009) The idea of human rights. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
FREEMAN, M. (2011) Human rights: an interdisciplinary approach (2nd edition). Cambridge: Polity.
Universal Declaration of Human Rights, http://www.un.org/en/ documents/udhr/
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ rights/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ rights-human/
Textbooks and introductions: EDMUNDSON, W.A. (2012) An introduction to rights (2nd edition). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
FREEMAN, M. (1991) Rights. London: Open University Press.
JONES, P. (1994) Rights. Basingstoke: Macmillan.
WALDRON, J. (ed.) (1985) Theories of rights. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
History and practice of human rights: BUERGENTHAL, T. et al (2009) International human rights in a nutshell (4th edition). Eagan, MN: West Publishing.
HUNT, L. (2007) Inventing human rights: a history. New York: W.W. Norton.
ROBERTSON, G. (2012) Crimes against humanity: the struggle for global justice (4th edition). London: Penguin.
Significant contemporary philosophy of rights: DONNELLY, J. (2013) Universal human rights in theory and practice (3rd edition). Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.
DWORKIN, R. (1977) Taking rights seriously. London: Duckworth.
GRIFFIN, J. (2008) On human rights. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
IGNATIEFF, M. et al (2001) Human rights as politics and idolatry (ed. Amy Gutmann). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
KRAMER, M.H., SIMMONDS, N.E. and STEINER, H. (1998) A debate over rights: philosophical enquiries. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
RAZ, J. (1986) The morality of freedom. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
SHUE, H. (1996) Basic rights: subsistence, affluence, and U.S. foreign policy (2nd edition). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
THOMSON, J.J. (1990) The realm of rights. Boston, MA: Harvard University Press.
Case studies of business human rights dilemmas: http://hrbdf.org/dilemmas/
Further reading on the Rights and Duties Lens
35 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
1 The Fairness Lens
7 The Character Lens Each of us should work to develop the best ethical character for our roles.
2 The Merit Lens
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens
35 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background Theories in philosophical ethics are often divided into three broad camps: deontological, consequentialist and virtue accounts. This is about as accurate and informative as dividing music into three broad camps – classical, rock and jazz – but it’ll do for present purposes. Modern deontological theories derive especially from Immanuel Kant (1724–1804) and focus on rules and obligations (see Lens 1: Fairness and Lens 6: Rights and Duties). Modern consequentialist theories derive especially from Jeremy Bentham (1748–1832) and John Stuart Mill (1806–1873) and focus on the consequences of action (see Lens 5: Well-being). The subject of this lens, virtue theories, derives ultimately from the classical Greek and Roman world, and especially from Aristotle (384–322 BC). They focus on individuals’ expressed inner life and character.
Imagine that we come across a car crash, late at night on a lonely road. The people in the smashed car need help and members of all three ethical camps will agree that we should help them if we can, but will emphasise different aspects of the situation and offer different reasons for that judgement. Deontologists will point to a moral rule requiring us to help, or to our duty to help, those in need. Consequentialists will point to the good consequences for everyone
of people helping other people. Both may appeal to an idea of impartiality and suggest that if the situation were reversed – if we were in the smashed car – we would want to be helped or claim a right to be helped. Virtue ethicists, in contrast, will emphasise that helping is the action of a decent person, perhaps even of a hero, and reminds us that this is what we aspire to be, because that’s the best kind of person. The virtue ethicist’s point is not that we would necessarily demand heroism from others in the reversed situation: it’s that we demand heroism of ourselves. Another way of putting these contrasts is that deontologists are concerned with permissible and obligatory action; consequentialists, with what results from action; and virtue ethicists, with what we reveal ourselves to be, and what we make ourselves, by acting.
The virtue strand in modern philosophy began with Elizabeth Anscombe’s 1958 article ‘Modern Moral Philosophy’, in which she attacks nineteenth- and twentieth- century ethical theories for their neglect of character, emotion, moral education and human attachments to friends, family and institutions. Anscombe provoked both a rediscovery of the virtue- theoretic elements in earlier thinkers (Hume, Kant, Nietzsche) and the creation of new ethical theories in an Aristotelian virtue- ethical style.
‘Helping is the action of a decent person, perhaps even of a hero, and reminds us that this is what we aspire to be, because that’s the best kind of person.’
The Character Lens says that each of us should work to develop the best ethical character for our roles. A
character is a set of deep, consistent, closely connected psychological tendencies to feel and act in the right
way (these tendencies are sometimes called virtues). Having character involves committing to and caring for
particular individuals and institutions. According to the Character Lens, we should face ethical dilemmas by trying
to become more like our heroes and to treat the particular people and things we care about rightly and lovingly,
rather than by trying to apply abstract general rules. So, for example, if you’re offered a bribe, you should think
about what the best people you know would do in this situation and try to be like them, rather than trying to find
a rule to follow or to reason your way impartially to an answer.
36 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 37 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
An ethics of virtue has four main components:
1 the idea of virtue itself 2 the idea of practical wisdom, that
is, developed judgement about how to act
3 a vision of the good human life into which the virtues fit
4 an account of the development of virtue as a movement towards the good life.
In what follows, I fill out (1)–(4), partly by following a character – call her Rosa – through the demands of the virtuous life.
1 A virtue – for example courage, honesty, justice, loyalty to one’s friends – is a deep-rooted character trait which leads its possessor not only to act, but also to see, feel and be moved, in distinctive ways. A virtue must be deep-rooted rather than shallow or temporary: one act of bravery, however admirable, doesn’t show that Rosa is courageous; if this behaviour is not connected with the rest of her character, it could fail in the face of a different danger, or just because she’s in a hurry, or having a bad day. Virtue must involve the perceptual and motivational as well as actions: Rosa could behave honestly only because she fears being found out in a lie; but the genuinely honest person sees dishonesty as ugly and pathetic, and is repelled by the idea that they, or those they care about, might act dishonestly. If Rosa is to possess the virtue of honesty, she must be honest not out of calculated self-interest, nor even because she holds it to be her duty or to have the best overall consequences, but because these morally loaded motives and perceptions are part of her identity.
2 Practical wisdom is required by the virtuous person, because it’s often hard to know the best thing to do. Typically, this wisdom is derived from experience as much as from instruction or theorising, and is knowledge how more than knowledge that: it’s the ability to continue in the right way, rather than the ability to make explicit the principles which govern that capacity. Similarly, Rosa speaks her mother tongue fluently without being able to describe the syntactical and other rules which govern it. Practical wisdom is the opposite of – for example – recklessness, insensitivity, short-sightedness and failure to see how things look from perspectives other than one’s own (Rosalind Hursthouse suggests that practical wisdom can be identified as what most teenagers lack). For the virtue ethicist, ethical decision- making is concerned more with sensitivity and discernment than with the application of explicit rules; but it is concerned with reasoning, not with mere unthinking habit or ritualised behaviour. To be a practically wise person, Rosa must deliberate about her actions, but need not necessarily see them as falling under any explicit rule (perhaps, indeed, no explicit rule can be stated).
3 Virtues are part of the good life for human beings. Developing and exercising the virtues is a necessary part of a successful life for an individual. The notion of ‘good life’ at work here is not moral goodness: it’s the ordinary sense in which a life goes well (is crowned with happiness and achievement) or goes badly (is a miserable failure) for the person whose life it is. That is, it’s the idea of well-being (see Lens 5: Well-
‘For virtue there’s no distinction between the training and the big match.’
37 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
being). If Rosa never develops a virtue – if she’s never able to engage in a real friendship, for example – she is to that extent living a life which is bad for her. If, instead of developing a virtue, Rosa develops a corresponding vice, she will also be living a bad life. For instance, if her experiences, choices and developed perceptions lead her intensely to value money, and to spend most of her time gathering and gloating over it, she has developed the vice of avarice, and her life is in that way going badly. Because of this connection between virtue and successful human life, a virtue theory requires an account of that life as a whole: it needs to explain what it is that Rosa, as a human being, aims at in her life. Virtue theories vary in their response to this need, but all agree that developing and using the virtues is, at least, a large part of the best life for human beings. Virtues are not mere means by which a good life, defined independently of the virtues, is brought about: they are necessary elements of that life (this is an important way in which virtue theories are distinct from utilitarian theories).
4 The virtues are not merely gifts of nature or fortune, and they don’t stay the same over an
individual’s life. Rather, they are developing features of a growing personality. The growth of deep-rooted personality traits, and of the practical wisdom to choose correctly in complex circumstances, takes time, a favourable environment and practice. Virtue ethicists typically follow Aristotle in arguing that virtues are developed by use and by emulation. Rosa becomes courageous by doing brave things in the appropriate circumstances, and cowardly by failing to do them; she learns what courage is by associating with brave people. She becomes better at doing the best thing by doing it in good company. Character traits are in this way like practical skills: as a tennis
player, Rosa models herself on her heroes – Martina Navratilova, say – and uses many repetitions of increasingly difficult tasks to develop her ability, strength and endurance. Similarly, as a virtuous person, Rosa models herself on her moral heroes and uses her inevitable encounters with circumstances requiring virtue and judgement – danger, demands for painful and costly honesty, tensions between loyalty and personal profit, clashes between different commitments – to develop her character and wisdom. The difference, of course, is that for virtue there’s no distinction between the training and the big match.
The new dean According to the Character Lens, we shouldn’t consider abstract rules about recruitment and job performance, but rather try to emulate the best people we know in particular roles. There are two roles in play: the role of recruiter and the role of dean. For the recruiter, we should be thinking about who has the sense – even if they can’t fully explain it – of the best candidate and about developing such perceptions ourselves by paying close, friendly attention to that person. For the dean, we should be thinking about exemplary academic leaders and about their distinctive character traits. The striking contrast here is with Lens 2: Merit, which asks us to focus only on explicit and rule- governed criteria for hiring, where this lens asks us to focus exactly on the particular and implicit.
38 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main source: HURSTHOUSE, R. (1999) On virtue ethics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Overviews: http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ ethics-virtue/
http://plato.stanford.edu/entries/ moral-particularism/
Textbooks and introductions: ANNAS, J. (2006) Virtue ethics. In: COPP, D. (ed.) The Oxford handbook of ethical theory. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
SLOTE, M. (1997) Virtue ethics. In: BARON, M.W. et al (eds) Three methods of ethics: a debate. London: Blackwell.
STATMAN, M. (1997) (ed.) Virtue ethics: a critical reader. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.
Historical sources: Important historical texts by Aristotle, Francis Hutcheson and David Hume are excerpted in: DARWALL, S. (ed.) (2003) Virtue ethics. London: Blackwell: Part I.
Significant contemporary virtue ethics: ADAMS, R.M. (2008) A theory of virtue: excellence in being for the good. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
ANSCOMBE, G.E.M. (1958) Modern moral philosophy. Philosophy. Vol 33. pp1–19.
ANNAS, J. (1993) The morality of happiness. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
ANNAS, J. (2011) Intelligent virtue. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
CRISP, R. and SLOTE, M. (eds) (1997) Virtue ethics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
DRIVER, J. (2006) Uneasy virtue. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
FOOT, P. (1978) Virtues and vices: and other essays in moral philosophy. London: Blackwell.
SLOTE, M. (1992) From morality to virtue. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
MACINTYRE, A. (1981) After virtue: a study in moral theory. London: Duckworth.
SWANTON, C. (2005) Virtue ethics: a pluralistic view. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Further reading on the Character Lens
1 The Fairness Lens
2 The Merit Lens
3 The Markets Lens
4 The Democracy Lens
5 The Well-being Lens
6 The Rights and Duties Lens
7 The Character Lens
8 The Handing Down Lens We can’t reinvent or master the world, and are instead responsible for conserving and maintaining the small part of it over which we currently have stewardship, and for passing it on undamaged to our descendants.
41 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Philosophical background This lens is a sketch of conservatism, understood as philosophy rather than as political ideology. Many of the previous lenses, and much modern thought in general, assume three broad, related claims about human life:
1 Future orientation: we get our bearings by looking towards a better future, to our eventual perfection taken as a universal standard for criticism of the present. Existing valuable things are replaceable without remainder by hypothetical future things. We have faith in progress.
2 Promethean optimism about human rational and creative powers. Utopian social designs will clear away the old to make way for the fully rational new. Our powers and possibilities are vast and independent of circumstance. We can steal fire from the gods.
3 Equal standing: humans are independent individuals without natural hierarchies; the only legitimate hierarchies are those we all agree to make. ‘In the beginning, there were no kings, no landlords, no bosses.’
Conservatism involves rejection of all three of these claims.
1 Against future orientation, conservatives advocate past orientation. We get our bearings by looking to the past, to the home and history which made us. What actually exists has value
just as such and can’t be fully replaced by anything else. And what actually exists is particular and various, and can’t be judged against a single, universal standard. Change is risky and might be for the worse as well as for the better.
2 Against optimism, conservatives advocate a sceptical sense of human imperfection and ignorance. Against rationalistic utopias – transparent, elegant, self-consistent intellectual structures without connection to the messy, half-understood actual world – they set gradual and incomplete learning through experience over time, and humility in the face of our incomplete understanding. They draw attention to our complex dependence on particular and local circumstances and histories.
3 Conservatives reject the claim of equal standing in favour of natural hierarchy. When Jean- Jacques Rousseau announced that ‘[m]an was born free, and everywhere he is in chains,’ the conservative thinker Joseph de Maistre (1753–1815) sarcastically responded that ‘sheep, who are born carnivorous, nevertheless everywhere nibble grass.’ Conservatives advocate continuity, authority and community against individualism and independence. Conservative thinkers have very often been critics of the social contract tradition and have thought of hierarchical society as natural, not as made by or for individuals.
‘Conservatives draw attention to our complex dependence on particular and local circumstances and histories.’
40 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
According to the Handing Down Lens, we can’t reinvent or master the world, and are instead responsible for
conserving and maintaining the small part of it over which we currently have stewardship, and for passing it on
undamaged to our descendants. This covers the institutions we work in, the wider political and social world they
depend on, and the natural environment we all depend on. Workplaces should be designed and assessed with an
eye to what we were given to look after by our predecessors, and which we’ll hand on to our descendants. So, for
example, keeping a firm in family ownership might be more important than maximising its short-term profits, and
maintaining a natural resource might be more important than exploiting it.
41 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
We should note that contemporary pro-capitalist conservative political parties, in the UK, US and elsewhere, are therefore a strange hybrid. The capitalist takeover of the world in the last few hundred years was a revolutionary social change, and partisans of the ‘free market’ are utopians: historically, conservatives have more often resisted them than allied with them.
The three conservative claims – past orientation, scepticism, natural hierarchy – suggest responsibilities: to look after and defend what already exists; to support systems which we know work – because they’ve survived many trials – but which we don’t and can’t fully understand; to stay within our limited powers. The appropriate myth is not Prometheus but Icarus: if you try to leave your natural
role and competence, the result is disaster. Don’t fly too close to the sun.
These ideas apply to human society and to the intermediate institutions – clubs, guilds, schools, businesses, churches, communities, nations – in which much of day-to-day life is lived. But they also apply to the wider natural environment on which human society depends. That recognition has led to the rise of green conservative thought and (to some extent) politics: advocacy against economic growth and for conservation of resources in the face of an uncertain future; recognition of our dependence on systems which we don’t fully understand; localism; and scepticism about our ability to control the effects of our activity as a species on the larger world.
40 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
The new dean According to the Handing Down Lens, we should be looking for someone used to authority, who already understands the particular faculty and university through long acquaintance: someone who has grown up with them, loves them and wants to care for them. An outsider will most likely mess things up, because they rank theory over experience and over-rate their own powers. The best candidates will therefore come from traditional elites, because they’re the people who have that bred-in-the-bone connection to the institution.
42 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas 43 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
Main source: SCRUTON, R. (1984) The meaning of conservatism (2nd edition). Basingstoke: Macmillan.
Textbooks and introductions: NISBET, R. (1986) Conservatism: dream and reality. London: Open University Press.
O’HARA, K. (2011) Conservatism. London: Reaktion Books.
Significant contemporary conservative philosophy: KIRK, R. (1985) The conservative mind: from Burke to Eliot (7th edition). Washington, D.C.: Regnery Publishing.
NISBET, R. (1953) The quest for community: a study in the ethics of order and freedom. Oxford: Oxford University Press (later republished under the title Community and power).
OAKESHOTT, M. (1991) Rationalism in politics and other essays (new edition). Indianapolis, IN: Liberty Press.
SCRUTON, R. (2014) How to be a conservative. London: Bloomsbury.
Significant historical conservative thought: The founding text of modern conservative thought is: BURKE, E. (1993 [1790]) Reflections on the revolution in France (ed. L.G. Mitchell). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Influential texts by Burke, de Maistre and many others are excerpted in: KIRK, R. (ed.) (1982) The portable conservative reader. London: Penguin.
Green conservatism: GRAY, J. (1993) An agenda for green conservatism. In: Beyond the new right: markets, government, and the common environment. London: Routledge.
HANNIS, M. Green conservatism, http://www.thelandmagazine.org. uk/articles/green-conservatism [accessed 5 March 2015].
SCRUTON, R. (2012) Green philosophy: how to think seriously about the planet. London: Atlantic Books.
Green political theory more generally: CARTER, A. (1999) A radical green political theory. London: Routledge.
DOBSON, A. (2000) Green political thought (3rd edition). London: Routledge.
GOODIN, R.E. (1992) Green political theory. Cambridge: Polity Press.
Further reading on the Handing Down Lens
43 Ethical decision-making: Eight perspectives on workplace dilemmas
This review of the ways of thinking about work highlighted eight ethical perspectives for navigating workplace dilemmas.
These lenses present different viewpoints on workplace dilemmas, asking ethical questions that a decision-maker must have answers to – and cannot escape – when navigating workplace dilemmas. For example, the lenses of Character and Handing Down tackle fundamental problems about the moral responsibility those designing work processes have towards society. Both of these draw on the ways in which we view the world and the degree to which we accept the core values of virtue and stewardship as part of our identity, rather than abandoning them to satisfy instrumental or short-term goals.
Other lenses explore the consequences of our decisions. The Well-being Lens states that the
ultimate goal of workplace design should be to promote ‘good’ work for its own sake, and to maximise ‘good’ for the workplace as a whole. This conflicts with the Rights and Duties Lens, which suggests that individuals’ interests shouldn’t be used as means to the ends of others, even if that means that the overall amount of ‘good’ is diminished. The Well-being Lens is also contrasted with the Democracy Lens – the idea that individuals should have autonomy in the way they live their lives, and have control over what happens to them at work, rather than be dealt work that someone else has deemed to be ‘good’.
Interestingly, the three lenses of Fairness, Merit and Markets are often conflated, but, in fact, offer very different kinds of advice on how the outcomes of decisions should be distributed. While the Merit Lens advises that the most hard-working and talented
people are the most deserving, the Fairness Lens advocates distribution of benefits according to individuals’ needs. Alternatively, ethical choices made under the Markets Lens don’t pursue any particular results, and are often advantageous to the luckiest players in the market (rather than ones who merit or need the outcome the most).
While none of the lenses provide a template for the ‘right’ or ‘wrong’ ways in which work could be designed, specific workplace situations will require decision- makers to decide which choices are right for them. Understanding the different ethical perspectives, and demonstrating sensitivity to the ones that matter in a particular organisational context at a particular time, will be a core skill for the HR professional of the future – one that the CIPD is committed to continue developing.
Conclusion
Fairness
Everyone in an organisation should be able to agree to it, whatever their place in it.
Well-being
Work should be good for us.
Merit
Jobs and their rewards should track talent and hard work.
Rights and Duties
Everyone has rights to do some things and to be free of some things, and everyone has duties not to violate others’ rights.
Markets
Jobs and their rewards should follow from voluntary market exchanges.
Character
Each of us should work to develop the best ethical character for our roles.
Democracy
No one should be subject to a regime in which they have no say.
Handing Down
We can’t reinvent or master the world, and are instead responsible for conserving and maintaining the small part of it over which we currently have stewardship, and for passing it on undamaged to our descendants.
Summary of the eight lenses
Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 151 The Broadway London SW19 1JQ United Kingdom T +44 (0)20 8612 6200 F +44 (0)20 8612 6201 E [email protected] W cipd.co.uk Incorporated by Royal Charter Registered as a charity in England and Wales (1079797) and Scotland (SC045154)
Issued: August 2015 Reference: 7069 © CIPD 2015
Evidence-based-knowledge-and-practice-in-HRM.pdf
Contents lists available at ScienceDirect
Human Resource Management Review
journal homepage: www.elsevier.com/locate/hrmr
Don't know, don't care: An exploration of evidence based knowledge and practice in human resource management
Carol Gill Melbourne Business School, Room 147, 200 Leicester Street, Carlton, Victoria 3053, Australia
A B S T R A C T
Over the past two decades the integrity (alignment of words and deeds) of the Human Resource Management (HRM) profession has been questioned by scholars who have identified a gap be- tween the rhetoric of ‘people are our most important asset’ and the reality of ‘impersonal eco- nomic rationalism’. In a more recent, and as yet unconnected, stream of research there has been concern about a research-practice gap in HRM. This article draws on both streams of research to explain why HRM Does not implement evidence based practice. It focuses on research indicating that HRM practitioners are not incentivized to learn about evidence based practice and develops theory proposing that their satisfaction with the status quo reflects a value proposition based on utilitarian instrumentalism. Further to this, it is proposed that management's focus on the short- term drives and obfuscates current approaches. It concludes that neither academia nor HRM practitioners are incentivized to change current practice with negative consequences for em- ployees, organizations, and HRM practitioners. Arguments are supported and illustrated with High Performance Work Practices and solutions are proposed to implement evidence based practice.
1. Introduction
The research-practice gap in HRM has received recent attention (Briner & Rousseau, 2011; Kaufman, 2012; Rynes, 2012; Rynes, Colbert, & Brown, 2002; Rynes, Giluk, & Brown, 2007) and the cost of this gap regarding competitive advantage through human capital has been proposed (Terpstra & Limpaphayom, 2012). A number of studies have shown that, despite availability of theoretical and empirical advice, many organizations failed to take up effective approaches to HRM (Becker & Gerhart, 1996; de Gama, McKenna, & Peticca-Harris, 2012; Kane, Crawford, & Grant, 1999). There are also questions about whether HRM as a function charged with designing and implementing formal systems for managing people has had a positive impact in its 25 to 30 years of existence (Delbridge & Keenoy, 2010; Kaufman, 2012) coupled with evidence that there is little change in HRM over two decades (Lawler & Boudreau, 2012).
It is proposed that the current divide between research and practice in HRM is problematic for organizations that fail to achieve competitive advantage through people (Gill & Meyer, 2011; Huselid, 1995; Pfeffer & Veiga, 1999); for employees who are treated as ‘resources’ or inputs rather than ‘humans’ (de Gama et al., 2012; Legge, 1995); and for HRM professionals who fail to develop competencies that could enhance their organizational status (Ulrich, Brockbank, Johnson, & Younger, 2007).
HRM's inability to implement evidence based management has been attributed to the divide between academics and practitioners in terms of lack of awareness of what the other side knows and cares about; lack of belief or confidence in the knowledge generated or held by the other side; and lack of implementation of knowledge or ideas, even in the face of awareness and belief (Lawler, 2007;
http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.hrmr.2017.06.001 Received 22 June 2016; Received in revised form 5 June 2017; Accepted 7 June 2017
E-mail address: [email protected].
Rynes, 2012; Rynes et al., 2007). Recent evidence confirms a knowing and belief gap in that practitioners do not have knowledge of evidence based management and do not seek or value this knowledge (Rynes et al., 2002; Rynes et al., 2007). There is also some evidence on a knowing-doing gap in that HRM practitioners implement practices they know are not optimum for employees (de Gama et al., 2012). To date the connection between these three antecedents has not been clearly made e.g., how lack of ability to implement may influence lack of knowledge and belief.
Most attention regarding HRM's failure to implement evidence based management has thus far focused on knowledge transfer from academics to HRM practitioners. In particular, there may be a substantial divide between academics and practitioners (Kieser & Leiner, 2009; Lawler, 2007; Rynes et al., 2002; Rynes et al., 2007) which reduces the transfer of research knowledge. Further, academics may not be incentivized to bridge the research-practice gap (e.g., Bartunek & Rynes, 2014). Theory has been developed on why academics may not transfer knowledge to practitioners but little attention has been given to investigating why practitioners may not seek evidence based knowledge. Further, there is an assumption that closing the knowledge gap will translate into implementation of evidence based management with certification of HRM practitioners being a recent focus of academia (see fall 2015 issue of People & Strategy and 2012 issue of Human Resource Management Review devoted to HR certification) and profes- sional bodies (Society of Human Resource Management, 2016) as a vehicle to achieve this. However, whilst good management depends on the implementation of practices based on research evidence, managers may not make rational choices and instead implement decisions based on dogma and belief, and even self-interest (Pfeffer & Sutton, 2006). Consequently, this article moves beyond the divide between academics and practitioners to consider the organizational context (Pfeffer & Cohen, 1984) – namely the HRM function's power relationship with management (Ferris & King, 1991) – that influences HRM's intentions to implement evidence based management. The focus is placed on HRM practitioners' motivation to seek and use evidence based knowledge in a context that (i) is not supportive of evidence based management and (ii) affords HRM practitioners' limited power to effect change. More spe- cifically, this article contributes to understanding on why HRM does not implement evidence based management or value evidence based knowledge. This article will make three contributions. First, it reviews and consolidates what is known about the causes of the research-practice gap which is currently deemed to be a key antecedent of HRM's failure to implement evidence based management. Second, it sheds light on reasons why HRM practitioners may favour the status quo rather than seek and implement evidence based knowledge. Third, recommendations are developed for academics and practitioners to embed evidence based management in or- ganizations that move beyond existing solutions focussing on HRM competency and certification. The proposed model that is pre- sented in this article is outlined in Fig. 1 below.
2. Causes of low evidence based management in HRM: a review of extant literature
To date most attention on evidence based management in HRM has been focused on HRM practitioners' lack of knowledge. It has been proposed that practitioners operate in a vacuum of knowledge (Taylor, Keelty, & McDonnell, 2002) with Rynes et al.'s (2002) research finding that practitioners' knowledge did not align with research evidence. She and her colleagues cite an ‘unimpressive’ average level of knowledge, high variability in knowledge, and poor alignment between academic and practitioner beliefs. This was a ‘best case’ scenario given they sampled the highest-level HRM practitioners and those with less knowledge were more likely to be non-respondents. Specifically, Rynes et al.'s (2002) research found that HR managers typically do not know the evidence with less than 1% of HR managers reading the academic literature regularly (Rynes et al., 2002).
To date the reasons for the knowledge gap in HRM have focused on the failure of academics to consider translation of their findings for practitioners or to communicate in a way that practitioners can understand. It has been proposed that HRM practitioners do not have access to academic knowledge because HRM roles may be filled by managers without HRM expertise who are ‘passing
Fig. 1. Power and HRM practitioner intentions to implement evidence based management.
C. Gill
through’ on their way in or out of general management roles (Lawler, 2007; Ulrich, Younger, Brockbank, & Ulrich, 2013). Those practitioners who do have an HRM qualification may not be educated in evidence based management because many faculty are adjunct or permanent faculty who are not research active and who are more likely to teach than research (Lawler, 2007). Further, graduate students may not recognize that their acquired knowledge can be superseded over time, requiring continuous updating (Lawler, 2007).
Further, there is a decline in practitioner publications in academic journals shifting journals' focus to rigorous academic topics which limits communication of research to practitioners (Rynes et al., 2007). Greater corporate concern for protecting intellectual property, together with increased global competition and limited time and resources, means practitioners are unlikely to conduct research or publish their research which means that academics are asking the research questions and interpreting the answers (Briner & Rousseau, 2011). However, academics are not incentivized to present their work in practitioner journals because academic incentive structures regarding promotion and tenure do not reward publication in practitioner outlets and academics may be re- luctant to have their scientifically rigorous work published alongside articles that diminish or contradict research findings (Rynes et al., 2002). Even if academics were to publish for practitioners their academic style may alienate because research literature is written in a way that is alien to HRM practitioners (Lawler, 2007; Rynes et al., 2002); research evidence is not always clear, making research findings difficult to interpret (Evans & Dean, 2000); academics may make excessive claims based on partial analysis of complex phenomena (Ghoshal, 2005); academic publications are not always relevant to practitioners (George, 2014); and, research outcomes take a while to emerge so academic content may be out of date by the time it is ready to be disseminated to practitioners (Lawler, 2007; Rynes et al., 2007). Further, there are many new practices emerging in HRM that are not yet evidence based (e.g., social media) and some that may be contrary to extant evidence (e.g., elimination of the performance review) which makes the extant body of knowledge deficient or problematic for practitioners.
Based on this, it may not be surprising that HRM practitioners see little relevance in the academic literature (Armstrong, 2000) which means they don't read academic publications (Rynes et al., 2002) and turn to their own journals for knowledge. The most widely read periodical is HR Magazine, which is published by HRM's major professional association (Society for Human Resource Management, 2016) and has a circulation of more than 200,000 (Rynes et al., 2007). Rynes et al. (2002, 2007) found that practitioner journals have a mix of academic research and managerial opinion. In particular, bridge journals, which were the most important source of knowledge for HRM practitioners, had little coverage of research findings deemed most important by researchers. These journals included some research consistent content but also made claims that went beyond that which was substantiated by research. The evidence used came primarily from quotes derived from practicing professionals, managers, and employees, and consultants or vendors, with only 4% coming from academics with very little quantitative data being used (Rynes et al., 2007).
The inclination of HRM practitioners to seek knowledge from practitioner sources may reflect their limited access to useable academic knowledge but it may also be because they believe that academic knowledge will not be of value. HRM practitioners felt that research findings don't work in practice and that they are satisfied with their existing approach (Rynes et al., 2002). In addition to this, Industrial/Organizational psychologists, who have the ability to translate academic knowledge into practice, report that HRM practitioners had often already decided what they wanted and asked the psychologist to deliver it (Rynes, 2012). Further, whilst scepticism is a key ingredient of evidence based management, psychologists found it difficult to acknowledge evidence limitations to clients. HRM practitioners may also resist external knowledge because evidence may challenge managerial prerogative and the value placed on experience and judgement (Briner & Rousseau, 2011). For example, Dipboye (1994) found that one reason that practi- tioners were reluctant to implement structured interviews, which have superior reliability and validity, was because they reduced control and increased accountability through explicit standards.
Practitioners may also choose to derive their knowledge from other practitioners and consultants who may have an agenda to sell their products which may not be consistent with evidence based knowledge. In support of this, the first choice information source of most managers was other managers (Brown & Duguid, 2002; Wenger, McDermott, & Snyder, 2002). Rynes et al. (2002) found that HRM practitioner knowledge was gathered from other HRM practitioners in the same organization, together with practitioner ma- gazines (which have questionable efficacy as discussed above), the Society for Human Resource Management website, and other internet sites. It may be that managers adopt widely accepted practices to garner legitimacy (Simons, 2002) because modelling off other organizations may make existing practices appear legitimate or up to date (Ferris et al., 1998).
In conclusion, extant research indicates that HRM does not have or seek evidence based knowledge. HRM practitioners may not have access to evidence based knowledge because practitioners are not formally educated or certified and academics do not dis- seminate their knowledge to practitioners. Further, there is evidence that practitioners derive knowledge from insular sources. A lack of evidence based knowledge may influence HRM's attitudes towards evidence based management such that they fail to see value in evidence based management and there are indications that HRM practitioners do not believe evidence based knowledge is valuable or that evidence based management will work in practice. It is likely that this presents a vicious cycle in that attitudes towards evidence based knowledge influence HRM practitioners' efforts to seek evidence based knowledge. Despite assumptions about the reasons why HRM practitioners do not have, seek, or use evidence based knowledge, and the conclusion that HRM certification may address the failure of HRM practitioners to implement evidence based management, there is little evidence on the relationship between HRM practitioners' evidence based knowledge and attitudes towards evidence based knowledge and evidence based management. This manuscript advances the following propositions to definitively test existing theory on the research-practice gap antecedent of evi- dence based management in HRM.
Proposition 1a. HRM practitioners' lack of evidence based knowledge increases their unfavourable attitudes towards implementing evidence based management.
C. Gill
Proposition 1b. HRM practitioners' unfavourable attitudes towards the value of evidence based management reduces their motivation to seek and use evidence based knowledge.
3. Additional explanations for HRM practitioners' failure to implement evidence based management
Thus far this article has demonstrated that practitioners do not have access to knowledge on evidence based management because the field is not professionalised and there is a divide between academics and practitioners. These issues imply that evidence based management can be resolved through increasing HRM knowledge and competence and this approach has been adopted by prominent scholars (e.g., Ulrich et al., 2007). However, it is possible that dissemination of academic knowledge is not a panacea and that solutions are more complex. This section will consider why the transmission of evidence based knowledge may not substantially increase the implementation of evidence based management in HRM. The extant literature makes three assumptions that will be challenged in this article: (i) if evidence based knowledge were made more accessible practitioners would use knowledge on evidence based management; (ii) if HRM practitioners had knowledge on evidence based management they would be incentivized to im- plement evidence based management; and (iii) if HRM practitioners had knowledge on evidence based management they would implement evidence based management.
3.1. Inherent contradictions in HRM: developmental humanism versus utilitarian instrumentalism
Two decades ago it was proposed that theory emerged to take HRM from its lowly status of file clerk, social worker, and firefighter to strategic business partner (Kamoche, 1997) which resulted in the current normative concept of HRM. HRM theory has its foun- dation in two distinct United States based models. The Michigan model was associated with a strategic HRM approach, which linked workforce management to organizational strategy. It has also been linked to ‘hard’ HRM or ‘utilitarian instrumentalism’ (Legge, 1995) given the pressure for organizations to focus on short-term results. This model may encourage high control practices that take the ‘low road’ to competitive advantage and are designed to produce cost effective, reliable, but not outstanding performance. In contrast, the Harvard model emphasized the importance of employees who are a source of distinctive and sustainable competitive advantage through their commitment, adaptability, and high quality skills and performance (Porter, Smith, & Fagg, 2007) and was later defined as ‘soft’ HRM (Poole & Mansfield, 1994) or ‘developmental humanism’ (Legge, 1995). This latter model focuses on high commitment work practices that result in in mutually beneficial outcomes for both employees and organizations (Walton, 1985). Subsequently, evidence has supported the efficacy of HRM practices based on developmental humanism linking them to organiza- tional performance (see meta-analyses by Combs, Liu, Hall, & Ketchen, 2006; Saridakis, Lai, & Cooper, 2016; and taxonomy by Posthuma, Campion, Masimova, & Campion, 2013 on High Performance Work Practices).
It is argued that this foundation produced inherent contradictions in the normative concept of HRM (Kaufman, 2012). For instance, developmental humanism characterizes organizations' mission statements that espouse that employees are their most im- portant asset, and utilitarian instrumentalism characterizes organization reality where impersonal economic rationalism dominates in that employees are considered an expense of doing business rather than a source of competitive advantage (Vaughan, 1994). The utilitarian instrumental model is reminiscent of scientific management because, rather than valuing employees as people, it reduces them to passive objects whose value is based on how well they can be used by the organization (Legge, 1995). This tension may require two conflicting HRM roles of strategic business partner and employee champion (see HRM roles advocated by Ulrich & Brockbank, 2005). Further, this conflict may produce lack of alignment between espoused and enacted values in HRM practice (Legge, 1995) as HRM practitioners espouse developmental humanism and enact utilitarian instrumentalism. This implies that HRM is unable to manage the tension between the competing demands of utilitarian instrumentalism and developmental hu- manism and professional associations such as the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development have been criticised for failing to “eradicate the tensions and ambiguities that have long characterised personnel roles” (Gilmore & Williams, 2007, p. 398).
3.2. Evidence based management in HRM: High Performance Work Practices
Evidence based management in HRM (the dependent variable in Fig. 1) can be broadly defined as formal practices for managing human resources that evidence demonstrates are linked to organization performance. This definition of evidence based HRM builds on extant definitions in the HRM and strategic HRM (SHRM) literatures which focus on formal practices for managing human resources and HRM's role in linking human resources to organization strategy (Buller & McEvoy, 2012).
Evidence based management research in HRM has focused on High Performance Work Practices (HPWP) (Kaufman, 2012) which have their origins in Walton's (1985) high commitment management indicating that they have a foundation in developmental hu- manism. HPWP focus on long-term and open ended relationships with employees in contrast to short-term contractual arrangements. They are based on social exchange founded in trust between interdependent exchange partners with reciprocal obligations i.e., there is a reciprocal effect in that the organization invests in employees who reciprocate with commitment and loyalty (Hom et al., 2009). Thus evidence based management is inconsistent with a utilitarian instrumental value proposition. HPWP impact on organizational outcomes through increasing employee ability, motivation, and opportunity to contribute. Practices that enhance employee ability, or human capital, include recruitment, selection, and training. Those that promote motivation include performance management, compensation, benefits, promotion, career development, and job security. Those that enhance opportunity include flexible job design, work teams, employee involvement, and information sharing (Jiang, Lepak, Hu, & Baer, 2012).
C. Gill
Causal links have been made between HPWP and performance. Whilst there has been some debate about whether these practices work in all organizations the weight of evidence indicates that all firms benefit from HPWP irrespective of business strategy (Combs et al., 2006; Huselid, 1995). Such impact has been specifically measured in Huselid's (1995) seminal research, e.g., a one standard deviation shift in HPWP practices increase sales per employee by $27,000 and market value per employee by $18,000. Further, a recent meta-analysis of longitudinal studies indicates an overall correlation of 0.287 between HPWP and firm operational and fi- nancial performance (Saridakis et al., 2016). Thus, HRM practices with a ‘soft’ orientation are the vehicle through which high involvement and commitment deliver ‘hard’ performance outcomes to organizations who are prepared to invest in the development of people (Pfeffer & Veiga, 1999).
Despite strong associations with performance, less than a quarter of organizations adopt practices to any significant extent (see summary of research on HPWP; Tamkin, 2004). For instance, the most recent U.K. WERS survey (fieldwork concluded in 2012) found that employers were least likely to consult employees on changes they thought had the greatest impact on them i.e., new technology and changes in work techniques, with half of employees surveyed reporting they did not receive any consultation (van Wanrooy et al., 2013). It has been concluded that there is widespread underinvestment in employees, human capital, and HRM (e.g., Kaufman, 2010).
One reason for poor adoption of HPWP is that implementation is complex. There is agreement that individual practices work better when synergistically aligned (see meta-analysis of 92 empirical HRM-performance studies by Combs et al., 2006 and meta- analysis of 8 longitudinal studies that included 1661 organizations exploring the relationship between HRM and firm performance by Saridakis et al., 2016). There is evidence to support the need to align practices with each other (Huselid, Jackson, & Schuler, 1997) and evidence that the adoption of single practices do not deliver the same improvement (i.e., Saridakis et al., 2016).
Further, turning good HRM intentions into practice requires systematic implementation (Bowen & Ostroff, 2004; Combs et al., 2006) which requires line manager support (Cunningham & Hyman, 2006; Sikora & Ferris, 2014). Implementation requires the co- operation of leaders throughout the organization who operationalize HRM policy and model an organization's values (Holt Larsen & Brewster, 2003; Sikora & Ferris, 2014). Whilst HRM policy may reflect best practice, the quality of implementation may be poor if line managers fail to see the value of the practice or are not resourced to implement the practice effectively (Woodrow & Guest, 2014) which may lead them to resist (i.e., ignore or sabotage) implementation (Sikora & Ferris, 2014). In par- ticular, leaders have numerous responsibilities and competing priorities which may influence their capacity to implement practices (Purcell & Hutchinson, 2007). Pfeffer (1998) speculated that half of organizations fail to implement HPWP because managers don't believe there is a connection between investment in human resources and financial performance. The other half that do invest fail to engage in comprehensive and systematic implementation required for success or persist with these practices long enough to derive benefit. More recent literature supports this with Kaufman (2012) proposing that managers may underestimate the returns from investing in people because costs of HRM investment are more immediate whilst benefits are derived in the future and are less tangible. In addition it takes some time for HPWP to filter through to performance (see longitudinal studies by Patterson, 1995, and Bartel, Ichniowski, & Shaw, 2004).
In addition, line managers may not implement practices effectively based on their lack of ability or motivation (Holt Larsen & Brewster, 2003). If line managers do not implement HRM practices well it can lead to poor visibility of the practice, inconsistency, and inequity leading to an ‘interpretation gap’ (between implementation and employee's perceptions) even when intended practices are implemented (Piening, Baluch, & Ridder, 2014). Line managers' perceptions of the extent to which they im- plement their organization's HPWP was found to be a mediator of the relationship between HPWP and employee attitudes and behavior (Sikora, Ferris, & Van Iddekinge, 2015).
Finally, top management's beliefs and values impact on HPWP implementation. Arthur, Herdman, and Yang (2016) found that management's employee centred values influenced whether lower-level managers implemented HPWP but values supporting HPWP were rare. This indicates that HRM must be able to influence line managers to effectively implement evidence based management. The next section will show that this is difficult given evidence based management may conflict with management's utilitarian in- strumental values.
3.3. Management has a utilitarian instrumental value orientation
It has been argued that organizations have a short-term focus driven by environmental changes that have influenced government policy, organization ownership, and organization executives (Nasar, Solow, Dertouzos, & Lester, 1989) such that most executives in the United States felt that the market would penalize them for a long-term view (Dertouzos, Lester, & Solow, 1991). This has not changed – the requirement for a rapid response to change, accompanied by increasing cost consciousness, has forced organizations to seek quick fixes to long-term problems (Briner & Rousseau, 2011). Managers sacrifice longer run profitability in favour of shorter- term profits at the expense of longer-term value creation.
This approach may be consistent with shareholders who also have a short-term outlook and markets that put pressure on top management to deliver quarterly growth. Consequently, managers may be myopic in their preference for avoiding losses by dis- counting losses in the future relative to losses in the present and CEO incentives (created by stock options) can incentivize destructive short-termism (Martin, Wiseman, & Gomez-Mejia, 2015). Managers want short-term and simple solutions that bolster their status and perceived contribution (Briner & Rousseau, 2011) and this influences HRM behavior and outcomes (Beer, 2015).
A short-term focus may promote a utilitarian instrumental (cost focussed) approach to human resources which is inconsistent with evidence based management's developmental humanistic focus delivered through HPWP. Evidence based management is difficult and costly to implement in the short-term although delivering long-term benefits (Lawler, 2007). As a consequence line managers may
C. Gill
ignore HRM's attempts to implement evidence based management or HRM may feel that implementing evidence based management is futile and possibly detrimental to their status in an organization. In support of this Boudreau and Lawler (2014) found that when management had a bureaucratic and low cost approach HRM was less likely to play a strategic role and make data based decisions on human capital that add value.
A short-term orientation may obfuscate the consequences of utilitarian instrumental behavior. For example, management may improve organization performance through downsizing, reduced compensation, and cutting training budgets, which may deskill and demotivate human capital with negative implications down the road. However, these results may not be known until HR managers have ‘moved on’ given the short tenure of general managers rotating through HRM (Lawler, 2007). Managerial decisions often involve long time lags and little feedback and substantial time may pass before the true quality of decisions can be discerned (Stamp & Stamp, 1993). Further to this, it is not always obvious that a decision is being made given the array of interactions that compose managerial work (Walshe & Rundall, 2001) which dilutes accountability of both HR and senior managers. Given the transient occupation of HRM roles, current incumbents may not be held accountable for ineffective decisions with long-term con- sequences. Thus empirical research indicates that management is likely to have a utilitarian instrumental orientation towards em- ployees derived from a short-term orientation. This is problematic for HRM practitioners' who wish to implement evidence based management in the form of HPWP, particularly, in light of their power position in relation to line managers.
3.4. HRM's power to implement evidence based management is limited
Power is defined as a force that affects outcomes (Hardy, 1996) and social power is defined as the asymmetric control over valued resources in social relations (Magee & Galinsky, 2008). Whilst those with high power promote agendas, those with low power are inhibited due to the social threat of losing favour of higher ranking individuals. Possessing or lacking power transforms individuals' psychological states in that low power individuals are subject to more social and material threats making them more likely to obey high power individuals. Further, power sets the agenda and imbues the status quo with legitimacy (Magee & Galinsky, 2008). The powerful set agendas, norms and rules, and standards for thought and opinion, making them more action oriented and engaged in strategic change, whilst low power places constraints on behavior (Keltner, Gruenfeld, & Anderson, 2003). Further, there is an as- sociation between power and objectification, or the tendency to view others through an instrumental lens i.e., as a means to an end (Gruenfeld, Inesi, Magee, & Galinsky, 2008). Consequently, management's power position in relation to employees may facilitate a utilitarian instrumental approach consistent with external pressure and rewards for short-term results. In addition, power over HRM implementation and HRM practitioners may lead managers to use HRM practitioners to implement their utilitarian instrumental agenda.
Theory on power indicates why HR managers may struggle to influence HRM strategy leading them to maintain the status quo despite their prescribed change maker role (Caldwell, 2001; Khiiji & Wang, 2006). The HRM function battles to justify its position and value (Kaufman, 2012). In particular, HRM directors may not be accepted as strategic partners by other functional heads, making it difficult for them to challenge senior management decisions. In 2001 only 41.1% of companies reported HRM was a ‘full partner’ in strategic decision making and this percentage had not changed since 1995 (Sanders & Frenkel, 2011). One reason why HRM may lack power and status in organizations is because line manager support is needed to implement HRM practices (see earlier discussion on implementation of HPWP). This places limits on HRM's direct control over valued resources which delivers social power (Magee & Galinsky, 2008; Sheehan, Cieri, & Cooper, 2014). Given HRM's current power and status it is likely that HRM practitioners do not have power to change management's utilitarian instrumental approach.
HRM's power position in organizations and management's utilitarian instrumental agenda may combine to influence HRM practitioners' motivation to implement evidence based management given that motivation is based on estimates that effort will lead to desired results (expectancy theory; Vroom, 1964). HRM practitioners must have power to influence managers to adopt, and effectively implement, evidence based HRM practices even when these practices detract from operational concerns that dominate managers' workloads (Watson, Maxwell, & Farquharson, 2007). As discussed, effective implementation of evidence based manage- ment requires investment and returns on this investment may only be realised in the longer-term. Lack of evidence based knowledge may be an advantage under such conditions because ineffective implementation of HRM practices may not appear to be a choice if HRM practitioners are not aware of the consequences of current practice due to a knowing gap. HRM practitioner's lack of power may influence their attitudes towards evidence based knowledge and evidence based management, based on the potential negative consequences of promoting evidence based management in their organizations. It is more likely that HRM practitioners will adopt management's utilitarian instrumental attitudes.
3.5. HRM has a utilitarian instrumentalism value proposition
Based on this theorizing it is likely that HRM's power position in relationship to management, together with management's utilitarian instrumental orientation, has led to HRM also adopting a utilitarian instrumental value proposition. It is proposed that HRM as a function continues to demonstrate an instrumental concern for employees and focus on the roles of administrative expert (Sheehan et al., 2014) or strategic partner rather than employee champion (Guest & Woodrow, 2012). In support of this, de Gama et al. (2012) found that most HRM practitioners think of the role and practice of HRM as a business function that manages human resources for greater efficiency and ‘return-on-investment’. Only a minority of HRM participants in their study struggled with the moral ambivalence arising from the tension between concern for ‘people’ and the needs of the ‘business’. For example, HRM may respond ambivalently to reports of sexual harassment and bullying because further investigation may disadvantage management
C. Gill
(e.g., see media reports on Uber; Newcomer, 2017). Given HR managers' power and status, short tenure, and line manager rotation into HRM positions, HRM is likely to adopt and
benefit from a utilitarian instrumental value proposition or be penalised for promoting evidence based management because it is not consistent with utilitarian instrumentalism. Consequently, it is also likely that HRM practitioners will not benefit from evidence based knowledge or set intentions to implement evidence based management. Alternatively, HRM may “cherry pick” evidence based knowledge and evidence based management by selecting aspects that are consistent with a utilitarian instrumental value proposition in two ways. First, they may adopt HPWP but implement these practices instrumentally. For example, during a performance man- agement discussion feedback for development purposes may take the form of evaluation; self-managed work teams may focus on peer surveillance; and executives may be rewarded with stock options for individual and short-term performance.
Second, HRM may use evidence based management rhetoric to implement utilitarian instrumentalism and elicit employee compliance with a utilitarian instrumental agenda. Rhetoric characterized by developmental humanism and mutuality may obfuscate an instrumental approach and overcome employee resistance. For example, rhetoric has featured in accounts of ‘inhumane’ work- places such as HubSpot where getting fired was called “graduation” (Lyons, 2016; Pfeffer, 2016). This implies that HRM may be valued as a discursive instrument that can deliver management value in the short-term by making instrumental work practices palatable to employees and persuading them to accept management views. What HRM says, as well as what it does through HRM policy and practice, influences change (Caldwell, 2001). The HRM unitary rhetoric of ‘people are our most valued resource’ may support a managerial attempt to obtain employees' discretionary effort and commitment (Delbridge & Keenoy, 2010). It has even been suggested that HRM “may be best understood as a discourse and set of practices that attempt to reduce the indeterminacy or ambiguity involved in the employment contract” (Townley, 1993, p. 518). This suggests that HRM may use soft rhetoric to disguise, and gain employee commitment to, a hard reality characterized by work intensification and job insecurity (e.g., it is a ‘wolf in sheep's clothing’; Armstrong, 2000).
A combination of soft and hard HRM rhetoric was observed by McGovern, Gratton, Hope-Hailey, Stiles, and Truss (1997) who found that even when development humanism was embraced at the rhetorical level there was still an emphasis on improving bottom line performance and the interests of the organization which always took priority over the individual employee. Whilst this gap has been attributed over time to HRM's ineffectiveness in that it has been suggested that HRM does not have the ability to translate its rhetoric into reality (e.g., ‘big hat, no cattle’; Skinner, 1981) and “HR's aspirations do not yet fully align with its ability to deliver” (Boudreau & Ziskin, 2011, p. 255), it is possible that HRM and management are not incentivised to close this gap.
The potential for HRM to implement management's utilitarian instrumental agenda may confer power and status on an otherwise marginalised HRM function. More specifically, HRM promises to coordinate large numbers of people through practices that differ- entiate between employees, predict their behavior, and rationally and efficiently deploy them (Townley, 1993). This conclusion was drawn from Foucault (1977, p. 148) who suggested that HRM promises to transform "confused, useless or dangerous multitudes into ordered multiplicities" through HRM practices that classify, categorise, measure, and make individuals observable, measurable, and quantifiable (e.g., performance appraisal systems, intelligence and personality testing, and more recently, data analytics). In this way, HRM may acquire knowledge of employees that precedes power over them. HRM rhetoric promises to deliver practices, techniques, and procedures that make employees knowable and governable (Townley, 1993) thus enhancing the status of HRM (Kamoche, 1997). An example of this approach concerns the use of testing in selection practices which may contribute to HRM's value proposition that is predicated on specialist practices that are consistent with rational and efficient deployment of employees (Townley, 1993).
Further a discourse of developmental humanism may provide coherence to the HRM function. HRM rhetoric may glue together a conflicted and incoherent HRM comprised of fragmented ‘sets of bits’ (disparate practices) which have limited significance on their own but are combined into an intelligible whole through an input-process-output model of organizing (Townley, 1993) i.e., SHRM. This is consistent with the notion that discourse produces, transmits, and reinforces power (Foucault, 1977). It can make a group both visible and vulnerable and may be used to construct and reconcile corporate success, failure, and subjectivity (Dick & Collings, 2014). Such discourse indicates that HRM is able to deploy key resources (employees) on which managers depend (Sheehan et al., 2014).
Based on this logic it is likely that HRM will benefit from a mix of soft and hard rhetoric and from implementing reality based on utilitarian instrumentalism because management will reward the HRM function for an approach that operationalises their agenda. For example, the implementation of testing in selection processes is inconsistent with evidence based management because testing is frequently used in isolation of other selection techniques and without candidates being adequately debriefed on the test results (International Test Commission, 2013; Marx, 2002). However, in the short-term these practices provide the illusion of efficiency and accuracy whilst alienating and potentially harming job applicants who do not have power in the recruitment process.
Job candidates selected in this way may develop an instrumental rather than committed relationship with their employer (Ambrose & Rosse, 2003) which is inconsistent with the philosophy of HPWP. However, implementing HRM practices consistent with research evidence is likely to be time consuming and costly in the short-term i.e., debriefing multiple job candidates on test results. Thus implementing evidence based management could disadvantage HRM practitioners who may not derive benefit from positive distal outcomes that may not be attributed to HRM practitioner effort. In addition, negative long-term consequences may not be identified or attributed to HRM. This is consistent with the critical perspective on HRM that proposed that rhetoric or ‘illusory claims’ maintain HRM's status despite reality that falls short of this rhetoric (Wilmott, 2003). This leads to poor HRM behavioral integrity, or misalignment between words and deeds, which has been shown to have negative organizational consequences (Simons, 2002; Simons, LeRoy, Collewaert, & Butler, 2015). Paradoxically HRM may be rewarded for practices that undermine its rhetoric of managing people for competitive advantage. This type of organizational hypocrisy has already been discussed in the literature (Kerr, 1975).
C. Gill
3.6. Explanatory model for HRM's implementation of evidence based management
Ajzen's (1991) theory of planned behavior is a valuable framework to consider the antecedents of HRM's intentions to implement evidence based management. This model proposes three antecedents to intentions. The first concerns favourable versus unfavourable attitudes towards a behavior. The second is subjective norms or the perceived social pressure to perform or not perform a behavior. The third is perceived behavioral control which is the perceived ease or difficulty of performing a behavior. This framework will now be used to shed light on why HRM practitioners do not implement evidence based management based on the arguments presented thus far.
Attitudes develop from beliefs, such as the cost incurred in performing a behavior, with undesirable consequences producing unfavourable attitudes. The implementation of evidence based management is unlikely to produce desirable consequences for HRM practitioners because (i) HRM practitioners have less power than senior managers who determine organization strategy and values towards human resources based on short-term, low-cost considerations (ii) HRM practitioners have less power than line managers who implement HRM policy and practices based on senior managers' utilitarian instrumental values (iii) evidence based management is inconsistent with management's utilitarian instrumental approach to human resources because evidence based management is costly to implement in the short-term and delivers benefits in the longer-term. These factors indicate that HRM practitioners would be ‘swimming upstream’ to implement evidence based management. Evidence based knowledge is unlikely to be of benefit in such a context and indeed could produce cognitive dissonance (Festinger, 1962) that creates unnecessary discomfort and disadvantage as futile attempts are made to influence what one knows to be correct, result in failure and frustration. Under these conditions if practitioners, incentivized by evidence based knowledge, attempted but failed to implement evidence based management, they may change their beliefs about the value of evidence based management to reduce dissonance given constraints on behavior change, engaging in a vicious cycle that reduces evidence based knowledge.
Subjective normative beliefs are based on the likelihood that important referent individuals or groups approve or disapprove of performing a behavior. HRM practitioners hold senior and line managers as important referents (but not employees) because of their power relationship with managers vis a vis employees. In support of this Van der Zee, Bakker, and Bakker (2002) found norms of colleagues and management influenced intentions to implement structured interviews. Consequently, it is likely that HRM practi- tioners may be influenced by managers' normative beliefs of utilitarian instrumentalism and evidence supports this proposition (see section on HRM's utilitarian instrumental value proposition).
Perceived behavioral control is based on the presence or absence of requisite resources and opportunities. More resources and opportunities and fewer anticipated obstacles increase perceptions of control. It is likely that HRM practitioners' power position increases their perceptions of obstacles and reduces their perceptions of resources and opportunities in regards to implementing evidence based management because attempts to influence more powerful senior and line managers to adopt evidence based management are likely to result in negative consequences. First, managers' utilitarian instrumental focus will influence whether HRM practitioners believe they will be rewarded (or punished) for promoting and implementing evidence based management. Second, HRM practitioners will be under direct social pressure from senior managers and line managers to implement practices with a utilitarian instrumental orientation. Third, HRM practitioners may believe they cannot implement practices that do not have a utilitarian instrumental orientation, affecting their perceptions of control. Based on these arguments it is proposed that:
Proposition 2a. HRM practitioners' low power position in relationship to management increases their unfavourable attitudes towards implementing evidence based management.
Proposition 2b. HRM's low power position in relationship to management increases their responsiveness to management's utilitarian instrumental normative beliefs.
Proposition 2c. HRM's low power position in relationship to management reduces HRM practitioners' perceptions of control regarding evidence based management implementation.
Attitudes, social norms, and perceptions of control have a strong relationship with intentions to implement (Ajzen, 1991). If HRM practitioners' attitudes towards evidence based management were favourable, social norms were supportive of the implementation of evidence based management, and HRM practitioners' believed that they could implement evidence based management, it is likely that they would set intentions to implement. However, the arguments presented in this article indicate that management has a utilitarian instrumental attitude towards human resources and so do HRM practitioners. Second, social norms of management are likely to be focussed on utilitarian instrumentalism which is inconsistent with developmental humanism. Further, it is likely that HRM practitioners may be responsive to management norms based on their power position in the organization in relationship to senior managers who influence HRM values and line mangers who implement HRM practices. Third, it is likely that HRM have low perceptions of control in terms of implementing evidence based management given low levels of successful implementation in the past and the low probability of successful implementation in the future (based on their low power in relationship to management who implement evidence based management). Based on these arguments the following propositions are presented.
Proposition 3a. HRM practitioners' unfavourable attitudes towards implementing evidence based management will reduce their intentions to implement evidence based management.
Proposition 3b. Management's negative social norms regarding evidence based management will reduce HRM practitioners' intentions to implement evidence based management.
C. Gill
Proposition 3c. HRM's low perceptions of control regarding their ability to implement evidence based management will reduce HRM practitioners' intentions to implement evidence based management.
Intentions to implement evidence based management when combined with behavioral control have been found to account for a considerable proportion of variance in behavior (Ajzen, 1991). However, it is possible that actors may not accurately perceive their behavioral control resulting in intentions but not actual behavior if actual control is low. Thus it is proposed that power is both an antecedent of HRM practitioners' intentions to implement evidence based management and a moderator of the intention to behavior relationship. Given senior and line management's role in the implementation of HRM practices it is unlikely that HRM practitioners would be able to implement evidence based management even if they had evidence based knowledge because evidence based management is inconsistent with a utilitarian instrumental agenda. Thus it is proposed that:
Proposition 4. HRM practitioners' intentions to implement evidence based management are related to their implementation of evidence based management with low intentions resulting in low implementation.
Proposition 5. The relationship between HRM's intentions to implement evidence based management and HRM's actual implementation of evidence based management will be moderated by HRM's power to implement evidence based management such that high intentions to implement evidence based management result in low implementation if power to implement is low.
3.7. Boundary conditions that may influence the model
It is also likely that a number of boundary conditions may influence the intention to and actual implementation of evidence based management and it is suggested that these be included in future research. For instance, the relationship between HRM practitioners' power and their intentions and ability to implement evidence based management may be moderated by organizational factors i.e., organization size, industry, and strategy. For example, an organization listed on the stock exchange may be required to deliver shorter-term outcomes than a not-for-profit or private organization, influencing management's attitude to employees and HRM practitioners' power and motivation to implement evidence based management. In particular, private organizations may not be subject to short-term pressures because business owners may be more invested in long-term returns. These owners may also be influenced by their personal values which may influence their attitude to human resources.
Second, it may also be that industries operating in competitive labor markets need to provide an employee experience based on developmental humanism to attract and retain human resources (e.g., technology companies such as Apple and Google). In this case, competitive labor market contexts may influence management's attitudes towards developmental humanism and social norms that influence HRM practitioners' attitudes to evidence based management. This may also be the case for organizations requiring in- novative, adaptive, and creative competencies that require a committed workforce that is facilitated by HPWP.
In contrast, organizations that adopt a low cost strategy and don't require employee discretionary effort may adopt utilitarian instrumental attitudes. Further, private sector organizations operating in a non-competitive labor market who have a low cost strategy may also be more likely to adopt utilitarian instrumental attitudes towards human resources. This will then decrease HRM practitioners' positive attitudes towards evidence based management and/or reduce HRM practitioners' perceived control and actual power to implement evidence based management.
Thus the strategy and context of an organization may influence management's attitudes and HRM strategy (see Miles and Snow [1984] for more on the links between strategy and HRM). In support of this, a relationship between strategy and HPWP im- plementation has been found in extant research (e.g., Gill & Meyer, 2008) although further empirical research is required (Combs et al., 2006: Jiang et al., 2012).
It is also possible that HRM practitioners' experience, age, gender, and traits such as proactive personality, may influence their power in regards to management and their motivation to seek and use evidence based knowledge. However, this may not be in the expected direction. For instance, prior research has found a negative correlation between experience and desire to learn about academic research with more experienced HRM practitioners less likely to be motivated to seek evidence based knowledge (Rynes et al., 2002). The reasons for this are unclear but it is possible that those with more experience have more confidence in their existing knowledge.
Based on these arguments the following propositions are presented (but not included in Fig. 1).
Proposition 6. The relationship between HRM practitioners' power and their intentions and ability to implement evidence based management will be moderated by organizational factors i.e., organization size, industry, and strategy.
Proposition 7. The relationship between HRM practitioners' power and their intentions and ability to implement evidence based management will be moderated by HRM practitioner individual characteristics i.e., experience, age, gender, and traits.
4. Discussion and conclusion
This article seeks to explain the many contradictions, paradoxes, and ironies that characterise evidence based management in HRM and makes a contribution in three significant ways. First, it reviews, consolidates, and extends theory on an intractable research- practice gap in HRM, providing additional explanations for why this gap exists and is difficult to close. Second, this article links evidence on the research-practice gap to evidence of a rhetoric-reality gap in HRM to explain the dearth of evidence based knowledge
C. Gill
and evidence based management in HRM. In doing so it combines parallel and related research streams, thus consolidating the body of knowledge to provide nuanced propositions. Third, this article illustrates theory with the case of HPWP to show the practical application and implications of this theory.
Thus far it has been assumed that HRM decision making is rational and if knowledge of evidence based management in HRM was available that HRM practitioners would make decisions to implement it. However, there are non-strategic determinants of HRM practices (Pfeffer & Cohen, 1984) such as the political context in which HRM decisions and behavior occur (Ferris & King, 1991). Organizations are political arenas with competing interests (Mintzberg, 1985) and managers and HRM practitioners may act with self-interest and guile in pursuing goals (Wright & McMahan, 1992). In particular, the power relationships between managers, HRM practitioners, and employees determine the way in which HRM practices are implemented. Evidence based management is char- acterized by developmental humanism which is inconsistent with HRM's utilitarian instrumental value proposition. This together with power dynamics in organizations may lead to dysfunctional espousal and enactment of evidence based management which may explain why HRM does not seek evidence based knowledge or implement evidence based management unless it is consistent with a utilitarian instrumental value proposition. Different interpretations are possible when examining evidence based management through a political lens.
Several reasons have been proposed for the knowing gap in HRM (Lawler, 2007; Rynes et al., 2007). The low status of HRM means that managers without expertise may rotate through HRM practitioner roles for development purposes bringing with them a utili- tarian instrumental orientation or a propensity to defer to managers with this perspective. These ‘visiting’ practitioners are unlikely to have an HRM specific education or be members of professional bodies that could provide up to date guidelines consistent with research evidence. There are also questions about research content in university courses and how HRM practitioners are updated post university given an identified academic-practitioner divide and lack of incentive for academics to communicate research evidence to practitioners. This vacuum may encourage practitioners to seek knowledge from unreliable and insular sources (e.g., practitioner magazines and other HRM practitioners) that reinforce the status quo. Closing the gulf between academics and practitioners may be difficult given the significant differences between the two. However, an exclusive focus on the difficulties of transferring knowledge from academics to practitioners may obfuscate more fundamental issues on why HRM practitioners do not adopt evidence based management. Based on their own self report HRM practitioners do not value research knowledge nor are they motivated to seek it out from academic journals or bridge professions that have evidence based knowledge (Rynes et al., 2007).
Further, HRM practitioners may not implement evidence based management even if they have the knowledge to do so (Pfeffer & Sutton, 2006) because they have a utilitarian instrumental value proposition which is inconsistent with evidence based management. Consequently HRM practitioners may implement practices that diminish or even destroy value in organizations whilst espousing a value creation role. Ironically, HRM espouses competitive advantage through people but fails to adopt evidence based management that could achieve this. The question is why would HRM practitioners engage in these practices? To date scholars have focused on HRM practitioners' lack of knowledge (e.g., Rynes et al., 2002) and how to close this knowledge gap (e.g., Bansal, Bertels, Ewart, MacConnachie, & O'Brien, 2012; Bartunek & Rynes, 2014). In particular, it is proposed that HRM practitioners' impact and status can be enhanced through knowledge that helps an organization improve its competitive advantage (e.g., Ulrich & Brockbank, 2005).
However, the illusion of knowledge and expertise, rather than actual knowledge, may be sufficient to enhance HRM power and status when this (pseudo) knowledge is consistent with the salient HRM value proposition. Thus HRM practitioners may be in- centivized to seek confirming evidence (Nickerson, 1998) consistent with current approaches. If HRM practitioners acquired knowledge on evidence based management they may be compelled to use this knowledge which may undermine their current role in organizations. This is not to suggest that HRM practitioners are Machiavellian in their agenda. Whilst there is evidence that HRM practitioners are aware of their instrumental utilitarian approach (de Gama et al., 2012) there is also evidence that they are unaware that current practices are not evidence based (Rynes et al., 2002). However, HRM's lack of motivation to seek evidence based knowledge may reflect their satisfaction with the status quo which, together with short-term organizational horizons, defends against cognitive dissonance (Festinger, 1962) that may motivate change.
Future research may wish to test the propositions within this article. It is likely that when operationalised they will result in incremental variance hypothesis testing that can examine whether motivation does explain additional variance over evidence based knowledge. Operationalization of evidence based management in HRM may draw on a substantial body of HPWP empirical research which includes valid measures.
Research at multiple levels will be required to test the propositions in this article to explore the role of HRM systems in the ‘trade- offs’ that may exist between organizational performance and employee well-being (Peccei & Van De Voorde, 2016). First, organi- zation strategy developed by senior management and the HRM function's acquisition of knowledge, use of rhetoric, and intentions to implement evidence based management, are at the organizational level of analysis. Second, HRM's actual implementation of HRM occurs in partnership with line managers operating at the group level of analysis and it is at this level that individual employees have the opportunity to contribute. Third, evidence based management's impact on human capital can be considered at the individual level of analysis in terms of the ability and motivation of employees who experience the HRM practice.
The impact of evidence based management can be operationalised through HPWP which can be assessed at multiple levels of analysis in terms of individual, group, and organizational performance. These propositions may be tested with a variety of qualitative and quantitative research methods, however, qualitative research through interviews with management and HRM practitioners is recommended in the first instance to flesh out some of these initial propositions. To date the research-practice gap has focused on HRM practitioners but it may be fruitful to explore whether management would be prepared to adopt and implement evidence based management if they had evidence based knowledge.
C. Gill
4.1. Practical implications
This article has practical implications for employees, HRM practitioners, organizations, organization' stakeholders, and HRM educators, including academics and professional associations. It is probable (although not certain) that the HRM practitioners and managers are under the illusion that current HRM practices deliver competitive advantage and are unaware that HRM has been given “a failing grade” (Kaufman, 2012) by some academics. This has implications for organizational stakeholders, e.g., investors and shareholders. Further, employees (and potential employees) are likely to be disadvantaged by this approach (e.g., see Delbridge & Keenoy, 2010; de Gama et al., 2012). Finally, there are implications for academics and professional associations who may need to consider how they transfer knowledge to, and encourage the implementation of, evidence based management in HRM professionals and line managers who are partners in implementing HRM practices (Sikora & Ferris, 2014).
Academic publications could do more systematic reviews and pay more attention to the complexity of implementing research findings, acknowledging the context that HRM practitioners operate in. For example, HRM needs to enlist the support of managers to create a strong HRM system that influences employees' perceptions. Currently, academics may oversimplify the practical implications of their research by ignoring power relations and the inherent tensions within HRM.
Solutions may not lie soley in more effective and palatable communication of academic research to a resistant practitioner audience or academic/practitioner research collaborations. Further, market short-termism drives counterproductive behavior in organizations but changing senior management incentive structures, and the investing behavior that drives this, is ambitious. However, better communication of the competitive advantage in implementing HPWP to these audiences may be possible. The professionalization of HRM may make this possible and facilitate other change. First, it may end the practice of using transitory HRM roles as training for general business graduates ‘passing through’ on their way to more senior general management roles (Lawler, 2007). Second, it may give more power and status to governing bodies who could promote evidence based knowledge and practice to a range of stakeholders including institutional investors. Finally, it may give HRM the power, status, and motivation to promote and implement evidence based management in organizations because professional status is defined by knowledge (Fanning, 2011; Ulrich et al., 2013). Ulrich et al. (2013) have recently and optimistically proposed that HRM is increasingly moving towards professional status. However, further dialogue on how to improve the professional status of HRM is warranted.
Professional associations and educators may also need to consider the inherent contradictions in prescriptive HRM roles of administrative expert, strategic partner, change agent, and employee champion (Ulrich & Brockbank, 2005) and prepare HRM pro- fessionals to deal with these competing roles. In particular, strategic partnership may be at odds with administrative expert, change agent, and employee champion roles. Specifically, managers' perceptions of HRM as administrative expert may undermine HRM's strategic role; HRM practitioners' attempts to be an employee champion may be perceived as them not being commercially minded; and, HRM's change agent role may be undermined by HRM's lack of power, utilitarian instrumental value proposition, and devel- opmental humanistic rhetoric which maintains the status quo and obfuscates failure to implement evidence based management.
To address this, HRM may need to promote a unitary vision (i.e., that treating people well is good for business in the long-term) or to be an organization's conscience (i.e., espouse that treating people well is the right thing to do even if there is cost involved). Further, HRM practitioners may consider the importance of their discourse in HRM policy and practice. Research has demonstrated that the powerful (management) will only treat less powerful (employees) well if they have higher values (Magee & Galinsky, 2008). To influence management values HRM practitioners may need to demonstrate political leadership (Douglas & Ammeter, 2004) and use positive influence tactics (i.e., rational persuasion, inspirational appeals, and consultation) that lead to positive impressions (Yukl & Tracey, 1992). These skills could be the focus of additional HRM curriculum and professional development.
In addition, professional bodies could facilitate examination of the values of the HRM profession given that ethical and human values may be required to prevent practices that exploit the power discrepancy inherent in the employment relationship. In parti- cular, the importance of HRM values and ethics may be important in moderating the natural inclination to use power to exploit the powerless (Magee & Galinsky, 2008). Consequently, in addition to evidence based education, values-based education (Biesta, 2010) could be introduced into curriculum because values influence HRM policies which influence practices and competencies (Posthuma et al., 2013). Further, HRM values could be a foundation of HRM competency models.
Another solution may be to include HRM education in the undergraduate and post graduate curriculum for general managers i.e., Bachelor of Business and MBA students (Burke & Rau, 2010). This may create an educated internal stakeholder that requests evidence based management from HRM; diligently implements evidence based management; and realises the importance of HRM if given an HRM role on the way through to general management. Whilst managers may not be initially incentivized to learn about HRM ethics/ values, strategy, and practices, lecturers can show the importance of doing so for organizational competitive advantage and the moral obligations associated with power. In this way business schools may create an appetite for evidence based management in managers who will influence HRM practitioners to deliver in line with their expectations. Consequently, it is not proposed that the academic profession is absolved of their responsibility to communicate evidence based material in their courses, or that they should not be incentivised to communicate to practitioners, but that the audience must be broadened to achieve change.
In conclusion, HRM's current value proposition based on a discourse of utilitarian instrumentalism may be incompatible with evidence based HRM. Evidence based implementation may be inconsistent with HRM's current ‘power over employees’ value pro- position and may not pass cost/benefit hurdles. In addition, HRM may not have the power to implement evidence based management. Whilst the research-practice debate has considered both knowledge and implementation hurdles this article suggests that these may be linked. It is proposed that both academics and practitioners could consider HRM practitioner power and discourse in decision making regarding the adoption and implementation of HRM practices. Once acknowledged, academics may consider this in theory development, research design, practical implications of research, and teaching curriculum for HRM practitioners and line managers.
C. Gill
References
Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, 50(2), 179–211. Ambrose, M. L., & Rosse, J. G. (2003). Procedural justice and personality testing: An examination of concern and typical. Group & Organization Management, 28(4),
502–526. Armstrong, M. (2000). The name has changed but has the game remained the same? Employee Relations, 22(6), 576–593. Arthur, J. B., Herdman, A. O., & Yang, J. (2016). How top management HR beliefs and values affect high performance work system adoption and implementation
effectiveness. Human Resource Management, 55(3), 413–435. Bansal, P., Bertels, S., Ewart, T., MacConnachie, P., & O'Brien, J. (2012). Bridging the research-practice gap. Academy of Management Perspectives, 26(1), 73–92. Bartel, A., Ichniowski, C., & Shaw, K. (2004). Using “insider econometrics” to study productivity. The American Economic Review, 94(2), 217–223. Bartunek, J. M., & Rynes, S. L. (2014). Academics and practitioners are alike and unlike: The paradoxes of academic-practitioner relationships. Journal of Management,
40(5), 1181–1201. Becker, B., & Gerhart, B. (1996). The impact of human resource management on organizational performance: Progress and prospects. Academy of Management Journal,
39(4), 779–801. Beer, M. (2015). HRM at a crossroads: Comments on evolution of strategic HRM through two founding books: A 30th anniversary perspective on development of the
field. Human Resource Management, 54(3), 417–421. Biesta, G. J. J. (2010). Why ‘what works’ still won't work : From evidence-based education to value-based education. Studies in Philosophy and Education, 29(5),
491–503. Boudreau, J., & Lawler, E. E. (2014). Stubborn traditionalism in HRM: Causes and consequences. Human Resource Management Review, 24(3), 232–244. Boudreau, J. W., & Ziskin, I. (2011). The future of HR and effective organizations. Organizational Dynamics, 40(4), 255–266. Bowen, D. E., & Ostroff, C. (2004). Understanding HRM-firm performance linkages: The role of the “strength” of the HRM system. Academy of Management Review,
29(2), 203–221. Briner, R. B., & Rousseau, D. M. (2011). Evidence-based I-O Psychology: Not there yet. Industrial and Organizational Psychology, 4(1), 3–22. Brown, J. S., & Duguid, P. (2002). Local knowledge innovation in the networked age. Management Learning, 33(4), 427–437. Buller, P. F., & McEvoy, G. M. (2012). Strategy, human resource management and performance: Sharpening line of sight. Human Resource Management Review, 22,
43–56. Burke, L., & Rau, B. (2010). The research-teaching gap in management. Academy of Management Learning & Education, 9(1), 132–143. Caldwell, R. (2001). Champions, adapters, consultants and synergists: The new change agents in HRM. Human Resource Management Journal, 11(3), 39–52. Combs, J., Liu, Y., Hall, D. K., & Ketchen, D. (2006). How much do high-performance work practices matter? A meta-analysis of their effects on organizational
performance. Personnel Psychology, 59(3), 501–528. Cunningham, I., & Hyman, J. (2006). Transforming the HRM vision the role of line managers and supervisors in implementing change. Employee Relations, 17(8), 5–20. Delbridge, R., & Keenoy, T. (2010). Beyond managerialism? The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 21(6), 799–817. Dertouzos, M. L., Lester, R., & Solow, R. (1991). Made in America. New York: HarperCollins. Dick, P., & Collings, D. G. (2014). Discipline and punish? Strategy discourse, senior manager subjectivity and contradictory power effects. Human Relations, 67(12),
1513–1536. Dipboye, R. L. (1994). Structured and unstructured selection interviews: Beyond the job-fit model. Research in Personnel and Human Resources Management, 12, 79–123. Douglas, C., & Ammeter, A. P. (2004). An examination of leader political skill and its effect on ratings of leader effectiveness. The Leadership Quarterly, 15, 537–550. Evans, J. R., & Dean, J. W., Jr. (2000). Total quality: Management, organization, and strategy (2nd ed.). Cincinnati: South-Western Publishing. Fanning, B. (2011). Human resource management: The road to professionalization in the UK and USA. Kingston University, London: Unpublished Master's thesis. Retrieved
from http://docplayer.net/2097337-Human-resource-management-the-road-to-professionalization-in-the-uk-and-usa.html. Ferris, G. R., & King, T. R. (1991). Politics in human resources decisions: A walk on the dark side. Organizational Dynamics, 20(2), 59–71. Ferris, G. R., Arthur, M. M., Berkson, H. M., Kaplan, D. M., Harrell-Cook, G., & Frink, D. D. (1998). Toward a social context theory of the human resource management-
organization effectiveness relationship. Human Resource Management Review, 8(3), 235–264. Festinger, L. (1962). A theory of cognitive dissonance. Vol. 2. Stanford, CA: Stanford university press. Foucault, M. (1977). Discipline and punishment. New York: Pantheon. de Gama, N., McKenna, S., & Peticca-Harris, A. (2012). An alternative approach to ethical HRM through the discourse and lived experiences of HR professionals.
Journal of Business Ethics, 111(1), 97–108. George, G. (2014). From the editors rethinking management scholarship. Academy of Management Journal, 57(1), 1–6. Ghoshal, S. (2005). Bad management theories are destroying good management practices. Academy of Management Learning & Education, 4(1), 75–91. Gill, C., & Meyer, D. (2008). High and low road approaches to the management of human resources: An examination of the relationship between business strategy,
human resource management and high performance work practices. International Journal of Employment Studies, 16(2), 67–112. Gill, C., & Meyer, D. (2011). The role and impact of HRM policy. International Journal of Organizational Analysis, 19(1), 5–28. Gilmore, S., & Williams, S. (2007). Conceptualising the “personnel professional” a critical analysis of the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development's pro-
fessional qualification scheme. Personnel Review, 36(3), 398–414. Gruenfeld, D. H., Inesi, M. E., Magee, J. C., & Galinsky, A. D. (2008). Power and the objectification of social targets. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 95(1),
111. Guest, D. E., & Woodrow, C. (2012). Exploring the boundaries of human resource managers' responsibilities. Journal of Business Ethics, 111(1), 109–119. Hardy, C. (1996). Understanding power: Bringing about strategic change. British Journal of Management, 7(1), 3–16. Holt Larsen, H., & Brewster, C. (2003). Line management responsibility for HRM: What is happening in Europe? Employee Relations, 25(3), 228–244. Hom, P. W., Tsui, A. S., Wu, J. B., Lee, T. W., Zhang, A. Y., Fu, P. P., & Li, L. (2009). Explaining employment relationships with social exchange and job embeddedness.
Journal of Applied Psychology, 94(2), 277. Huselid, M. A. (1995). The impact of human resource management practices on turnover, productivity, and corporate financial performance. Academy of Management
Journal, 38(3), 635–672. Huselid, M. A., Jackson, S. E., & Schuler, R. S. (1997). Technical and strategic human resources management effectiveness as determinants of firm performance.
Academy of Management Journal, 40(1), 171–188. International Test Commission (2013). ITC Guidelines on Test Use. Retrieved from https://www.usq.edu.au/library/referencing/apa-referencing-guide#Web_
documents_and_sites. Jiang, K., Lepak, D. P., Hu, J., & Baer, J. C. (2012). How does human resource management influence organizational outcomes? A meta-analytic investigation of
mediating mechanisms. Academy of Management Journal, 55(6), 1264–1294. Kamoche, K. (1997). Knowledge creation and learning in international HRM. International Journal of Human Resource Management, 8(2), 213–225. Kane, B., Crawford, J., & Grant, D. (1999). Barriers to effective HRM. International Journal of Manpower, 20(8), 494–516. Kaufman, B. E. (2010). The theoretical foundation of industrial relations and its implications for labor economics and human resource management. Industrial & Labor
Relations Review, 64(1), 74–108. Kaufman, B. E. (2012). Strategic human resource management research in the United States: A failing grade after 30 years? Academy of Management Perspectives, 5,
12–37. Keltner, D., Gruenfeld, D. H., & Anderson, C. (2003). Power, approach, and inhibition. Psychological Review, 110(2), 265. Kerr, S. (1975). On the folly of rewarding A, while hoping for B. Academy of Management Journal, 18(4), 769–783. Khiiji, S. E., & Wang, X. (2006). ‘Intended’ and ‘implemented’ HRM: The missing linchpin in strategic human resource management research. International Journal of
Human Resource Management, 17(7), 1171–1189.
C. Gill
Kieser, A., & Leiner, L. (2009). Why the rigour – Relevance gap in management is Unbridegeable. Journal of Managment Studies, 46(3), 516–533. Lawler, E. E. (2007). Why HR practices are not evidence based. Academy of Management Journal, 50(5), 1033–1036. Lawler, E. E., & Boudreau, J. W. (2012). Effective human resource management. People and Strategy, 35(2), 58. Legge, K. (1995). What is human resource management? In K. Legge (Ed.), Human resource management (pp. 62–95). London: Macmillan Education. Lyons, D. (2016). Congratulations! You've been fired. The New York Times, 1–4 Retrieved from https://www.nytimes.com/2016/04/10/opinion/sunday/con-
gratulations-youve-been-fired.html?_r=0. Magee, J. C., & Galinsky, A. D. (2008). Social hierarchy: The self-reinforcing nature of power and status. Academy of Management Annals, 2(1), 351–398. Martin, G. P., Wiseman, R. M., & Gomez-Mejia, L. R. (2015). Going short-term or long-term? CEO stock options and temporal orientation in the presence of slack.
Strategic Management Journal. Advanced online publication http://dx.doi.org/10.1002/smj.2445. Marx, E. (2002). How to measure the mind: Viewpoint Elizabeth Marx. Financial Times, London, March 26th. McGovern, P., Gratton, L., Hope-Hailey, V., Stiles, P., & Truss, C. (1997). Human resource management on the line? Human Resource Management Journal, 7(4), 12–29. Miles, R. E., & Snow, C. C. (1984). Designing strategic human resources systems. Organizational Dynamics, 13(1), 36–52. Mintzberg, H. (1985). The organization as political arena. Journal of Management Studies, 22(2), 133–154. Nasar, S., Solow, R., Dertouzos, M., & Lester, R. (1989). Short time horizons, mad in America. Report on MITs commission on industrial productivity (pp. 1–340). . Newcomer, E. (2017). Uber investigating sexual discrimination claims by ex-engineer. Bloomberg Technology(February 20), Retrieved from https://www.bloomberg.
com/news/articles/2017-02-20/uber-investigating-sexual-discrimination-claims-by-ex-engineer. Nickerson, R. S. (1998). Confirmation bias: A ubiquitous phenomenon in many guises. Review of General Psychology, 2(2), 175. Patterson, P. (1995). Choice criteria in final selection of a management consultancy service. Journal of Professional Services Marketing, 11(2), 177–187. Peccei, R., & Van De Voorde, K. (2016). The application of the multilevel paradigm in human resource management–outcomes research: Taking stock and going
forward. Journal of Management (Advance online publication. 0149206316673720). Pfeffer, J. (1998). The human equation. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. Pfeffer, J. (2016). Why ‘modern’ work culture makes people so miserable. Fortune, 1–6. Retrieved from http://fortune.com/2016/04/12/modern-work-culture/. Pfeffer, J., & Cohen, Y. (1984). Determinants of internal labor markets in organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 550–572. Pfeffer, J., & Sutton, R. I. (2006). Evidence-based management. Harvard Business Review, 84(1), 62. Pfeffer, J., & Veiga, J. F. (1999). Putting people first for organizational success. Academy of Management Perspectives, 13(2), 37–48. Piening, E. P., Baluch, A. M., & Ridder, H. G. (2014). Mind the intended-implemented gap: Understanding employees' perceptions of HRM. Human Resource
Management, 53(4), 545–567. Poole, M., & Mansfield, R. (1994). Managers' attitudes to HRM: Rhetoric and reality. In P. Blyton, & P. Turnbull (Eds.), Reassessing HRM (pp. 200–214). London: Sage. Porter, K., Smith, P., & Fagg, R. (2007). Leadership and management for HR professionals. Oxford: Routledge. Posthuma, R. A., Campion, M. C., Masimova, M., & Campion, M. A. (2013). A high performance work practices taxonomy: Integrating the literature and directing
future research. Journal of Management, 39(5), 1184–1220. Purcell, J., & Hutchinson, S. (2007). Front-line managers as agents in the HRM-performance causal chain: Theory, analysis and evidence. Human Resource Management
Journal, 17(1), 3–20. Rynes, S. L. (2012). The research-practice gap in I/O Psychology and related fields: Challenges and potential solutions. In S. W. J. Kozlowski (Vol. Ed.), The Oxford
Handbook of Organizational Psychology. Vol. 1, (pp. 409–452). Oxford: Oxford University Press. Rynes, S. L., Colbert, A. E., & Brown, K. G. (2002). HR professionals' beliefs about effective human resource practices: Correspondence between research and practice.
Human Resource Management, 41(2), 149–174. Rynes, S. L., Giluk, T. L., & Brown, K. G. (2007). The very separate worlds of academic and practitioner periodicals in human resource management: Implications for
evidence-based management. Academy of Management Journal, 50(5), 987–1008. Sanders, K., & Frenkel, S. (2011). HR-line management relations: Characteristics and effects. The International Journal of Human Resource Management, 22(8),
1611–1617. Saridakis, G., Lai, Y., & Cooper, C. L. (2016). Exploring the relationship between HRM and firm performance: A meta-analysis of longitudinal studies. Human Resource
Management Review. Advanced online publication http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.hrmr.2016.09.005. Sheehan, C., Cieri, H. D., & Cooper, B. (2014). Exploring the power dimensions of the human resource function. Human Resource Management Journal, 24(2), 193–210. Sikora, D. M., & Ferris, G. R. (2014). Strategic human resource practice implementation: The critical role of line management. Human Resource Management Review,
24(3), 271–281. Sikora, D. M., Ferris, G. R., & Van Iddekinge, C. H. (2015). Line manager implementation perceptions as a mediator of relations between high-performance work
practices and employee outcomes. Journal of Applied Psychology, 100(6), 1908–1918. Simons, T. (2002). Behavioral integrity : The perceived alignment between managers' words and deeds as a research focus. Organization Science, 13(1), 18–35. Simons, T., Leroy, H., Collewaert, V., & Butler, E. N. (2015). How leader alignment of words and deeds affects followers: A meta-analysis of behavioral integrity
research. Journal of Business Ethics, 132(4), 831–844. Skinner, W. (1981). Big hat, no cattle: Managing human resources. Harvard Business Review, 59(5), 106–114. Society of Human Resource Management (2016). SHRM Certification. Retrieved from https://www.shrm.org/certification/pages/default.aspx. Stamp, G., & Stamp, C. (1993). Wellbeing at work: Aligning purposes, people, strategies and structures. International Journal of Career Management, 5(3), 1–36. Tamkin, P. (2004). High performance work practices. Institute for Employment Studies1–16. Taylor, P., Keelty, Y., & McDonnell, B. (2002). Evolving personnel selection practices in New Zealand organisations and recruitment firms. New Zealand Journal of
Psychology, 31(1), 8. Terpstra, D. E., & Limpaphayom, W. (2012). Using evidence-based human resource practices for global competitiveness. International Journal of Business and
Management, 7(12), 107. Townley, B. (1993). Foucault, power/knowledge, and its relevance for human resource management. Academy of Management Review, 18(3), 518–546. Ulrich, D., & Brockbank, W. (2005). The HR value proposition. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. Ulrich, D., Brockbank, W., Johnson, D., & Younger, J. (2007). Human resource competencies: Responding to increased expectations. Employment Relations Today,
34(3), 1–12. Ulrich, D., Younger, J., Brockbank, W., & Ulrich, M. D. (2013). The state of the HR profession. Human Resource Management, 52(3), 457–471. Van der Zee, K. I., Bakker, A. B., & Bakker, P. (2002). Why are structured interviews so rarely used in personnel selection? The Journal of Applied Psychology, 87(1),
176–184. Vaughan, E. (1994). The trial between sense and sentiment: A reflection on the language of HRM. Journal of General Management, 19(3), 20–32. Vroom, V. (1964). Expectancy theory. New York: John Wiley. Walshe, K., & Rundall, T. G. (2001). Evidence-based management: From theory to practice in health care. Milbank Quarterly, 79, 429–457. Walton, R. E. (1985). From control to commitment in the workplace. Harvard Business Review, 77–85. van Wanrooy, B., Bewley, H., Bryson, A., Forth, J., Freeth, S., Stokes, L., & Wood, S. (2013). The 2011 workplace employment relations study first findings. Centre for
workplace leadership. Retrieved from http://cep.lse.ac.uk/seminarpapers/05-02-13-BRY.pdf. Watson, S., Maxwell, G. A., & Farquharson, L. (2007). Line managers' views on adopting human resource roles: The case of Hilton (UK) hotels. Employee Relations,
29(1), 30–49. Wenger, E., McDermott, R. A., & Snyder, W. (2002). Cultivating communities of practice: A guide to managing knowledge. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business Press. Wilmott, R. (2003). Education policy and realist social theory: Primary teachers, child-centred philosophy and the new managerialism. Oxford: Routledge. Woodrow, C., & Guest, D. E. (2014). When good HR gets bad results: Exploring the challenge of HR implementation in the case of workplace bullying. Human Resource
Management Journal, 24(1), 38–56. Wright, P. M., & McMahan, G. C. (1992). Theoretical perspectives for strategic human resource management. Journal of Management, 18(2), 295–320. Yukl, G., & Tracey, J. B. (1992). Consequences of influence tactics used with subordinates, peers, and the boss. Journal of Applied Psychology, 77(4), 525–535.
C. Gill
- Don't know, don't care: An exploration of evidence based knowledge and practice in human resource management
- Introduction
- Causes of low evidence based management in HRM: a review of extant literature
- Additional explanations for HRM practitioners' failure to implement evidence based management
- Inherent contradictions in HRM: developmental humanism versus utilitarian instrumentalism
- Evidence based management in HRM: High Performance Work Practices
- Management has a utilitarian instrumental value orientation
- HRM's power to implement evidence based management is limited
- HRM has a utilitarian instrumentalism value proposition
- Explanatory model for HRM's implementation of evidence based management
- Boundary conditions that may influence the model
- Discussion and conclusion
- Practical implications
- References
Lesson for LO1 (25.11.21).pptx
Tonight a look at LO1
Understand strategies for effective critical thinking and decision-making;
The concept of evidence based practice and how this can be used to support decision making for people and organisational issues
Macro and micro analysis tools research activity
The principle of Critical thinking
Ethical theory/perspectives and how these inform and influence decision making
1
1.1 The concept of evidence based practice and how this can be used to support decision making for people and organisational issues
The application of EBP;
Effective selection of evidence
Effective analysis of situations and issues
Critical review of theory, propositions and opinion
Assessing evidence form a variety of courses
Identifying bias
Forming judgements and conclusion
Developing and testing out own arguments and conclusions
2
Concept
Effective thinking
Critical thinking and analysis in decision making
PODCAST TIME
Fads, anecdotes, fake news and gut instinct aren't reliable tools for HR practitioners.
In this episode we explore evidence-based practice and discuss what it is, how it works, and why it's important for people professionals.
Read this 'In a Nutshell' article by Edward Houghton
What helps repair decision bias?
What are the three evidence-based decision-making processes?
(30 mins)
Factsheet
Task: Evaluate how EBP can be used to supprt decision-making and judgements in HR for a range of people and organisational issues.
(Evaluate = what can you determine from your appraisal of the resources? For example the significance, worth, of EBP) (20 mins)
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/strategy/analytics/evidence-based-practice-factsheet
For example, you can say: “Firstly, the essay will evaluate the product based on an objective criteria. This criteria will include its value for money, fit for purpose and ease of use. Next, the essay will show the main strengths and weaknesses of the product.
6.30pm
5
Resources on HE Moodle
In their report Evidence-based management: the basic principles, Barends, Rousseau and Briner of the Center for Evidence-Based Management (CEBMa) outline the challenge of biased and unreliable management decisions.
They show that it’s common in decision-making for popular ideas of management, and personal experience which is highly susceptible to errors and bias, to be prioritised ahead of sound, critically-appraised evidence. They argue that individuals at all levels of employment have a moral obligation to use the best available evidence when making important decisions.
7.00pm
6
1.2 Macro and micro analysis tools research activity
Fishbone analysis - Cause and effect
Activity choose one tool and evaluate how it can be used to diagnose future issues, challenges and opportunities? (15 mins)
Look up CMI & CIPD resources
Linkedin article: https://www.linkedin.com/pulse/micro-macro-environment-factors-analyzed-companies-bobin-philip
Micro environment refers to the environment which is in direct contact with company and affects the routine activities of business straight away. It is a collection of forces or factors that are close to the organization and can influence the performance as well as the day to day activities of the firm.
The important elements of the micro environment of an organization are
Customers and Consumers.
Competitors.
Organization.
Market.
Suppliers.
Intermediaries
The environment which is not specific to a particular firm but can influence the working of all the business groups is known as Macro Environment. ... Conversely, PESTLE Analysis is a study of the macro environment.
Others mentioned in specification:
Interviews
Observations
Work sampling is a research technique where workers are observed at random times and their activities recorded. The data collected can be converted to percentages indicating the overall distribution of how their time is spent in various categories.
Examination of organsation metrics
Comparison with sector matrix
7
Porters five forces
The five forces identified by Porter as shown in the diagram on the right are:
The entry into the market of new competitors
The threat of substitutes – similar competing products
The bargaining power of buyers or customers
The bargaining power of suppliers
The level of competition from existing competitors (competitive rivaly)
Working in the 1980s, Michael E Porter identified five factors affecting the competitive position of a company. He argued that a company that wishes to improve its performance must take account of these five forces, before it can make a decision as to the best strategy for future success.
How can this help me?
Porter’s model is designed to help companies choose the most promising strategy for their business. It does this by focusing attention on the competitive forces at work in the wider industry scene, not just the company’s internal resources and operational efficiency. In the 1980s, Porter identified three generic strategies: competing on price; differentiating products and services by offering something not offered by competitors, or focusing on a niche market; later he went on to consider the role of diversification as a strategy and the impact of the Internet. But he stresses that it is not enough just to gather information. Companies need to ask themselves how they can use competitive forces to their advantage and rewrite the rules of the industry.
8
Kurt Lewin’s Force Field Analysis
is a useful way of representing in a graphic form the factors that will support or act as obstacles to a proposed change, in any situation.
A force field analysis diagram is usually composed of a line or block representing the proposed change, and two sets of arrows on either side of the line or block. The arrows represent forces driving the need for change and forces that will be resistant to its enactment or implementation.
The arrows are usually numbered or lettered to match users’ listings of factors that will drive or be resistant to the changes being considered. So, for example, if the proposed change is implementing a new IT system, the force field analysis might identify forces driving change as:
1, better service;
2, greater efficiency;
3, increased capacity;
4, improved performance;
5, better appearance; and
6, better information reports. Forces resisting change could be:
7, staff time for implementation;
8, need for training;
9, high costs;
10, service disruption;
11, staff fears of new technology; and
12, environmental impacts. Arrows can be lengthened or shortened to show the relative strength of whichever forces they represent.
How can this help?
Identifying and setting out the key forces for and against change in a given situation in a graphic force field analysis format gives a full overview of the situation. This makes the situation clearer, stimulates discussion and thought, and provides an analytic tool for considering how forces for change might be intensified, or resistant forces might be weakened or reduced. Force field analysis is often used to support decision making when changes are being planned or implemented.
9
Ansoff's matrix
Market penetration: Existing products are marketed to existing customers. This means increasing revenue by, for example, promoting the product or repositioning the brand. The product is not altered and we do not seek new customers.
Market development: An existing product range is marketed in a new market. The product remains the same but is marketed to a new audience.
Product development: The business aims to introduce new products into existing markets. This strategy may require the development of new competencies and requires the business to develop modified products which can appeal to existing markets.
Diversification: The business branches out into new markets and introduces new products into these markets. This strategy carries more risk as the business is moving into markets in which it may have little or no experience. To adopt a diversification strategy a business needs to have a clear idea about what it expects to gain and an honest assessment of the risks.
The matrix allows marketers to consider ways to grow the business via existing and/or new products, in existing and/or new markets – there are four possible product/market combinations. This matrix helps companies decide what course of action should be taken given current performance. The matrix consists of four strategies:
How can this help?
The matrix is a framework to explore directions for strategic growth. It is the most commonly used model for analysing the possible strategic direction that a business should take. It identifies and analyses different growth opportunities and encourages planners to consider both unexpected returns and risks.
10
The 7S model was introduced by McKinsey consultants Tom Peters and Robert H Waterman in their 1982 book ‘In Search of Excellence’.
Peters and Waterman were keen to find out what makes organisations successful and started by exploring the relationship between strategy and structure. Based on the results of their research carried out during the 1970s, they came to the conclusion that no single factor determines success but that a number of different factors play key roles.
The diagram shows how the factors interact and highlights the need to align all seven factors across an organisation. Shared values are placed in the middle to show how the overarching purpose of the organisation affects all the other elements.
How can this help?
Peters and Waterman suggested that many strategies fail because of a failure to pay attention to some of the factors during the implementation process, especially the ‘soft’ ones. The 7S framework can help organisations to assess how well they are positioned for competitive advantage and growth. It can be used to identify where better alignment and coordination are needed and to anticipate what future adjustments may be needed in the light of change in the external business environment. Situations where the framework may be useful include: restructuring programmes, mergers, changes in leadership and the introduction of new systems.
11
1.3 Principles of critical thinking
Critical thinking…
Objective rationale thinking and reasoned argument
Questioning and checking validity of sources and validity of evidence
Awareness of bias
How do you apply these yourself when relating your own and other’s ideas to assist objective and rationale debate?
8pm
12
Podcast time
https://www.cipd.co.uk/podcasts/critical-thinking
Date: 05/11/19 | Duration: 00:21:35
Critical thinking is a key skill for HR and all people professionals - it's the ability think well and to reflect objectively on the ideas, opinions and arguments of others. It can help us solve complex problems and make better decisions, bringing clarity to confusion and increasing our potential to succeed when others look to us and our teams for answers that work.
13
Principles of Critical Thinking:
Gather complete information.
Understand and define all terms.
Question the methods by which the facts are derived.
Question the conclusions.
Look for hidden assumptions and biases.
Question the source of facts.
Don't expect all of the answers.
Examine the big picture.
How do you apply these yourself when relating to your own and other’s ideas to assist with an objective and rationale debate? (10mins)
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HnJ1bqXUnIM
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HnJ1bqXUnIM
Discuss with class points on slide
Howto apply to own and others’ideas:
comparing ‘like with like’and recognising different methodologies, approaches and contexts;
ensuring clarity of terminology and differentiating between fact and opinion;
awareness of personal agendas and ‘fake news’, not taking information at ‘facevalue’;
managing ambiguity and complexity of information;
triangulation and testing out of conclusions.
14
1.4 Ethical perspectives and how these inform and influence decision making
Choose two perspectives to assess;
ethical values such as democracy, fairness, equality etc
Discuss how can these inform and influence effective decision making?
Utilitarianism video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-FrZl22_79Q
3 Principles
Pleasure or Happiness Is the Only Thing That Truly Has Intrinsic Value. ...
Actions Are Right Insofar as They Promote Happiness, Wrong Insofar as They Produce Unhappiness. ...
Everyone's Happiness Counts Equally
When individuals are deciding what to do for themselves alone, they consider only their own utility. For example, if you are choosing ice cream for yourself, the utilitarian view is that you should choose the flavor that will give you the most pleasure
A limitation of utilitarianism is that it tends to create a black-and-white construct of morality. ... You can't assign a value to an amount of pleasure.
Utilitarianism also cannot predict with certainty whether the consequences of our actions will be good or bad—the results of our actions happen in the future.
Deontology is a theory that suggests actions are good or bad according to a clear set of rules. Its name comes from the Greek word deon, meaning duty. Actions that obey these rules are ethical, while actions that do not, are not. his ethical theory is most closely associated with German philosopher, Immanuel Kant.
Deontology states that an act that is not good morally can lead to something good, such as shooting the intruder (killing is wrong) to protect your family (protecting them is right). ... In our example, that means protecting your family is the rational thing to do—even if it is not the morally best thing to do
Deontological ethics is an ethics system that judges whether an action is right or wrong based on a moral code. ... In the other hand, utilitarian ethics state that a course of action should be taken by considering the most positive outcome.
Altruism is the unselfish concern for other people—doing things simply out of a desire to help, not because you feel obligated to out of duty, loyalty, or religious reasons. It involves acting out of concern for the well-being of other people
Altruism refers to behavior that benefits another individual at a cost to oneself. For example, giving your lunch away is altruistic because it helps someone who is hungry, but at a cost of being hungry yourself
Assess: In the case of 'assess' question words, you are expected to consider or make an informed judgement about the value, strengths or weakness of an argument, claim or topic. 'Assess' questions place particular emphasis on weighing all views concerning the essay subject, as opposed to your opinion only
How they influence decision-making: examples of ethical dilemmas and outcomes and the underlying rationales; examples of how different perspectives might result in certain decisions, for exampleutilitarianism, deontology, the impact of religious and personal beliefs on workplace decision-making. Different approaches to dealing with capability and performance issues based on ethical values, compassionate and punitive responses to work issues.How ethics can impact on management and leadership styles and consequently on organisation culture.
15
Look up and read report
Which lenses do you relate to most and why?
https://www.cipd.co.uk/knowledge/culture/ethics/workplace-decisions-report
16
Recommend
https://peopleprofession.cipd.org/learning/ethical-practice
17
Homework
https://peopleprofession.cipd.org/learning/ethical-practice/making-responsible-decisions
This lesson discusses the circumstances involved in an ethical dilemma. It will help you to consider a range of perspectives, so that you can make responsible decisions as a result
18
Homework
CIPD Lesson 2 Making Resonsible Decisions
Access further resources on HE Moodle
Begin briefing paper covering LO1
19
the-changing-contours-of-fairness_2013-individual-organisation-perspectives_tcm18-9566.pdf
Can we match individual and organisational perspectives?
Research report November 2013
WORKFORCEWORK WORKPLACE
The changing contours of fairness:
in partnership with
Championing better work and working lives
The CIPD’s purpose is to champion better work and working lives by improving practices in people and organisation development, for the benefit of individuals, businesses, economies and society. Our research work plays a critical role – providing the content and credibility for us to drive practice, raise standards and offer advice, guidance and practical support to the profession. Our research also informs our advocacy and engagement with policy-makers and other opinion-formers on behalf of the profession we represent.
To increase our impact, in service of our purpose, we’re focusing our research agenda on three core themes: the future of work, the diverse and changing nature of the workforce, and the culture and organisation of the workplace.
About us
The CIPD is the professional body for HR and people development. We have over 130,000 members internationally – working in HR, learning and development, people management and consulting across private businesses and organisations in the public and voluntary sectors. We are an independent and not-for-profit organisation, guided in our work by the evidence and the front-line experience of our members.
WORK Our focus on work includes what work is and where, when and how work takes place, as well as trends and changes in skills and job needs, changing career patterns, global mobility, technological developments and new ways of working.
WORKPLACE Our focus on the workplace includes how organisations are evolving and adapting, understanding of culture, trust and engagement, and how people are best organised, developed, managed, motivated and rewarded to perform at their best.
WORKFORCE Our focus on the workforce includes demographics, generational shifts, attitudes and expectations, the
changing skills base and trends in learning and education.
1 The changing contours of fairness
The changing contours of fairness: can we match individual and organisational perspectives?
Contents
About this research 2
Introduction 3
Survey findings on fairness from the CIPD Employee Outlook survey 5
What’s in a word? 6
Fairness in an evolving employment relationship 7
Mapping the contours of fairness – synthesising six core fairness ‘lenses’ 9
Lens 1: Fairness as organisational justice 10
Lens 2: Fairness as the socially just distribution of goods 12
Lens 3: Fairness as the principles of outcome 14
Lens 4: Fairness as capability 16
Lens 5: Fairness as a temporal perspective 18
Lens 6: Fairness as a matter of interpretation 20
Conclusion 22
Appendices 1–6 24
References 29
The report was written by Paul Sparrow, Wilson Wong, Lilian Otaye and Stephen Bevan
© CIPD,CPHR,TWF 2013
Acknowledgements We are very grateful to Dr Steven Chase, Dr Sam Clark, Professor Helen Francis and Dr Claire Stone for their detailed comments on earlier versions of this report. We would like to thank Professor Sharon Bolton, Dr Kay Greasley, Professor Graeme Martin, Professor Andrew Sayer, Dr Sabina Siebert and Professor Mike West for comments on the early conceptual analysis. We also thank all those who participated in our conceptual workshops during the summer: Mr David Child, Dr David Darton, Ms Rose Devaney, Ms Sue Ferns, Dr Linda Holbeche, Mr Laurence Hopkins, Ms Karen Jochelson, Mr Jonathan Ling, Professor David Miller, Mr Dean Morley, Mr Gavin Peacock, Dr John Philpott, Professor Jacqueline O’Reilly, Ms Jane Sullivan and Mr Paul Szumilewicz. Thank you to Mr Julian Burton of Delta 7 for Juggling Fairness (see adapted figure 1).
2 The changing contours of fairness
This research project is a collaboration between the Centre for Performance-led HR, The Work Foundation and the Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development (CIPD). This opening report has been funded by the CIPD and is part of a three-year research programme.
The CIPD is the professional body for HR and people development. It has over 130,000 members internationally – working in HR, learning and development, people management and consulting across private businesses and organisations in the public and voluntary sectors. The CIPD is an independent and not-for-profit organisation, guided in our work by the evidence and the front-line experience of practitioner members.
The Centre for Performance- led HR at Lancaster University Management School is a problem- based research group that brings together world-class academic experts to work with HR directors on the most pressing issues facing senior HR specialists.
The Work Foundation – part of Lancaster University – is a leading provider of research-based analysis, knowledge exchange and policy advice in the UK and beyond. Its independent research focuses on innovation and economic change, the role of cities, labour market disadvantage, health and well-being at work and how organisational change can promote good work.
The research methodology comprises two elements. First, we report on some findings from the Employee Outlook. This survey is administered to a subset of the YouGov Plc UK panel of more than 285,000 individuals who have agreed to take part in surveys. The sample of 2,067 respondents has been selected and weighted to be representative of the UK workforce in relation to sector (private, public, voluntary) and size, industry type and full-time/part-time working by gender. The sample profile is normally derived from census data or, if not available from the census, from industry-accepted data.
Second, we have conducted a literature review searching for articles in the ABI Inform database, using search phrases of ‘fairness’, ‘work’ and ‘theory’. We selected articles that were based on either some form of empirical observation or conceptual development. We have then examined sources that present or interpret the main theories involved. We ran two workshops, one involving academics and the other policy experts, to test the conceptual framework that we have developed.
About this research
3 The changing contours of fairness
Introduction
Who should read this report? Those who see the following questions as important:
• As an organisation, are you trying to be seen as fair and responsible, trying to find the best way of understanding a way forward, but finding it difficult to do the right thing?
• Do you believe that if employees, consumers and other stakeholders perceive significant unfairness, there will be a price to pay?
• As an employee, or consumer, or citizen, do you feel that organisations and institutions do not seem to understand what fairness really means and looks like?
• As a policy-maker, do you wish that others would understand how complex the issues you are dealing with really are, and what you are trying to achieve?
The CIPD, Centre for Performance- led HR and The Work Foundation have collaborated to map out what we call the ‘contours of fairness’ by reviewing the academic literature on fairness, justice, equity and equality. This report highlights the initial findings from that review.
In the second year of this three- year programme, we will be testing the report findings with a fairness survey instrument, and then further refining the model with qualitative data in the third year.
The aim is to deliver a credible fairness framework that we hope will lead to a richer, constructive conversation between organisations and their employees, managers and their reports, and a more mature
employment relationship: one that has a better balance between language and numbers as ‘evidence’ and a relationship built on greater clarity of the employment deal; one that is more resilient and sustainable in times of turbulence.
Why is it important to do this? The Level Playing Field Institute (LPFI) (2007) and The Center for Survey Research’s (CSR) study estimated that unfairness in the workplace costs US employers an estimated $64 billion each year. That eye-watering figure was computed by estimating the number of Fortune 500 staff who left their employer because of unfair treatment (estimation based on a review of studies on discrimination, harassment and bullying) and the cost of replacing them. It also estimates the disengagement and fall in productivity of those who choose to ignore the unfair treatment or to deal with it themselves. To support their model, the LPFI-CSR study sampled 400 employers and 2,435 employees across the US exploring a broad spectrum of issues including workplace fairness (for example pay, internal procedures), fitting in (for example respect, managerial behaviours), stereotyping (for example exploring race, gender and sexual orientation) and job advancement (for example quality of assignments, access to opportunities/promotions).
There is a growing body of evidence suggesting that organisations that treat their employees with fairness, integrity and sensitivity are more likely to find that those employees respond with increased commitment and
‘Evidence suggests that organisations that treat their employees with fairness, integrity and sensitivity are more likely to find that those employees respond with increased commitment and productivity.’
4 The changing contours of fairness
productivity (Senge 2006). As organisational leaders incorporate insights about justice and fairness in dealing with employees in the global marketplace, their understanding of how employees think will impact organisational effectiveness, profitability and long- term wealth-creation.
We see the operation of fairness right across the organisation. At a strategic level, chief executive officers, boards, the senior leadership talent, investors and other stakeholders ask questions about the sustainability of an organisation’s values, the viability of its business models over the long term, the credibility and trust to be placed in its leadership, and its fairness to its suppliers, customers, shareholders and investors. Functions such as HR, marketing and logistics deal with fairness at a more tactical level. They have to think about how fairness impacts the organisation and employer brand, corporate reputation, the authenticity of its value proposition or employee voice. And at an operational level, line managers, operational managers and those involved with quality assurance, health and safety have to cope with the impact that ‘fairness’ will have on employee engagement, the delivery of service, impact on quality, standards, health and safety, strikes and breaks in service delivery. Line managers are also instrumental in workplace climate creation, including perceptions of fairness.
Meanwhile, we are living through a period where substantial transfers of risk are taking place – we see the transfer of responsibility and accountability between markets, states, organisations and individuals. Questions of fairness are becoming more complex as we consider the future of work, with issues such as pension provision, questions about reward adequacy or excessiveness, zero-hours contracts, quality of careers across age groups, the global sourcing of work, and social mobility hitting the headlines daily. We know that all of these issues have different impacts across generational groups. We know that we can break the workforce up in other novel and interesting ways to find common but different needs, attitudes and behaviours – called employee segments. Do they perceive fairness in the same way?
Independent of the immediate context of austerity in much of the developed West, these questions are shaping the employment relationship, introducing more varied societal conversations. These conversations are about risk and responsibility, justice and fairness. Within organisations we see conversations about how the current stagnating and shrinking cake should be distributed, and the role of employers in addressing unemployment, low pay, falling standards of living, the legacy to future generations and the sustainability of a future based on continuous economic growth.
We face ever more complex judgements as to what is ‘fair’:
• It is no longer possible to ignore the impact of hitherto ‘business- as-usual’ corporate decisions on the employees, such as tax planning.
• People make judgements not just as employees, but as consumers, parents and citizens.
• Information and communication technologies, the ubiquity of data, and the power of social media mean it has never been easier to organise and focus opinions and special interests.
• There are societal debates about whether certain practices at work will have a negative effect on employee behaviour.
• There is increasing transparency around what happens inside organisations.
• There is more vociferous social judgement.
These all highlight apparently irresolvable and conflicting views of fairness. Making the wrong judgement seems to have more and more consequence – we debate the well-being of whole nations and societies, and not just that of our own organisation or personal career.
5 The changing contours of fairness
Survey findings on fairness from the CIPD Employee Outlook survey ‘The data hardly supports a picture of perceived fairness at work. Before we get to the deeper questions, most employees perceive a wall of unfairness in their everyday experiences.’
Fairness is clearly an issue for employees at the moment. We begin with some headline findings from our survey research. We asked a number of questions about fairness of a nationally representative sample of 2,067 employees in the spring 2013 CIPD Employee Outlook survey. When asked ‘have you encountered anything in the workplace or your professional life that you thought was particularly unfair in the past 12 months?’ a staggering 41% said
yes. Fifty-nine per cent believe that the rules and agreed procedures are not applied consistently by decision- makers, 49% believe that rewards are not distributed fairly. Forty-eight per cent feel that resources are not distributed fairly. Forty-nine per cent feel that the basis for policies designed to make decisions ‘fairer’ are not clear to most of the employees affected. Sixty-four per cent feel there is a lack of consultation among those who will
be affected by the implementation of decisions.
We gathered 925 qualitative comments about fairness and 333 self-reported experiences of unfairness at work. We analysed the reported experiences to understand what the triggers of ‘unfairness’ are (see Table 1). The list is long, and the issues involved are many and more complex than this initial content analysis can address.
Table 1: What do employees see as unfair?
Triggers of unfairness Percentage of ‘unfair’ events
Pay (freeze, long hours, senior management pay/bonuses, differences in pay) 20
Workload (distribution) 11
Bullying/victimisation/harassment 11
Favouritism 10
Forced redundancy/redundancy procedures 10
Promotion decisions 8
Flexible work (as it relates to task, time, and so on) 4
Performance review system/appraisal 4
Pension decisions/schemes 4
Changes to employment terms and conditions 3
Age/gender/disability discrimination 3
Unfair dismissal 2
Respect 2
Lack of voice 2
Disciplinary procedures/actions 1
Work hours 1
Job downgrades with larger role size 1
Reward system 1
6 The changing contours of fairness
What’s in a word? We often use a ‘shorthand’ for the word ‘fair’ and talk about ‘doing the right thing’ – a catch-all that can hide many a wrong action.
But what do employees mean when they say things are ‘unfair’? Technically, fairness is a relationship between people, or between people and the organisations or institutions they create. Managing this relationship demands an appreciation by both parties of what constitutes a ‘fair’ deal if the relationship is to thrive. People may disagree about whether something is fair or not – they may see it differently – but that is not necessarily the same as the situation actually being fair or unfair. So, HR professionals face two problems:
• Their actions may be good for some people but bad for others.
• Some actions which are required by certain duties or rights may still harm (in a general sense) some people.
Trying to unravel what ‘fairness’ is, or thinking of ways to better manage it, takes us into a conceptual minefield! We need the reader to accept this, stick with the topic, reflect and move onto each section of the report.
Philosophers remind us that it is very controversial to equate fairness with justice, or either of these with moral rightness. Yet we all use several everyday words to mean the same as fairness – equitable, impartial, unprejudiced, unbiased, objective and dispassionate. And in practice we make a distinction between what seems equitable (or just), and what might in a more philosophical sense be seen as fair. For example, HR might have to find ways of rationing out flexible
work hours. Whatever solution is arrived at may be perceived to be fair to some but unfair to others, so we fall back on what is the most ‘reasonable’ solution, which is to have some kind of equitable (impartial and just) decision process – fair to all parties in that it is dictated by reason, conscience and conformity to legitimate rules or standards. But then by fairness, do we also mean ethical? Ethical and fair are different things. Ethics are a set of moral principles for a class of human actions (in this report, actions at work). They reflect the rules of human conduct, or the values relating to that conduct. We judge the rightness and wrongness of actions and the goodness or badness of motives on the basis of ethics. By this we also raise issues of trust, respect, need, freedom and well-being.
‘Trying to unravel what ‘fairness’ is, or thinking of ways to better manage it, takes us into a conceptual minefield!’
7 The changing contours of fairness
Fairness in an evolving employment relationship ‘We have to acknowledge the fluid nature of judgements about fairness. Context is everything.’
Look to Figure 1 and its image of someone having to juggle more and more balls in the air. Reflect on your present-day practice as managers of people.
There was a time when managers and leaders (thought they) knew which balls they needed to keep in the air. Each was discrete, behaved predictably and was controllable because they were deemed important by the leadership and traditionally regarded as such. Employees, by and large, lacked the
information to challenge the status quo. Managers and leaders could make situational judgements as best they could and treated each ball separately. There were only a few balls to juggle.
But now the external drivers constantly shift the ground upon which decisions are made. The issues have got more complex and this triggers more complex reactions both by organisations and individuals – and the HR professional is in the middle of this.
There is a greater access to information and emphasis on transparency in governance arrangements. There is an expectation by employees that they be consulted on decisions that affect them. The balls are no longer just defined by management: more balls are being thrown into the ring. They are coming fast and furious from employees, suppliers, regulators, investors, politicians and society at large. All expect a say in the organisation.
Figure 1: Juggling Fairness
Which Fairness Lens could I use now?
How do I decide when...
WAR FOR TALENT
HR DILEMMAS
COST CUTTING
FAIRER SOCIETY EXE
CUT IVE
PAY
SUCCESSI ON
ROI
PENSIONSZ ERO
-HO UR
CON TRA
CTS
WAR FOR TALENT
PENSIONS
COST CUTTING
FAIRER SOCIETY
FAIRER PAY CSR
W e n
ee d n
ew len
ses
...the ground keeps shifting!
8 The changing contours of fairness
You are constantly surprised:
• Where did this new ball come from?
• How does it work? • Where does it fit? • Can our managers be expected
to keep an eye on all the balls – keep them all in the air – while new ones are being added to the process?
• Is it all becoming blurred? • Can we drop something, or
will that be the proverbial time bomb that wipes out all our previous good work?
The expectations on both sides of the employment deal are now more complex. Organisations are no longer happy to have standard 9 to 5 arrangements. They expect employees to engage
with the organisation and to have a more effective and collaborative relationship, that is, to do a lot more and deliver value over and above that which is definable in a job description. They say they want to encourage greater co-creation of value with employees. They see different employee segments in their workforce and treat each segment as an internal market, each with their particular needs. They realise that they need to engage the whole person – they have to engage their employees as parents, as consumers, as citizens. But this engagement enterprise also brings a shift in power. By engaging the whole person, organisations have sanctioned the inclusion of much more varied frames of reference to the employment deal. All of this matters.
‘Organisations realise that they need to engage the whole person – they have to engage their employees as parents, as consumers, as citizens.’
9 The changing contours of fairness
Mapping the contours of fairness – synthesising six core fairness ‘lenses’ ‘Relying on skilled people to keep juggling balls is not a sustainable strategy. We need now to map the contours of fairness – to provide some structure and evidence into the debate.’
When talking to another expert around issues such as pay, corporate social responsibility, reputation or equal opportunities, you must ask yourself:
• Where are they coming from? • What assumptions might their
disciplinary background lead them to make?
If we are to advance our management, we need to understand how and why we face
a richer, more complex employer– employee relationship. From the outset we acknowledge that although the announced topic of this report is ‘fairness’, we cannot help but stray a little into the topics of justice, ethics and moral rightness.
Our aim in this report is to develop a roadmap to help shine some more light on the topic. Can we map the contours of fairness in a pragmatic way? We want to give those who manage people some
tools for thinking about the issues they face and will have to manage.
We do this by reviewing the academic literature on fairness, justice, equity and equality. There were numerous frames deployed in various academic disciplines. We have illustrated in Figure 2 the ones that we regard most pertinent to the contours of organisational fairness in its broadest view.
Figure 2: Bringing together the different ideas about fairness
Equity Sensitivity
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice Feminist
and Colonial Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament TheoryLuck and
Due Dessert Outcome
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
10 The changing contours of fairness
The structure of the report reflects Figure 2. We identified what we considered to be different ‘families’ of ideas typically used through which actions might be judged – what we call a different ‘lens’. Each lens reflects a different way in which we might judge fairness at work. We have synthesised the many ideas about ‘fairness’ (the outer ‘petals’ in Figure 2) into six of these ‘lenses’ (the larger ‘petals’).
We believe that each lens can be used to shed light on a range of issues and contexts faced in modern people management. We show the different situations each typically gets used in. We show where it matters, and why it is important. We describe and discuss the management implications of each in turn.
We invite the reader to discover which lenses apply in the situations they are managing, but also to look at the situation through alternative lenses and understand the implications of the different ‘views’ and therefore implications for fairness.
We begin at the centre with what is called organisational justice. We do this purely because of the context of our research. HR professionals are more aware of this space – it features in their professional syllabus – and they are exhorted to apply distributive, procedural and interactional justice in their practice and policies. However, this lens becomes our point of departure, because we realise that it has become much
more complex. When looking at ‘fairness’ we found that all the other lenses surrounding it come into play at some time or another.
We therefore proffer some other ways in which core judgements get coloured, which tend to reflect different levels of analysis that HR directors might not always be thinking about. We strongly recommend that you look first at the summary table for each lens – shown in Appendices 1–6 – and then read the relevant section. In a way, we want to provide everyone with a quick ‘crib sheet’, so they can see where others are coming from.
Then, perhaps, we can engage in the ‘real’ conversations.
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
Lens 1: Fairness as organisational justice
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
11 The changing contours of fairness
The first lens, called organisational justice, is perhaps the most familiar to HR professionals and line managers. Judgements about organisational fairness matter in various aspects of organisational policy and practice formulation (see Appendix 1 for an explanation of this lens).
Where does this perspective seem to matter most? We see it used around the making of management policies such as employee voice and employee engagement. It is used to help formulate key practices such as appraisal and performance management systems. It is used to think about the provision of access to organisational resources, such as career systems, or information.
We use the example of performance appraisals to show how you might need to ‘frame’ what is ‘fair’ or not. Performance appraisal systems are among the most important human resource systems in organisations insofar as they yield decisions integral to various human resource actions and outcomes. Reactions to appraisal and the appraisal process are believed to significantly influence the effectiveness and the overall viability of appraisal systems. Research has noted the inherent problems in many performance appraisal systems as they are implemented (though not necessarily in the way they are designed!). The most important performance appraisal issue faced by organisations is the perceived fairness of the performance review and the performance appraisal system (Bretz et al 1992).
Most employees perceive their performance appraisal system as neither accurate nor fair. Therefore a typical performance evaluation might create fear and rivalry, ruin teamwork, and make people bitter or disengaged. The appraisal process can become a source of extreme dissatisfaction when employees believe the system is biased, political or irrelevant.
The concept of fairness hovers around many actions and reactions that occur in organisations. However, certain distributive, procedural and interactional justice principles can foster perceived fairness in performance appraisal systems. The three primary components of organisational justice, each having to be managed in combination, are:
• Distributive justice – the fairness of allocated outcomes. This is about the problem of how things should be distributed.
• Procedural justice – the fairness of the process used in making outcome allocation decisions. This is about the approach best taken to problems of justice.
• Interactional justice – the quality of the interpersonal treatment people receive when procedures are implemented. This is another way of thinking about the approach taken to the problem of justice.
Using distributive justice to assess the fairness of performance appraisal might involve judgements as to whether the performance ratings meet employees’ expectations, or what sort of evidence the
outcomes should be based on (who says this is good performance and on what evidence?). Similarly, procedural justice can be used to assess the fairness of performance appraisal systems. This can be achieved through consistent soliciting of employees’ input from the development of evaluation standards to the information- gathering and rating process, to providing feedback. Finally, using interactional justice to assess performance appraisal could involve communication and interpersonal treatment, that is, it is important for employees to know how and when they will be evaluated. This will inherently create trust in the organisations and encourage employee engagement.
Performance appraisal is only one example of how the organisational lens can be used in fairness judgements, of course. Other examples include the recruitment and selection, compensation and reward system, and employee engagement.
Why is it important? An individual’s perceptions of decisions as fair or unfair will influence many of their subsequent job attitudes and behaviours at work. It also draws attention to the possible behavioural reactions to unfairness – people may reduce inputs, increase outcomes, elect new referents or decide to leave or exit the situation.
All forms of organisational justice act as a source of trust because they signal to employees that they are respected and valued by their leader or organisation.
12 The changing contours of fairness
Lens 2: Fairness as the socially just distribution of goods
This ‘lens’ is usually applied to concerns on what is called the ‘socially just distribution of goods’. The models that are used justify ‘fairness’ from the field of economics (see Appendix 2). Where does this perspective seem to matter most? It is used in discussions of executive pay (fair pay), bonuses and rewards. It has implications for industrial relations. It is involved in consideration of social policy, such as welfare.
Imagine you are an economist. They typically draw upon different models from their own field or from philosophy. Many of their models assume we are at heart rational and calculating. People’s reactions can be predicted by weighting their expected outcomes and the probability they think of this occurring. There is a distinction of course between rational choice
as an explanation of human behaviour (how we tend to behave in the aggregate), or as a normative account of how humans should behave.
But a utilitarian view would say that the morally right action is the action that maximises total human happiness, impartially considered. But given that human beings have discovered what best protects and promotes some central aspects of happiness, they tend to have developed a system of institutions to ensure justice. Fairness, which is separate from any moral rightness or justice, unless it is merely another name for impartiality, is just a procedural tool that is useful in some contexts. Fairness may simply be judgements made by others about another’s rational calculus – their decision calculus – or the procedures used in the game.
To many economists, rational means maximising the individual chooser’s expected utility. We play to rules depending on how we think the game works, and as long as the rules can be applied, we will accept the outcome as long as it has some subjective benefit to our welfare. Is fairness a matter of ensuring that the protocols maximise the benefit to all the players in a game?
Or are we in practice not so rational? Do we in practice, or should we, behave in more reciprocal ways? The theory of justice, often contrasted with rational choice theory, attempts to describe what is seen as an ideal – normative – standard of justice. Justice is whatever the best procedure results in. In an uncertain world, ‘fairness’ is only what can be justified, not independently calculated.
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
13 The changing contours of fairness
If you are tasked with designing some fair procedures at work – say disciplinary procedures – is the fairest way to ask yourself ‘how would I design this if I knew I was going to be in the worst position my design creates?’ and ‘how would I want this procedure to be set up if I were wrongly accused of a firing offence?’ In the same way that we can design a process for how two people should best slice a cake, if you have the products of social co-operation – wealth, opportunities, rights, powers, freedoms, status – to divide between citizens, is the best solution to ask one of them to split these products into bundles any way they choose, but tell
them that they will get the worst bundle that they make? The just distribution of social goods ends up being a more equal distribution, unless we can show that an unequal distribution improves the absolute position of the worst off (perhaps by incentivising the talented to do things such as becoming doctors, or researching new forms of energy generation).
In any event, this lens argues, this is not how we actually behave. Once we get data beyond a social experiment or hypothetical scenario, do we find that people perceive uncertainties, and react to these in more emotionally
tinged ways? Given high levels of uncertainty, do we behave in ways that are risk-averse? This has been characterised as the ‘Homo reciprocans’ view, that is, it assumes that human beings desire to be co-operative and to improve their environment.
Let’s take the executive bonuses debate. So what is fair pay in today’s corporate world? What is socially just reward, as opposed to what creates imbalanced, dysfunctional or socially harmful incentives? It depends on how you believe people operate. Appendix 2 shows how we can ‘position’ the various stances that people take on the fairness or not of executive bonuses.
Take the problem of ‘fair’ (or ‘envy-free’) division
How can a group of people cut up a cake so that each gets what they consider to be a fair share? Rational choice theory models how individuals act and calculate what they see as being the most practical usefulness – the best utility (people are characterised as ‘Homo economicus’). Game theory looks at rational choice when working in strategic interactions. What are the ways in which people will maximise the utility to themselves in situations where two or more people must make decisions, and where the outcome each person gets depends partly on what the other people do? The well-known strategy for two people is one cuts, the other chooses. How does it work when there are more players? Answer: calculate the best outcome stratagems.
Using a game theory lens: is executive pay being handled fairly?
Executive pay becomes unfair if the rules of the game are not working as they should. Seeing executive pay through a game theory lens might trigger the following questions:
• Do people think that high levels of executive pay might be bearable in a non-zero-sum game (a game where the value of the pie can get bigger, and therefore increases in the size of the pie brought about by one person lead to more pie for everyone, so they can have a particularly large slice of pie)?
• However, in a zero-sum game, the pie is just divided up differently, so one person’s bigger slice means a smaller slice for another. Is the problem that executive pay is sold to people on the grounds that everyone’s pie will get larger, but people believe really that it is a zero-sum game (there are winners and losers, and they are the losers)? We can also think about widening pay dispersion between the top and the bottom.
• Is the issue that you feel that executive pay is not actually driven by the rules of economics – the rules of the game can too easily be manipulated? So is the problem the fact that the form of payment that makes up the total cash compensation – for example cash or shares – can artificially be manipulated, or executive pay still rising despite declining business performance, or insistence on belt-tightening among the general population?
• Or that those who govern the pay awards – the compensation committees – are themselves financially linked to the organisation or the value of the currency (for example shares) it uses as part of the reward for executives?
• Is the problem that the ‘relative’ others against whom the level of rewards are being justified are part of a closed shop, a perceived cartel, inflating the mutual value of their rewards?
14 The changing contours of fairness
These are all complex questions – but questions that would be asked about executive pay if you used a rational choice way of thinking about ‘fairness’. But economists, at least those who believe that economic behaviour works on a more reciprocal and social justice basis, would also raise another set of considerations.
Appendix 2, then, can help you ‘predict’ some of the sorts of judgements about ‘fairness’
that people make in practice, and whether there might be an emotional or rational consequence if these judgements are infringed.
Why is this important? It can be used to identify the typical rules or stratagems that ‘players in the game’ will likely first wish to follow and the fall-back positions taken. It can be used to predict the behaviours that are seen as breaking the rules, and the rational and emotional responses that might likely follow.
This third lens on fairness is based on what are called principles of outcome (see Appendix 3). Again, many of these ideas stem from the field of economics.
Where does this perspective matter most? It is used in discussion of executive pay (for example bankers’ pay), fair pay and pay distribution. It features in discussion of corporate social responsibility. It is referred to in relation to employment law and tribunal mediation. It features in discussion about issues such as
apprenticeships, and in access to opportunities such as social mobility.
So, in analysing fair pay, executive pay and pay dispersion with the lens in Appendix 3, what are some of the key questions employees might ask in judging fairness of pay? Some questions are driven by assumptions about the norms of proportionality. So, for example:
• Is the problem to do with the level of differential pay between average performance and top
performance – the size of reward in absolute terms or relative to others?
Other questions could be predicted by what is called tournament theory:
• What is a fair balance between allowing for competitive levels of compensation – attracting and retaining a scarce sort of talent?
Or it might be the way that we judge luck and due desserts that raises questions about fairness:
‘These are all complex questions – but questions that would be asked if you used a rational choice way of thinking about ‘fairness’.’
A reciprocal view on executive pay
• Is it the judgement of fairness based on what you believe is the true cause or source of organisational performance, and this might be perceived to be the efforts of others (the collective of the organisation) rather than just the actions of some individuals?
• Does it make a difference what the timescale is to be used for the assessment of performance, or the restrictions on when the reward can be vested – if the reward is based on a short-term (say one-year) horizon, is this a true measure of performance or not?
• Is it that the social desirability of the non-salary perks (retirement plans, health insurance, properties, forms of travel) seem to require little return contribution to society in the form of taxation (so it is a free good that is not fair)?
• Is the problem the level of risk-taking behaviour that the system creates – the unintended consequences or perverse incentives?
• Is it because the organisation providing the reward might have received money from other sources (say the Government/ taxpayer) and the perceived use of the reward is not seen to reflect the interests or aspirations of those providers?
Lens 3: Fairness as the principles of outcome
15 The changing contours of fairness
• Is it that the risks are seen as one-sided – for example there might be upside gains associated with stock price rises, but no downside risks if an option is not materialised?
• Or that even though other people were not the underlying source of rewarded performance,
will they pay the price (through lost earnings) of the failure of those who were rewarded for performance?
Why is this perspective important? Proportionality impacts outcomes. So for example proportionality in pay implies limits on pay dispersion,
that is, each individual’s pay must be proportional to the value of their contribution. If proportionality in pay places limits on pay dispersion – for example a fixed ratio of, say, 20:1 between the top and the median wage – it will have an impact on restraining income inequality more generally.
Principles of outcome in the fair pay debate
Pay is determined by two factors – the demands of a post as determined by the labour market and the contribution/ performance of the post-holder. Pay in the UK is unevenly distributed, and the gap between the top 1% and the rest of the population has been widening steadily over the last decade. Substantial and growing pay inequality poses a serious challenge to society and government, and various reviews, such as the Hutton Review of Fair Pay, have taken place (Hutton 2010). Do high-earners deserve such large rewards? And is it fair that a wide and growing gap should exist between the pay of those at the very top of the income scale and the rest of the population?
In making decisions on pay, managers note that fairness cannot be understood as simply about equality of outcomes. In practice we make judgements about an individual’s ‘due dessert’, and this will vary according to their differing contributions and choices, and the way in which the influence of chance and external circumstances has been minimised. Fairness also requires that processes as well as outcomes must be fair. Fair pay must therefore be proportional to an individual’s contribution and set by fair pay determination processes. The value of individuals’ contributions will reflect both the weight of their particular posts and their actions and efforts within them. Some form of proportionality of treatment – in this case pay – whether in respect of need, or merit, or a mixture of both, implies limits on pay dispersion. A maximum pay multiple would be one mechanism for maintaining those limits. As well as being morally desirable, fair pay brings instrumental benefits to organisations by supporting greater employee engagement and morale, and to society as a whole by helping to avoid inequality traps and assisting social mobility and incentives to productive work.
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
16 The changing contours of fairness
Where does this perspective matter most? It is used in discussion of HR and social policies to deal with issues such as diversity (for example equal opportunities) and discrimination (for example age, gender, sexual orientation, disability, race discrimination). It features in discussion of positive discrimination, for example women on boards. It is relevant to corporate social responsibility
issues, for example child labour, wage exploitation, fair trade and supply chain standards. It comes into discussion of social mobility (for example access to training or education). This perspective is very popular with those who deal with equal opportunities, but has received wide application to issues such as international development. The capability approach defines people’s real freedom to act, by realistically
establishing what resources are available feasibly to achieve their desired outcomes (see Appendix 4).
One’s capability to make those desired choices and have some control over one’s environment and destiny may be thwarted by discrimination, lack of financial resources/education, social circumstances, government oppression or disease.
Lens 4: Fairness as capability
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
One’s innate
potential
Access to resources
Ability to translate
ability and resources into opportunity
Functionings
The choices available to realise my potential
+ + =
Figure 3: The capability approach
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
17 The changing contours of fairness
The argument for equal opportunities is predicated on the fact that those with certain characteristics are hampered by artificial barriers (such as ignorance and prejudice) that have no bearing on the ability to perform well in the job. The discrimination does, however, prevent those with the protected characteristics from having the opportunity to make more fulfilling choices. In order for them to compete on an equal footing for scarce valued resources, it is important not just to appoint those segments to senior jobs; it is also important to ensure that the system itself is supportive and not skewed against them.
From the outset, it is recognised that there are individual differences in each person’s ability to transform an opportunity into a desired outcome and that it is in the interests of society to ensure that no one group is ‘unfairly’ excluded from jobs, medical treatment and so on. Gladwell’s ‘outliers’ illustrates this ‘equality of opportunity’ argument (and the role of both capability and good luck) very well. The approach is to build an outcome measure to establish how effective a policy intervention is.
The relevance of capability to the paradigm of human development also cannot be underestimated. The creation of the UN Development Index, which measures health, education, well-being and income, is driven by this lens. This has influenced the international
development agenda to focus on measuring the real choices available to their citizens. With more developed economies, national governments have designed social policies to provide hope of social mobility for those with various disadvantages (for example the Equalities Act) as well as social engineering (for example debates around grammar schools).
Overall, although resources and income have a profound effect on what we can or cannot do, the capability approach recognises that they are not the only things to be considered when establishing ‘fairness’. It is switching the focus from a means to a good life to the freedom to achieve actual valued improvements in one’s life.
Why is this perspective important? Even well-intentioned efforts may not be valued or produce the expected outcomes if they ignore the fact that people are able to make the best decisions for themselves, and society’s role is to facilitate a ‘fairer’ chance of ‘disadvantaged’ people or groups of achieving their full potential. People are smarter than society gives them credence for – they judge ‘fairness’ – and will react based on an understanding of how the whole system really works. Therefore the well-being of the members of a given group should be evaluated by reference to their capacity to achieve a set of subjectively valued states or activities, through which their potential, as full citizens, can be realised.
The question of women on boards
The debate acknowledges that based on women’s merit alone, there should be many more represented. Here it’s not just the outcome (for example, percentage of boards who are women) that can be used as a measure of fairness; it’s also access to, and treatment by, a range of HR processes (selection, potential assessment, promotion, development). Lots of organisations rely too much on the ‘representation’ measure and too little on the ‘process’ measure. Despite the multifaceted nature of the issue, the emancipation of women from systemic injustices justifies the application of a human rights approach to intervening robustly. The capabilities approach would look at all the factors that thwart women’s progression and serve to intervene through policy to ensure fairer access to resources and enhance their ability to translate this access and opportunities into desired outcomes.
‘...society’s role is to facilitate a ‘fairer’ chance of ‘disadvantaged’ people or groups achieving their full potential.’
18 The changing contours of fairness
A fifth ‘lens’ that becomes important is making judgements as to what is ‘fair’ taking a temporal perspective (see Appendix 5).
Where does this perspective matter most? It features in discussion of pension funds, corporate social responsibility, corporate governance and the long-term viability of the organisation, for example sustainable business models. It features in discussion of human rights, the use of sovereign funds and how to deal with levels of debt (national, corporate, personal).
This lens is not a way of thinking about justice, as the previous four are, but it raises questions about a particular problem of justice. What
do we owe to people who don’t yet exist, or to the future existence of those who are now born? These ideas force us to ask questions about fairness from one generation to another – how fairly do we pass the baton over time? They have come from either:
• A legal perspective – are you sure you are not irretrievably compromising the subtle rights and obligations that are embedded in constitutions or other legal instruments?
• An environmental management perspective – are you allowing people the same resources, and access to these resources, that will give them the same freedoms of choice and action as
you have, or are you borrowing against someone else’s future?
We see these ideas now being imported to a wide range of debates and issues that are important to employees – how we deal with pensions, corporate social responsibility, the treatment of debt across time. So what issues might this ‘lens’ evoke? How does this help us ‘frame’ the questions?
The questions opposite focus on intergenerational fairness, which is of course important. The other obvious debate is the one comparing public and private sector pension provision where the policy is, essentially, to erode the former down to the level of the latter based
Lens 5: Fairness as a temporal perspective
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
19 The changing contours of fairness
on what may be ‘presumed consent’ that public sector workers should be punished for having ‘gold- plated’ pensions. This, of course, conflicts slightly with the desire to ensure that future generations have adequate pension provision to avoid pensioner poverty.
There is also a growing acceptance among some policy experts that the ‘contribution’ principle should be more explicit in the wider welfare debate – proportionality between what you pay into the system and what you get out. This becomes interesting when you look at the employer contributions to occupational pensions under different systems, such as the debate
between defined benefit versus defined contribution schemes.
Why is this perspective important? Different employee segments (for example generations) may believe that they are having to pay for, or subsidise, benefits given to another employee segment – and may not engage with the organisation unless this is dealt with. Important stakeholders who might be given a voice in a decision might perceive their needs and interests are being ignored or impacted, so it is deemed unfair. If settlements are not sustainable over time, they may be perceived to have no legitimacy, and people will not play by those rules.
The pensions issue through the lens of intergenerational fairness
Asking whether the Baby Boom generation should pay more for their pensions raises problems of intergenerational fairness. The fundamental issue is one of the distribution of the burdens of population ageing, lower fertility rates, rising life expectancy, and how we face up to the financial consequences. It is not just whether we can redistribute the costs more equitably, but how we do this, and whether we can look at which generation bears the cost of one part of the problem (for example ageing and pensions) without looking at another (for example fertility rates). If the costs of pension promises made to sets of individuals historically, and at the time on a basis to be considered legitimate, are to be met in full, what are the adjustments to be made? Given it is important that pensions are sustainable and affordable over the long term, an intergenerational ‘lens’ on ‘fairness’ triggers the following sorts of questions that need resolving:
• Societally, how can we be reassured that shared costs and contributions are being contained, and that the revenues taken from current and future contributors used to fund a pay-as-you-go pension benefit match the pension benefits of no-longer contributors?
• Is the degree and balance of fairness between the employee and the taxpayer based on sustainable principles over time?
• Are we paying fairly for the benefits that are being offered, and if we withdraw these benefits, are we being fairer to the next generation or denying them rights their predecessors fought for?
• Are the costs of any reform process, or those of the related consequences, such as welfare support for those with inadequate pensions, or means-tested welfare payments, being borne fairly across different employee segments?
• Do the cross-subsidies still work in the same ways now, and into the future, or do we change the funding exchanges? Should those who are paid the least subsidise the pensions of those who earn the most in a defined benefit scheme or do you adjust benefits to career earnings?
• Is this best achieved by changes in the age at which pensions can be drawn to match the expected increases in longevity, cutting the value of pension benefits, or increasing contributions?
• But then are the assumptions we make about longevity (that we will all be healthy for longer) simply based on extrapolations of statistics or based on a social reality – will all people have the resources to trade income for life expectancy? Will the current middle-aged be as healthy in older years as a generation starved in youth through world wars? Are you modelling and joining up the correct data fairly?
• Is there a way to reform the system without a race to the bottom – without further eroding the value of these pensions, and for the majority are these arrangements really gold-plated?
‘What do we owe to people who don’t yet exist, or to the future existence of those who are now born?’
20 The changing contours of fairness
Lens 6: Fairness as a matter of interpretation
INTERPRETAVIST PERSPECTIVE
Feminist and Colonial
Critiques/ Marxist Theory
CAPABILITY THEORY
PRINCIPLES OF
OUTCOME
SOCIALLY JUST DISTRIBUTION
OF GOODS
Rational Choice Theory
Game Theory
Theory of Justice
Tournament Theory
Trust Theory
Burden Sharing
The previous five lenses work on the basis that there are segments of employee, or society, with fairly stable characteristics. They would all apply the lenses to their particular issue or context in the same way. We can predict how they would each think about fairness. That presumption is now being challenged to varying degrees by what are called interpretavist lenses. These represent a bundle of more sceptical views about the very possibility of having a neutral and objective theory of justice!
Some of these perspectives ask questions about domination. Who is in charge here? Who gets a voice in decision-making, and who just has to take what they are given and do what they are told? Who can make things happen to
others just by their say-so? Who can have their life turned upside down by someone else’s word? Or they question whether it is ever possible to be objective about fairness. Fairness, they say, is a very subjective – and therefore broadly unmanageable – construct.
In Appendix 6 we highlight just a selection of these views.
The first one is that people have different levels of sensitivity to (un) fairness. Recent research shows that individuals react differently to the same unjust event or practice. Attempts at establishing a stable measure of the tendency that individuals have to see the same event as fair or unfair (called equity sensitivity) have been elusive. There have been similar problems
in trying to develop measures of employee engagement. Is a heightened sensitivity to (un) fairness an individual trait – a matter of personality – or is it something that is situational and subject to temporal fluctuations? Your actions can make all people more or less sensitive to fairness. Regardless, ‘fairness’ reactions are subject to individual differences.
Such observations certainly drive many of our assumptions about what creates employee engagement. It is used to think about employee segmentation – and also how organisations will create and then market different and individualised sets of rewards and benefits to groups of employees in return for their performance at the workplace – called ‘employee value propositions’.
Equity Sensitivity
ORGANISATIONAL JUSTICE
Distributive Justice
Procedural Justice
Interactional Justice
TEMPORAL PERSPECTIVE
Inter- generational
Equity
Norms of Proportion-
ality
Luck and Due Dessert
Outcome
21 The changing contours of fairness
Another perspective argues that people are far more prepared to trust than the previous perspectives might have you believe. In economics, trust is often conceptualised as reliability (or predictability) in transactions. In sociology and psychology, trust is a measure of the belief or confidence one has in another’s honesty, fairness or benevolence. In practice people respond to unfairness in quite different ways. They might accept imperfect information, suspend disbelief, or make leaps of faith. They may be willing to allow themselves to become vulnerable. They will do this if they can be persuaded that things will only get better, do not feel they are being deceived or presented with selective information, or feel that those who will deal with a difficult and unfair situation are either naturally benevolent or have high ability (a ‘none of us know the answer to this, but if anyone can solve it, I will trust you to’ type of attitude).
Then there are people who argue that we construct our own social realities and these transcend any individual experiences: the way that our consciousness and awareness of an issue such as fairness depends on the social context – and the different ‘realities’ that this creates for us all. A man in a male- dominated world cannot see or judge fairness in the same way that a woman in such a world would.
Fairness means many different things to different people. This is at odds with the more positivist approach taken for example by organisational psychologists. A more subjective view would say those who believe you can objectively measure the experience of fairness (an ‘if you answer a question with a 3 on a 5-point scale, your 3 means pretty much the same as my 3’ type of attitude) are misguided.
What matters is how reality is constructed and experienced. Reality is mediated by our language and by the values embedded in our culture. For example, feminist critiques of fairness bring to the fore ways in which Western culture is inherently patriarchal and reinforces the dominance of men, or the way that the family (and therefore ideas about fair practices aimed at creating work– life balance) is a very gender-laden idea. Other critical theories such as Marxism, or post-colonial views on globalisation and fairness, similarly challenge reality as the status quo.
As the furore over the phasing out of Elisabeth Fry on English banknotes, the introduction of gender pay audits and the debates about women on boards demonstrate, the issue of debates that work against women remains a contemporary one.
These more critical perspectives argue that the only solution is to accept that there are alternative voices and understandings of how reality is shaped. Once the alternative reality of how ‘unfair’ the status quo may really be is accepted, the subsequent struggle to reclaim what is a ‘fair’ settlement may continue to reveal just how entrenched those interpretations of current reality can be.
Why is this perspective important? In establishing what is a ‘fair’ proposition to an employee, the degree to which they value the justice of it, and the degree to which they see the world as being a just place, depends on their individual disposition (sensitivity), meaning managers have to individualise solutions.
If fairness is about mutually making sense of a situation, managers need to assist employees and shape their interpretation of fair practices – to be able to do this they must already have earned the legitimacy and credibility (from that person’s perspective) to do so. If relevant voices were not part of framing the issue, how can any solution be ‘fair’? Once the alternative interpretation has been raised, you have no choice but to include the new voices in the framing of the issues. Otherwise solutions will address the wrong problem, and people will avoid engaging with the real causes.
‘If fairness is about mutually making sense of a situation, managers need to assist employees and shape their interpretation of fair practices.’
22 The changing contours of fairness
Conclusion
The aim of this research programme is to demonstrate the complexity of the issues (to improve the level of transparency), the necessity of gaining a better understanding of how different ways of thinking about fairness operate, and to offer you a means to help align your decision-making and fair practices.
If we are to ‘manage’ what is ‘fair’, we have to recognise that there are (at least) six different lenses that are going to be applied.
We end by presenting an imagined scenario – a typical organisational narrative – as a provocation. How should we decide what is fair in dealing with this? We invite you
to apply them all and consider the implications of each. Draw your own conclusions as to which lenses seem to create the best insight. There is no model answer.
The turnaround
Once upon a time, there was a utility company, PowerBong (PB), and, being a publicly owned company in a monopoly sector, the 950 staff were used to a very stable work environment and the performance measures and rewards have not changed materially for over 15 years. With the introduction of competition regulations, the Government had to open up the market and two private utility companies entered the market.
The shift from monopoly to oligopoly meant radical changes in PB. First there was a privatisation exercise as the Government devolved its share to avoid a conflict of interest. The employees were very happy as they were offered a significant part of the equity offering and, at the price offered, most were expecting a windfall. PB had to restructure to be more like their private sector peers and started to look at staffing ratios, establish their credit rating so that they could issue corporate bonds on the capital market to invest and replace ageing energy plants with more efficient ones. They also started looking at their management practices to see if they could get the staff to migrate from defined roles to work more flexibly and to accept colleagues on a different package – namely zero-hour and fixed-term contracts. There was also a move to overhaul the final salary pension scheme so that it would be closed to all future joiners.
The stock exchange flotation of the company progressed smoothly and the new shareholders soon sold, leaving the largest holdings with institutional investors such as insurance companies. In the brave new world, post-privatisation PB was rebranded as PB plc – where every little spark matters. A shiny new board was appointed and a new executive team installed. Many in the previous management team chose at the point of privatisation to take generous retirement packages on final salary schemes. Most of the operational staff were not offered such schemes but were TUPE’d over to PB plc on new contracts subject to renewal in 12 months. The new executive team were City professionals who started looking carefully at quarterlies and seemingly spoke only in financial ratios. Their average salaries were about four times those of the previous team and they had equity bonuses based on financial performances.
A year on, the staff numbers had declined to 850 and a consultation process was under way to phase in labour downsizing to about 500. Having acquired a respectable credit rating, PB plc is in the process of raising £30 billion in long-term bonds to fund capital investments across the country. They are moving rapidly from coal to gas-fired stations, which requires considerably fewer staff and lowers the average kilowatt generation cost by 50%. The workforce composition will also be changing as all the new plants are largely automated. The focus will be on technical staff. Nearly half the existing workforce will be put at risk in the next two years.
PB plc has also announced that they will be merging with an energy company from Kuwait. For the purposes of capital-raising, this will be a financially good marriage. Consequently, there will be a reshuffle at the top and the CEO and two of his top team will be leaving to be replaced by members from the new parent company. As part of the alignment, executive rewards improved with cash increases of 33% with enhanced equity bonuses. Average pay awards in the rest of PB plc was a respectable 1.9% last year. Meanwhile energy tariffs rose 7.3%. The outgoing CEO received a cash and equity bonus equivalent to 250% of his base salary, which was about average in the energy sector. The share price of PB plc remained stable, rising about 6% year on year.
(continued)
23 The changing contours of fairness
As you’ve discovered, by applying, in turn, the different fairness lenses to the scenario above, you find some overlaps and ambiguities. The outcomes may sometimes look similar but the journey is just as important as the destination if our aim is to win the hearts and minds of our workforce. By applying a limited set of lenses (primarily those under ‘organisational justice’), there is the risk of organisations shoehorning
complex issues into an HR slant and regarding these as the only legitimate approaches. We owe it to our profession as managers to find alternative, potentially ‘better’ lenses to make some sense of the complex problems we face in HR.
We hope these lenses have caused you to question your fairness judgements. A parting question: even if you think you are fair, do you really know you are fair?
The turnaround (continued)
As a member of the surviving executive team for PB plc, you’ve had to address all these changes, especially accusations of unfairness. These include the closure of the final salary scheme, the adoption of a new executive reward scheme, the fundamental changes in the terms and conditions for all following privatisation, waves of long-term staff being put at risk following the publication of the PB plc strategy of decommissioning old, dirty, coal-fired stations and accelerating the investment in gas-fired automated plants. Consumers meanwhile are up in arms with the tariff increases and these are set to increase by nearly three times inflation next year – 8.2%.
• What lenses could you apply to defend PB plc’s choices?
• If you disagreed with some of the choices made and wanted to bring alternatives to a largely divided board, how would you reframe the argument?
• What lenses would help you develop an alternative business case?
‘Even if you think you are fair, do you really know you are fair?’
24 The changing contours of fairness
Luck and due dessert
outcome
Appendix 1 : Organisational justice fairness assumptions
Where the ideas come from How it works
Distributive justice Judgements of equity and inequity are derived from comparisons between oneself and others based on an input-output ratio:
• inputs (what a person perceives as having contributed, for example knowledge, effort)
• outcomes (what an individual perceives they get out of an exchange relationship, for example pay and recognition).
Whether it’s ‘fair’ depends on your point of comparison (referents), which may be internal (one’s self at an earlier time) or external (other individuals, groups, organisations, sectors).
An equitable outcome (for example remuneration, or any other valued outcome) is awarded in proportion to their inputs (how hard they work, how productive they are).
Applying ‘equality’, all participants receive the same outcomes, regardless of their individual performance.
Where ‘need’ is the measure, one is rewarded based on their level of need or deprivation.
Procedural justice Employees are naturally attentive to justice of events and situations in their everyday lives, for example issues related to perceptions of fair pay, equal opportunities for promotion, and personnel selection procedure.
People will judge fairness based on four rules:
• Dignity: fair process requires all parties involved to be treated with respect (for example having a voice; opportunity to make a case).
• Equality: fair process must treat (and be seen to treat) all individuals the same, applying consistent, transparent rules. This does not mean that the outcomes need to be the same for everyone.
• Accuracy: fair process must take full account of all available information, exhaustively establishing facts of each particular case.
• Legitimacy: flowing from the above criteria, a fair process must be trusted by all parties to be seeking a fair outcome for all.
Interactional justice Employees will judge fairness based on their perceptions of their interpersonal treatment during the implementation of policies at work. They make two separate judgements:
• Interpersonal justice: how employees are treated, that is, perceptions of respect and propriety by authorities, managers and their third parties.
• Informational justice: the accuracy and quality of explanations about procedures provided to employees, that is, adequacy of the explanation, its timeliness, specificity and truthfulness/ authenticity.
Sources: Colquitt et al 2001; Greenberg 1987a, 1987b, 1993a, 1993b, 1993c; Greenberg and Colquitt 2005.
25 The changing contours of fairness
Appendix 2: Socially just distribution of goods fairness assumptions
Where the ideas come from How it works
Rational choice theory/ game theory
Assumes decisions are based on the ‘utility’ of outcome – how intensely it increases pleasure or reduces pain.
This calculus is based on a subjective assessment of welfare – such as monetary gain, happiness, satisfaction or moral worth.
Assumes all the game players have perfect market information on which to base their calculus.
People will maximise the utility to themselves (as a consumer, or as a producer) and place desired outcomes in a rank order. They have different levels of indifference to some outcomes.
Preference-satisfaction and pleasure are different, competing, theories of utility (roughly: that your preference is satisfied is a state of the world, and can be true even if you don’t know it or don’t enjoy it; pleasure is a state of your mind, and can be based on mistakes or ignorance about the world). The former is more commonly used in rational choice theory, the latter in classical utilitarian moral theory.
The rule or stratagem to reach a ‘fair’ decision depends on whether it is a zero-sum game (if the cake is cut your gain exactly matches the loss by others) or a non-zero-sum game (the cake size can change).
MinMax rule (Nash equilibrium): In a zero-sum game people will act in a way to minimise possible loss for a worst case (maximum) loss scenario – and they will try to maximise their own minimum gain.
MaxMin rule: In a non-zero-sum game their strategy will be to maximise their own minimum payoff.
Theory of justice as fairness
If there is any uncertainty about the physical and material endowments to be enjoyed over our lives (wealth, intelligence, strength), our behaviour is infinitely risk-averse.
We will care only about worst possible outcome – so will agree to a social contract which maximises the welfare of the least well-off member of society because that might one day be us.
People behave on the principle of ‘justification’ – fairness is an emotional issue and is based on an assessment of risk, that is, people will absorb a price that has no foreseeable benefit if the end is justified.
Provides a collection of models to assist in the analysis of conflict and co-operation as well as strategies for resolution.
Aggregates preferences and behaviours of individual members of society to create the procedures that lead to:
• Fair division: problem of dividing a set of resources or goods between several people, such that each person receives his/her due share.
• Entitlement: proportion of the resources or goods to be divided that a player can expect to receive.
• Bargaining power: relative ability of parties in a situation to exert influence over each other.
Also informs a ‘human rights’ view of fairness, underpinned by two principles:
• Liberty principle: each is the recognition of a set of equal basic liberties such as conscience, speech and association, meaning that each person has an equal right to the most extensive basic liberty compatible with a similar liberty for others.
• Difference principle: inequality is permissible to the extent that those at the bottom benefit from arrangements that enable those at the top to be richer.
Social and economic inequalities are to be arranged so that they are both: to the greatest benefit of the least advantaged and attached to offices and positions open to all under conditions of fair equality of opportunity.
Sources: Binmore 2012; Dimand and Dimand 1996; Nash 1950, 1951; Rawls 1971, 1985, 2001.
26 The changing contours of fairness
Appendix 3: Principles of outcome fairness assumptions Where the ideas come from How it works
Norms of proportionality
Just as there is a tariff of proportional punishment to match the offence of the crime, so those who make an effort to exploit their talents and do good jobs deserve their proportional reward.
However, judgements about whether people have the means to reach the ends or how they use these means must affect views on the distribution or proportionality of resources and goods.
Underpinned by the following principles, one must judge whether a certain distribution of goods is desirable, ideally without knowing how previous differences came about:
• Crude egalitarianism: it is bad or unjust if some people are worse off than others.
• Crude sufficientarianism: it is bad or unjust if some people do not have enough of whatever is the relevant currency of distributive justice.
• Prioritarianism (protected characteristics): we should maximise the sum of welfare that is weighted to ensure that benefits at lower levels of welfare have more weight than those at higher levels.
Tournament theory Prizes are fixed in advance and not based on absolute performance – just that relative to others in the same position.
Rewards at higher levels of an organisation serve to motivate and incentivise those at lower levels, who will strive to get promoted, either under a meritocratic model (where people should get what they deserve for their talent and hard work) or a market model (where people should get what the market will pay for their services).
As long as the high performance of individuals striving for the next ‘prize’ boosts the overall performance of the firm (increases the size of the cake for all), they are entitled to a greater distribution.
Luck and due dessert outcomes
Assumes that individuals are completely powerless over all their own outcomes.
Therefore fair rewards (and punishments) should be those that are proportionate to people’s actions, that is, the luck they make themselves and for which we should be held responsible (option luck).
Therefore people’s diligence, effort and application determines what is fair in the range of rewards (due dessert).
However, circumstance and brute luck still matter, for example if the outcome was just a consequence of being in the right place at the right time, this should not be the determinant of outcomes.
Therefore people should not be rewarded for brute good luck, nor penalised for brute bad luck.
Sources: Dworkin 2000, 2003; Eriksson 2009; Lazear and Rosen 1981.
27 The changing contours of fairness
Appendix 4: Capability approach fairness assumptions
Where the ideas come from How it works
Intergenerational equity
‘Fairness’ is judged on how the baton is passed from one generation to another, and at any one moment in time the present generation may present this baton to the next generation in such a way that it irretrievably compromises key principles, such as: constitutional rights, access to resources and the chance to benefit from those resources.
Most national constitutions actually convey a set of legal rights and obligations. These rights and obligations create important conditions or constraints, for example they dictate principles about access to power and authority and access to a social pact.
These principles are enshrined and apply across time. They are fundamental entitlements that must not knowingly be compromised, that is, one party cannot ‘land grab’ or ‘resource grab’ across time in such a way that the next generation would find it impossible to implement the values within the constitution.
There is an implicit commitment of successive generations – a long-term perspective – concerned with the interests and rights of future generations as well as of people today to respect and maintain fundamental balances (inviolable rights), and this requires the commitment of those past and present to keep (at least) a minimum level of actual conditions so that the basic principles and values are feasible.
Burden-sharing There are competing factions: each owning part of the nation’s stock of exhaustible natural resources.
To avoid this, all factions have to move onto burden-sharing views of fairness. This view is based on ideas of sustainable development, in turn defined as development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.
Efficiency principle: the current generation owe to the next generations – and must leave – a set of conditions that ensure the same availability of important resources (for example financial wealth, lack of debt, quality of the environment) necessary to maintain a certain standard of living and production capacity.
To meet this obligation the next generation must have the option or the capacity to be as well off as we are, for example use of equity funds to maintain a sufficient level of money to ensure the fund can always be a ‘guardian of the future against the claims of the present’.
Sources: Bratland 2007; Kontogianni et al 2006.
Where the ideas come from How it works
Capability theory People are able to focus on whether they have real freedoms (or not), that is, are they able to value or access important resources (income, commodities, assets)?
Every individual has innate potential which can be realised only through access to valued resources, but there are individual differences in their ability to transform these resources into actions.
Access to resources is important because that determines their real level of ‘functionings’ (the choices people can realistically make to better their lives), that is, what we are capable of (able to do), want to be capable of, should be capable of.
But there is a distribution of opportunity within society.
Therefore people need both the resources (the internal powers) to realise their desired functionings – but also the capabilities.
People are not equally placed to realise their human capabilities, due to barriers arising from structural inequalities of class, race, disability, gender and sexual oppression.
Policy intervenes to provide the additional assistance some people may require to develop their capabilities and to transform them into functionings (‘conversion factors’).
Therefore, in order to be ‘fair’, policies have to make opportunities ‘real’ and feasible, in two ways:
1 They have to ensure access to valued resources in order to give people the substantive freedoms to transform their potential capability into desired functionings.
2 They have to help make this ‘conversion’ easier – that is, it is not just a case of putting people into the positions (for example positive discrimination); you have to ensure they have the holistic opportunity to cope with all the other factors that enable success – there must be no hidden systemic barriers.
Sources: Carpenter 2009; Nash 1951; Sen 1999.
Appendix 5: Temporal perspectives fairness assumptions
28 The changing contours of fairness
Appendix 6: Interpretavist perspectives fairness assumptions
Where the ideas come from How it works
Equity sensitivity Individuals do not necessarily share the same interpretations of fairness and justice – individuals subjected to the same inequities often respond in different ways.
Individuals have different tolerances and sensitivities to disparities – for example some are more ‘equity sensitive’ (they fit equity theory). Some are more ‘benevolent’ (they are more tolerant of deviations) and some see themselves as ‘entitled’ (they are more tolerant of dissonance, for example, to over-reward, and more focused on under-reward).
Their interpretations of ‘fairness’ (and therefore reactions) are based on which category they fall under.
Trust theory Expectations of ‘fairness’ are based on people’s interpretations of reality (social construction).
Because people believe the world is continuously changing, everybody’s understanding of ‘fairness’, including their own, is always in flux and subject to the influence of actors, events and other ideas.
People make very subjective assessments of ‘fairness’ – it depends for example on their assessment of outcome severity, mistakes of omission, mistakes of commission, the other’s level of knowledge, individual values of hard work, education, attitudes to self-sufficiency.
Therefore, people have an acceptance of imperfect information, will judge ‘fairness’ by suspending their disbelief and making leaps of faith.
They are willing to become vulnerable, but base this on their attribution that those executing change have high abilities (they may not know the answer, but if anyone will find it out, it will be them); or that they are naturally benevolent (however the problem is solved, they will look after your interests).
‘Fairness’ relies on holding back, or holding favourable expectations (expectations that outcomes will change for the better) and is therefore based on trust that managers will not deceive or be selective with information.
Feminist critiques, colonial critiques, Marxist theory
Ideas of ‘fairness’ are the product of the way certain dominant groups – either consciously or inadvertently – shape the language, frame the issue, and the consequent interpretation of the issue.
This framing is myopic and denies people entry into discussion of, or decisions about, the real issues.
For example, a gender critique argues that ‘justice’ can be seen as a male perspective, for example it wrongly assumes that the institution of family is just. In reality ‘family’ has subtle embedded hierarchies (for example time division, expected roles) and can perpetuate gender inequalities throughout society.
Sources: Adams 1963; Forray 2006; Huseman et al 1987.
29 The changing contours of fairness
ADAMS, J.S. (1963) Toward an understanding of inequity. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology. Vol 67, No 5, November. pp422–36.
ADAMS, J.S. (1965) Inequity in social exchange. In: BERKOWITZ, L. (ed.). Advances in experimental social psychology, volume 2. New York: Academic Press. pp267–99.
AMBROSE, M.L. and ARNAUD, A. (2005) Are procedural justice and distributive justice conceptually distinct? In: GREENBERG, J. and COLQUITT, J.A. (eds). Handbook of organizational justice. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. pp59–84.
BIES, R.J. and MOAG, J.F. (1986) Interactional justice: communication criteria of fairness. In: LEWICKI, R.J., SHEPPARD, B.H. and BAZERMAN, M.H. (eds). Research on negotiation in organizations, volume 1. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. pp43–55.
BINMORE, K. (2012) Playing for real: a text on game theory. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
BINMORE, K., RUBINSTEIN, A. and WOLINSKY, A. (1986) The Nash bargaining solution in economic modelling. Rand Journal of Economics. Vol 17, No 2, Summer. pp176–88.
BLADER, S.L. and TYLER, T.R. (2005) How can theories of organizational justice explain the effects of fairness? In: GREENBERG, J. and COLQUITT, J.A. (eds). Handbook of organizational justice. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. pp329–54.
BRATLAND, J. (2007) Rawlsian investment rules for ‘intergenerational equity’: breaches of method and ethics. Journal of Libertarian Studies. Vol 21, No 4, Winter. pp69–100.
BRETZ, R.D., MILKOVICH, G. T. and READ, W. (1992). The current state of performance appraisal, reaearch and practice: Concerns, directions and implications. Journal of Management. Vol 18, No 2. pp321–352.
CARPENTER, M. (2009) The capabilities approach and critical social policy: lessons from the majority world? Critical Social Policy. Vol 29, No 3, August. pp351–73.
COLQUITT, J.A., CONLON, D.E. and WESSON, M.J. (2001) Justice at the millennium: a meta-analytic review of 25 years of organizational justice research. Journal of Applied Psychology. Vol 86, No 3, June. pp425–45.
COLQUITT, J.A., GREENBERG, J. and SCOTT, B.A. (2005) Organizational justice: where do we stand? In: GREENBERG, J. and COLQUITT, J.A. (eds). Handbook of organizational justice. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. pp589–620.
DIMAND, M.A. and DIMAND, R.W. (1996) A history of game theory, volume 1: from the beginnings to 1945. London: Routledge.
DWORKIN, R. (2000) Sovereign virtue: the theory and practice of equality. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
DWORKIN, R. (2002) Sovereign virtue revisited. Ethics. Vol 113, No 1, October. pp106–43.
DWORKIN, R. (2003) Equality, luck and hierarchy. Philosophy and Public Affairs. Vol 31, No 2, April. pp190–98.
ERIKSSON, T. (2009) Tournaments. In: DURLAUF, S.N. and BLUME, L.E. (eds) The New Palgrave Dictionary of Economics. Online edition. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Available at: http://www. dictionaryofeconomics.com [Accessed 20 September 2013].
FORRAY, J.M. (2006) Sustaining fair organization: an interpretive view of justice in organizational life. Group & Organization Management. Vol 31, No 3, June. pp359–87.
GLADWELL, M. (2008) Outliers: The story of success. New York. Little, Brown and Company
GOWDY, J.M. and POLIMENI, R.L. (2005) The death of homo economicus: is there life after welfare economics? International Journal of Social Economics. Vol 32, No 11. pp924–38.
GREENBERG, J. (1987a) Reactions to procedural injustice in payment distributions: do the means justify the ends? Journal of Applied Psychology. Vol 72, No 1, February. pp55–61.
GREENBERG, J. (1987b) A taxonomy of organizational justice theories. Academy of Management Review. Vol 12, No 1, January. pp9–22.
References
30 The changing contours of fairness
GREENBERG, J. (1993a) The intellectual adolescence of organizational justice: you’ve come a long way, maybe. Social Justice Research. Vol 6, No 1, March. pp135–48.
GREENBERG, J. (1993b) The social side of fairness: interpersonal and informational classes of organizational justice. In: CROPANZANO, R. (ed.). Justice in the workplace: approaching fairness in human resource management. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. pp79–103.
GREENBERG, J. (1993c) Stealing in the name of justice: informational and interpersonal moderators of theft reactions to underpayment inequity. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes. Vol 54, No 1, February. pp81–103.
GREENBERG, J. and COLQUITT, J.A. (eds) (2005) Handbook of organizational justice. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
HURKA, T. (2003) Desert: individualistic and holistic. In: OLSARETTI, S. (ed.). Desert and justice. Oxford: Clarendon Press. pp45–68.
HUSEMAN, R.C., HATFIELD, J.D. and MILES, E.W. (1985) Test for individual perceptions of job equity: some preliminary findings. Perceptual and Motor Skills. Vol 61, No 3f, December. pp1055–64.
HUSEMAN, R.C., HATFIELD, J.D. and MILES, E.W. (1987) A new perspective on equity theory: the equity sensitivity construct. Academy of Management Review. Vol 12, No 2, April. pp222–34.
HUTTON, W. (2010) Hutton review of fair pay in the public sector. Interim report. London: HM Treasury.
KONTOGIANNI, A.D., SKOURTOS, M.S. and PAPANDREOU, A.A. (2006) Shared waters – shared responsibility: application of the principles of fairness for burden sharing in the Mediterranean. International Environmental Agreements: Politics, Law and Economics. Vol 6, No 2. pp209–30.
KUHN, H.W. and TUCKER, A.W. (eds) (1950) Contributions to the theory of games, volume I. Annals of Mathematics Studies, No 24. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
KUHN, H.W. and TUCKER, A.W. (eds) (1953) Contributions to the theory of games, volume II. Annals of Mathematics Studies, No 28. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
LAZEAR, E.P. and ROSEN, S. (1981) Rank-order tournaments as optimum labor contracts. Journal of Political Economy. Vol 89, No 5, October. pp841–64.
LEVEL PLAYING FIELD INSTITUTE. (2007) Corporate leavers survey 2007: the cost of employee turnover due solely to unfairness in the workplace [online]. San Francisco, CA: Level Playing Field Institute. Available at: https://www. lpfi.org/sites/default/files/corporate- leavers-survey.pdf [Accessed 20 September 2013].
LEVENTHAL, G.S. (1976) The distribution of rewards and resources in groups and organizations. In: BERKOWITZ, L. and WALSTER, E. (eds). Advances in experimental social psychology, volume 9. New York: Academic Press. pp91–131.
LEVENTHAL, G.S. (1980) What should be done with equity theory? New approaches to the study of fairness in social relationships. In: GERGEN, K., GREENBERG, M. and
WILLIS, R. (eds). Social exchange: advances in theory and research. New York: Plenum Press. pp27–55.
LEVENTHAL, G.S., KARUZA, J. and FRY, W.R. (1980) Beyond fairness: a theory of allocation preferences. In: MIKULA, G. (ed.). Justice and social interaction: experimental and theoretical contributions from psychological research. New York: Springer-Verlag. pp167–218.
MARCH, J.G. and OLSEN, J.P. (1989) Rediscovering institutions: the organizational basis of politics. New York: Free Press.
MCKAY, S., MURRAY, M. and MACINTYRE, S. (2012) Justice as fairness in planning policy-making. International Planning Studies. Vol 17, No 2, May. pp147–62.
MORAND, D.A. and MERRIMAN, K.K. (2012) ‘Equality theory’ as a counterbalance to equity theory in human resource management. Journal of Business Ethics. Vol 111, No 1, November. pp133–44.
NASH, J.F. (1950) The bargaining problem. Econometrica. Vol 18, No 2, April. pp155–62.
NASH, J.F. (1951) Non-cooperative games. Annals of Mathematics. Vol 54, No 2, September. pp286–95.
NOWAKOWSKI, J.M. and CONLON, D.E. (2005) Organizational justice: looking back, looking forward. The International Journal of Conflict Management. Vol 16, No 1. pp4–29.
NUSSBAUM, M.C. (2000) Women and human development: the capabilities approach. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
POON, J.M. (2012) Distributive justice, procedural justice, affective commitment, and turnover intention: a mediation-moderation
31 The changing contours of fairness
framework. Journal of Applied Social Psychology. Vol 42, No 6, June. pp1505–32.
RAWLS, J. (1971) A theory of justice. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
RAWLS, J. (1985) Justice as fairness: political not metaphysical. Philosophy and Public Affairs. Vol 14, No 3, Summer. pp223–51.
RAWLS, J. (2001) Justice as fairness: a restatement. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press.
ROBEYNS, I. (2005) The capability approach: a theoretical survey. Journal of Human Development. Vol 6, No 1. pp93–114.
SEN, A. (1999) Development as freedom. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
SENGE, P.M. (2006) The fifth discipline: the art and practice of the learning organization. New York: Doubleday.
SHAPLEY, L.S. (1953) A value for n-person games. In: KUHN, H.W. and TUCKER, A.W. (eds). Contributions to the theory of games, volume II. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. pp307– 17.
SHAPLEY, L.S. (1967) On balanced sets and cores. Naval Research Logistics Quarterly. Vol 14, No 4. pp453–60.
THIBAUT, J.W. and WALKER, L. (1975) Procedural justice: a psychological analysis. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
VON NEUMANN, J. (1928) Zurtheorie der gesellschaftsspiele.
Issued: November 2013 Reference: 6346 © Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 2013
Chartered Institute of Personnel and Development 151 The Broadway London SW19 1JQ UK Tel: +44 (0)20 8612 6200 Fax: +44 (0)20 8612 6201 Email: [email protected] Website: cipd.co.uk Incorporated by Royal Charter Registered charity no.1079797
Yang-2020.pdf
https://doi.org/10.1177/0275074020942406
American Review of Public Administration 2020, Vol. 50(6-7) 706 –712
© The Author(s) 2020 Article reuse guidelines:
sagepub.com/journals-permissions DOI: 10.1177/0275074020942406
journals.sagepub.com/home/arp
Evidence-Based Decision Making for Public Health Management
“In a time of uncertainty, facts provide clarity. In a time of anxiety, facts comfort. In a time of misinformation, facts cor- rect. In a time of division, facts unite. In a time of crisis, facts matter most.” The CNN coronavirus ad says it beautifully about the importance of facts in fighting the COVID-19 pan- demic. To some degree, this relates to the clash between President Trump and the media over information and misin- formation regarding COVID-19, as well as the network’s worry that many of the COVID-19 decisions are not based on facts, or not evidence based.1
The worry, that many COVID-19 decisions are not evi- dence based, is particularly agonizing for many public administration scholars, who have seen evidence-based man- agement (EBM) becoming an important area of research and practice (Haskins & Margolis, 2015; Heinrich, 2007; Jennings & Hall, 2012; Maynard, 2006; Parkhurst, 2017; Shillabeer et al., 2011; Vanlandingham & Drake, 2012). Countries such as Australia, New Zealand, United Kingdom, and the United States have made steady progress on EBM. In the United States, the Evidence-Based Policymaking Commission Act of 2006 established a bipartisan commis- sion to facilitate EBM in federal government, and more con- crete steps were formulated in the Foundations for Evidence-Based Policymaking Act of 2018. The Obama administration pushed this agenda in its executive orders, Office of Management and Budget (OMB) guidelines, bud- get decisions, and exemplary initiatives (Haskins & Margolis, 2015). Many nonprofits such as the MacArthur Foundation and the Pew Center for the States joined the chorus.
However, the worry is not surprising, given many have questioned the utility and feasibility of EBM in a political world (Hammersley, 2013; Pfeffer & Sutton, 2006; Smith, 2013). Nevertheless, with some exceptions (e.g., European Center for Disease Prevention and Control, 2019; Lipsitch et al., 2011; Smith, 2013), much less attention has been paid to EBM in emergency management and particularly public health emergencies. Government responses to COVID-19 provide a great opportunity to rethink EBM in situations such as a pandemic, which are characterized by uncertainty, high potential loss, time pressure, and compet- ing values.
Given the time constraint and the space limit, this essay is not a research-based article and does not follow a typical structure of literature review, research design, and findings.2 Instead, it offers educated reflections on three issues that are of particular interest: They are salient during this pandemic and they embody dimensions of EBM that have often been neglected. The three issues are as follows: What should be considered evidence in pandemic-like situations? How can we make evidence more accessible to decision makers in
942406ARPXXX10.1177/0275074020942406The American Review of Public AdministrationYang research-article2020
1Renmin University of China, Beijing, China 2Florida State University, Tallahassee, USA
Corresponding Author: Kaifeng Yang, School of Public Administration and Policy, Renmin University of China, Beijing 100872, China. Email: [email protected]
What Can COVID-19 Tell Us About Evidence-Based Management?
Kaifeng Yang1,2
Abstract People worry that many COVID-19 decisions are not evidence based, but applying typical evidence-based management (EBM) in a pandemic seems difficult. A pandemic is characterized by uncertainty, high potential loss, time pressure, and competing values, all posing challenges to EBM. Drawing on events in government responses to COVID-19, this essay focuses on three issues: What should be considered as evidence in pandemic-like situations? How can we make evidence more accessible to decision makers in such situations? And, does evidence have a role in ethical judgments in a pandemic? The essay argues that EBM must be extended to address pandemic-like situations. The evidentiary standard should take into consideration “appropriateness,” “reasonableness,” and “intuition,” paying attention to the stages of a pandemic and the type of errors we want to avoid. In addition, the essay calls for building policy capacity in terms of coproducing and applying evidence in and outside government, as well as strengthening public managers’ capacity in evidence-based ethical analysis.
Keywords COVID-19, evidence-based management, pandemic, evidence
Yang 707
such situations? And, does evidence have a role in ethical judgments in a pandemic?
What Is Evidence for Pandemic Decision Making?
As Davies et al. (2000) writes, evidence refers to the results of “systematic investigation towards increasing the sum of knowledge” (p. 3). Typically EBM considers the randomized controlled trials (RCTs) as the golden standard for evidence. Results from RCTs and other experiment and quasi-experi- ment studies are preferred in a hierarchy of evidence despite the protest from experts who place equal weight on qualita- tive data, storytelling, and understanding (Buss & Buss, 2011; Smith, 2013; Stoker & Evans, 2016). Because a single experi- ment study faces external validity (generalizability) prob- lems, EBM advocates embrace systematic reviewing and meta-analysis to consider a large number of such studies. Still, systematic reviewing and meta-analysis cannot uncover the mechanisms of action or theories of change behind the observed outcome (Pawson, 2006). For example, the existing evidence about the relative effects of pandemic interventions, such as wearing masks, school closure, and household quar- antine, is highly limited: Every pandemic was different, and there were only a handful pandemics in recent decades. Moreover, the available studies on those interventions were bounded by culture and context (Jamison et al., 2018), and they tell little about the mechanism behind the effects.
During a pandemic, the evidentiary standard of EBM needs to be adjusted. A case in point is the Chinese city of Wuhan and Hubei Province’s reaction to the early signs of COVID-19. As widely reported, the local authorities were informed of the cases of severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS)-like pneumonia, but they did not treat them as evi- dence of an epidemic in the forming. From publicly available information, three cases of unexplained pneumonia were reported to a district branch of the Wuhan Center for Disease Prevention and Control (CDC) on December 27. The Wuhan CDC conducted epidemic testing and investigation the same day. Four more cases were reported on the December 29, and on December 30, the Wuhan Health Commission issued emergency notices to hospitals regarding the reporting and treatment of unexplained pneumonia. On December 30, a young doctor from the Central Hospital of Wuhan, Wenliang Li, posted texts, pictures, and video clips about the diagnoses in a WeChat group consisting of his medical school class- mates. He used terms such as “SARS-like” and “Coronavirus” to warn his professional peers. On December 31, he was sum- moned and admonished by the local police and his hospital leaders for “spreading the rumors.”3
Rumors are fabricated statements not grounded in facts—or not backed by known authority for their truth. The local authori- ties treated medical professionals’ informed judgment based on solid but incomplete information—incomplete as cases were few and the virus had not been determined scientifically—as
rumors. Therefore, the local authorities decided to continue their way of life: Everything went on as planned and normal until the central government decided to lock down the city on January 23. In retrospect, if the local authorities took seriously medical experts’ educated judgments and used them as evidence in the decisions, the epidemic development in Wuhan would have been different, more lives would have been saved, and the pan- demic would have been in a different shape.
This does not mean we should blindly trust educated judg- ments in public health emergencies. Traditionally, EBM in health emergencies is not satisfied with educated judgments; rather, it emphasizes scientific efforts in finding the vaccine and medicine, which may take years because the vaccine can- not be put in use unless it is proved safe based on sufficient evidence from RCTs. This is fine in normal situations. The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) indeed must adhere to the golden standard in its decisions on new drugs. Nevertheless, what if a drug, although still going through RCTs, is found effective on a particular group of patients? It may have no negative or minor negative effects. Should FDA authorize its use in a pandemic or crisis? The Oscar-winning movie, Dallas Buyers Club, tells a story that demonstrates the tension between scientific requirements of FDA and critical needs of patients. Interestingly there is a similar Chinese movie, Dying to Survive, which exposed the tension to the Chinese public. Both movies are not framed in a pandemic situation, but the tension is vivid. This seems to suggest that whether a piece of information should be considered as evi- dence is not entirely an “objective” matter when there are uncertainties, but dependent on other factors.
One such factor is the stage of pandemic development and the type of error we want to avoid. A pandemic has typically six stages: preparedness, surveillance, response, treatment, recovery, and learning. Perhaps different stages require dif- ferent types of evidence and evidentiary standards. For example, in the preparedness stage, one needs explanatory and evaluative evidence of past pandemics and the efficacy of various interventions. In the surveillance stage, one needs descriptive and predictive evidence based on early signs.
In the preparedness and surveillance stages, we should pri- marily be concerned with Type I error: Rejecting a signal when it is true. Rejecting the early cases in Wuhan as signals of an epidemic was a Type I error. In comparison, Type II error means accepting a signal when it is false. Getting local communities ready for a false-alarmed signal may cost some resources but it is better than regretting for not responding to a true pandemic. That is, in the preparedness and surveillance stages, we should err on the caution side for a potential pandemic and accept “less scientific” information as evidence. After all, facts are not “objective things” out there, but usually are “recognized pat- terns” in the environment. They are probabilistic, and we have to be clear about the type of errors we particularly want to pre- vent. This is the essence of the disagreement between Ioannidis (2020) and Lipsitch (2020). John Ioannidis, a Stanford University professor and a leader in the “meta-research”
708 American Review of Public Administration 50(6-7)
movement, wrote on March 17 that the data collection so far could not justify long-term countermeasures such as school clo- sure, referring to it as an “evidence fiasco.” Firmly disagreeing, Marc Lipsitch, director of Harvard University’s Center for Communicable Disease Dynamics, argued on March 18 that “we know enough now to act decisively.”
The educated judgments that should be valued are those of professional experts, as opposed to an ordinary person, a public administration scholar, or a politician who has no pub- lic health–related background. Wenliang Li and his col- leagues were medical professionals who had at least 7 years of medical school training and years of practice. Some of the doctors experienced the fight against SARS 17 years ago. They have learned capacity from the past. They have formed tacit knowledge and intuition based on professional training and practical experience. Coronaviruses are a large family of viruses and we have studied it for decades. Although COVID- 19 caught us in surprise, it shares some characteristics of similar viruses in the past, which could serve as a reasonable guide. If something can be a reasonable guide, can it be viewed as a type of evidence? World Health Organization’s (WHO) Regional Office for Europe once used a broad defi- nition of evidence: “findings from research and other knowl- edge that may serve as a useful basis for decision-making in public health and health care.” (EACHR, 2003).
The use of tacit knowledge and educated judgment relate to intuitive decision making, which has been emphasized in crisis situations (Miller, 2018). Intuition appears to be anti- thetical to EBM, perhaps because much of the EBM litera- ture is grounded in normal situations or normal emergencies, not unprecedented new challenges or crises such as COVID- 19. COVID-19 belongs to the family of coronaviruses on which the medical profession has accumulated some knowl- edge. What if we are dealing with an entirely new virus on which the medical profession has no prior knowledge at all? In a pandemic with high levels of novelty, uncertainty, inten- sity, and spread, EBM may be more important than ever, but available “scientific” evidence is extremely limited. That would force us to accept “other” types of evidence, even when this requires experts making informed jumps from past knowledge to an unfamiliar situation—however creative and imaginary that might be. This does not mean we should dis- card or devalue the scientific evidence based on RCTs. Whenever we have that type of scientific evidence, we should take advantage of it. Perhaps we are better off not worrying about what should be considered evidence, but concentrating on the role of professional expertise and those who can apply it to a novel and urgent situation.
How Can Reasonable Evidence Be Available for a Pandemic
Following the discussion above, an important question is as follows: In an unprecedented pandemic, where does reason- able evidence come from for decision makers? Bogenschneider
and Corbett (2010) identify three criteria for an evidence to meet policymakers’ standards for usefulness: (a) credibility— high scientific quality and unbiased, (b) accessibility—easily understandable, and (c) timeliness—available when the deci- sions are being made. As I have indicated, in a sudden pan- demic such as COVID-19, particularly in its forming and spreading stages, credible, accessible, and timely evidence may be simply nonexistent in many areas, such as the origin of the virus, the transmission mechanisms, the vitality rate, and the mutation pattern. And, we may want to change the definition of credibility to “reasonable, based on unbiased professional judgement.”
How can such judgments be formed for responding to a pandemic? Certainly, it requires efforts from both policy- makers and researchers. The literature blames both the evi- dence suppliers (researchers) and consumers (policymakers) for the failure of EBM (Cairney, 2016; Hammersley, 2013; Smith, 2013). There are communicative, institutional, and cultural gaps between the two sides. In this pandemic, the public’s anger has been mostly raged against the policymak- ers in countries such as the United Kingdom and the United States. The sentiment seems familiar: Politicians are closed- minded, committed to their ideology and electoral interest, incapable to understand research, and unmotivated to seek evidence. These might be true, but to be fair to policymakers, they are not necessarily surrounded by timely scientific evi- dence or reasonable evidence in the initial stages of a pan- demic. Political decision making is a garbage can process where the best evidence may not be at hand when it is needed (Cohen et al., 1972). Politicians are usually surrounded by competing evidences and politics.
The literature has offered many recommendations for increasing the use and effectiveness of EBM (Cairney, 2016; Davies et al., 2000; Smith, 2013). One solution is to develop “bridges” between the research community and the policy- maker community by creating “knowledge broker” organiza- tions and positions in government (Smith, 2013). They are policy professionals in government who are the backbone of a government’s policy capacity (Wu et al., 2018). In the first section, I have argued that we should shift our attention away from evidence and move onto the role of professional experts. This does not mean researchers should replace politicians to make policy decisions. Taking politics or politicians out of policy making is not possible, nor is it democratic or legiti- mate (Cairney, 2016; Weiss, 1999). A democratic society “has no more obligation to accept the data and dicta of social scientists than it does to listen to shamans, astrologers, or television commentators” (Weiss, 1978, p. 61). Instead, it means building institutionalized government capacity in searching, coproducing, using, and evaluating appropriate evidence, as well as learning from the use of evidence in various situations.
The early problems encountered by China and the United States in fighting COVID-19 reveal weaknesses in the infra- structure of policy capacity in addressing pandemics. In
Yang 709
China, the then Hubei Provincial Health Commissioner had no health-related background, whereas the Commission’s Chinese Communist Party (CCP) secretary had mainly worked in universities and the Youth League before joining the commission. In Huanggang, another hotspot not far away from Wuhan, the city health commissioner was completely unaware of the city’s response status in front of a central gov- ernment inspection team, which was caught on camera. She had no health-related background either. The lack of public health expertise, particularly infectious disease prevention and control expertise, has been a chronic problem in China. The lead scientist of Chinese National CDC said in a 2019 meeting that the national CDC had lost more than 100 young talents in the preceding 3 years.4 Many local CDCs were downgraded or absorbed by other health-related institutions during the 2018 to 2019 government reorganization.
Similarly, the United States faced the policy capacity chal- lenge in the area of pandemic response. In May 2018, Rear Admiral Timothy Ziemer from the National Security Council was pushed out of job by the administration, and the global health security team he oversaw was disbanded under a reor- ganization. Ziemer was the top White House official respon- sible for the U.S. response in the event of a pandemic. Before joining in the National Security Council, he had been a well- respected public health professional in leading the President’s Malaria Initiative under George W. Bush and Barack Obama.5 When a reporter asked President Trump about his consistently calling for enormous cuts to the CDC, the National Institutes of Health (NIH) and the WHO, the President’s response revealed a clear lack of interest in maintaining institutional- ized capacity on pandemic responses:
We can get money, we can increase staff—we know all the people. This is a question I asked the doctors before. Some of the people we cut, they haven’t used for many, many years, and if we have ever need them we can get them very, very quickly. And rather than spending the money—I’m a business person. I don’t like having thousands of people around when you don’t need them. When we need them, we can get them back very quickly. (Friedersdorf, 2020)
However, both China and the United States benefited from high-profile disease control professionals in their COVID-19 response. In China, Dr. Zhong Nanshan became the public face of its efforts in fighting the coronavirus. He is a fellow of China’s Academy of Engineering and director of the National Clinical Research Center for Respiratory Disease. It was he who led the National Health Commission expert group to Wuhan and announced that the virus can spread between people. He has long been a household name in China as he contributed greatly in curbing SARS in 2003. In the United States, an expert with similar status is Dr. Anthony Fauci, who was appointed director of National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases in 1984 and has advised six presidents on many domestic and global health
issues. Although he has been criticized by President Trump for their disagreements, he has remained on the White House coronavirus task force and has been candid in sharing his professional judgment in press conferences and senate hear- ings.6 A National Public Radio (NPR) report actually com- pared Dr. Zhong with Dr. Fauci.7
China’s coronavirus response also suggests another solu- tion: relying on technology to make available, and take advantage of, evidence from frontline health workers. China’s slow response in the initial stage of the pandemic was often related to the failure of its reporting system: the China Infectious Disease Automated-Alert and Response System. The system was built after SARS and started to operate in 2008. It enables all disease prevention and control institutes, all medical institutions at and above the county level, and nearly all township clinics, to upload information about 39 legally defined infectious disease and public health emergencies in real time. The purpose was to let the National Health Commission have instant surveillance over the whole country. Back in December, 2019, the reporting system did not work because the local authorities in Hubei and Wuhan interfered. New experiments are now being conducted to incorporate machine learning, data mining, crowdsourcing, and community-level governance into the reporting system so that political interference will be avoided. The updated system will have the potential to deliver evidence—when- ever and wherever it emerges—to the central policymaker.
The third solution is to mobilize capacity in institutions such as international organizations and nonprofit organiza- tions. Many universities and think tanks have created their own systematic reviews or repertoire of evidence relating to COVID-19 responses. For example, the Center for Evidence- Based Medicine of the Oxford University created Oxford COVID-19 Evidence Service to provide rapid evidence reviews, data analysis, and thought-provoking writing relating to the pandemic.8 The U.S. National Academies of Sciences, Engineering, and Medicine has convened an ad hoc committee to conduct a comprehensive review of grading of evidence for public health emergency preparedness and response practices, based on literature generated since September 11, 2001.9
Admittedly, having an echelon of professional experts, utilizing technology to increase capacity in generating and delivering evidence, and having reputable nongovernment organizations to create evidence repertoires, do not guaran- tee effective EBM. Politicians may still engage in the fabri- cation, stigmatization, misinterpretation, and politicization of evidence. Evidence, regardless of how scientific or rea- sonable it is, cannot replace the integrity of public leader- ship. Nevertheless, when reasonable evidence is made available from multiple sources, the likelihood of being heard by policymakers will be increased. To some extent, multiple sources of evidence create pressures unto politi- cians—although they are primarily concerned with electoral accountability, they are shaped by professional accountabil- ity, social accountability, and public accountability.
710 American Review of Public Administration 50(6-7)
Does Evidence Have a Role in Pandemic Ethics?
The relationship between evidence and politics often relates to the relationship between facts and values. The common view in EBM is that facts on their own cannot determine what the ends should be and what actions are appropriate; instead, values do (Hammersley, 2013). Many EBM advocates seem to recede from the realm of values and ethics, implicitly accepting an evidence–value dichotomy. Even when a nondi- chotomy view is taken, it is usually in one direction where the evidence cannot escape the influence of values. Indeed, the generation and interpretation of evidence is always shaped by values. But we should not downplay the other direction where sound value decisions cannot be done without evidence and facts, which is why EBM arose in the first place.
The COVID-19 response involves many ethical judg- ments that are rooted in competing values. For example, how to balance individual freedom with collective welfare when decisions of forced quarantine are made? How to balance people’s health and safety with economic development when making reopening decisions? How to balance individuals’ constitutional rights of free speech with there is a need to prevent rumors during a pandemic? China quickly adopted nationwide quarantine and social distancing in curbing the virus spread and then slowly and cautiously moved to reopening. In contrast, President Trump slowly and reluc- tantly announced national emergency and then hastily pushed for reopening. Regardless of the backstage dynamics and institutional differences of the two countries, the choices reflect different prioritization of values.
In recent years, particularly after the 2008 global financial crisis, the ideological polarization and narrow nationalism have been on the rise. As a result, addressing competing val- ues becomes even more important for public administration scholars. This is part of the reason why the public value of governance literature has burgeoned (Bryson et al., 2014). So far, the evidence–value relation has not been an important concern for the public value literature.
Many events in this pandemic suggest that we need be more assertive about the role of evidence in even ethical and value judgments. This is not only about how politicians lie, make accusations, or blame other countries, but also about how public managers and citizens make judgments in a pan- demic. Addressing the latter is important because preventing chaos, panic, hatred, and xenophobia is key to pandemic responses. More than often, people in a pandemic make judg- ments at the expressive level and simply vent their feelings and emotions. Drawing from Aiken (1962), Cooper (2012) identifies four levels of ethical reflection: the expressive level, the moral rules level, the ethical analysis level, and the posteth- ical level. At the expressive level, people do not “attempt to persuade others” (p. 19). “They provide neither evidence nor detailed descriptions of a state of affairs” (p. 19). Some people may go on to the second level, using certain rules, maxims,
and proverbs as a moral guide, but “rationality and systematic reflection” are involved only in a “limited, piecemeal fashion” (p. 21). At the second level, one may cover up a COVID-19 incident following the moral rule of patriotism or “don’t air dirty linen outside the organization.”
A case in point is the Fang Fang Diary. Fang Fang is a famous Chinese writer, who once was the chairwoman of the Hubei Writers Association. During the Wuhan lockdown, as a Wuhan resident, Fang Fang posted an online diary about her fears, frustrations, anger, and hope. Although many people appreciated it, some were unhappy about her paying too much attention to “the dark side” of the pandemic response. When the English version of the diary went on presale on Amazon, the disagreement erupted into a clear social and ideational division. Should she be praised for recording the experiences of ordinal individuals in a pandemic? Should she be sup- ported for exercising her constitutional right of free expres- sion? Should she be despised because she is not patriotic in giving materials for other countries to hold China account- able? Few people on social media went to the ethical analysis level or the postethical level, which requires careful reexami- nation and prioritization of values and worldviews.10
To be fair, if one asks a group of public administration faculty members on the Fang Fang Diary, one will surely receive different judgments. I am less concerned with exactly whether it is right or wrong. Rather, I am worried about the lack of ethical analysis capacity and the unwillingness to hear different voices and to reason together with people of dissent. Public managers always face competing interests and values. Instead of quickly taking sides, they have to develop solutions in a democratic way. Evidence and facts are essential to the ethical analysis capacity and effective dialogue (Cooper, 2012; Lewis & Gilman, 2005). Svara (1997) synthesizes the bases on administrative ethics and proposes an ethics triangle: principle (justice, fairness, equity), consequences (greatest good), and virtue/intuition (character). In understanding the consequences or potential consequences, one must possess evidence and facts. In applying principles such as justice, one must have informa- tion about who will be affected and how.
Usually people agree on abstract values and norms but dis- agree on concrete judgments and solutions. Without evidence and a keen understanding of local contexts and situations, frame reflection is impossible (Schon, 1995). WHO (2016) issued the Guidance for Managing Ethical Issues in Infectious Disease Outbreaks, outlining the principles in addressing issues such as government obligations, community involve- ment, protecting the vulnerable, resource allocation, surveil- lance, freedom of movement, emergency use of unproven interventions, and data sharing. These ethical principles seem generally agreed upon, but how to apply them in specific cul- tural, institutional, and situational contexts is uncertain and requires ethical reasoning based on appropriate evidence. EBM should play a role in such reasoning. If not “speaking truth to power,” it can still mean “dialogue with evidence.”
Yang 711
Conclusion
As government responses to COVID-19 demonstrate, on one hand, in a pandemic situation, EBM matters more than ever, but on the other hand, it is more difficult to achieve than in normal situations. It is clear that we need more evidence and we want our leaders to make policies based on the evidence instead of prejudices, ideologies, or narrow interests. But a pandemic means uncertainty, high potential loss, time pressure, and competing values, which pose questions such as what could and should be counted as evidence, where can we get the evidence, and how should we deal with using the evidence amid competing values. In other words, we need to rethink EBM in crisis situations or pandemics. In developing a good governance of evidence, we need to be conscious about the normal situations versus pandemic-like situations.
In this short essay, I argue that EBM in pandemic-like situa- tions must use different evidentiary standards. The hierarchies of evidence that emphasize its scientific quality are still rele- vant, but “appropriateness,” “reasonableness,” and “trained intuition” must be taken into consideration. Especially in the preparedness, surveillance, and initial response stages, avoid- ing Type I error is more critical. We may want to more system- atically incorporate behavioral economics and decision-making models under uncertainty (Kahneman, 2013) into EBM. Second, it is important to have EBM capacity in and outside government. Trained policy professionals and organizations play a crucial role in coproducing, interpreting, evaluating, and applying evidence. Third, in a democratic society, policies should be based on both evidence and values, but we should strengthen our leaders’ and public managers’ capacity in using evidence in reasoned ethical analysis.
Declaration of Conflicting Interests
The author(s) declared no potential conflicts of interest with respect to the research, authorship, and/or publication of this article.
Funding
The author(s) disclosed receipt of the following financial support for the research, authorship, and/or publication of this article: This research is supported by Project 71633004, Local Governance System and Capacity, supported by National Natural Science Foundation of China.
Notes
1. This essay does not differentiate between evidence-based management from evidence-based decision or evidence-based policy. Public management is considered as a broad term that includes decision making or policy making. The management of a country or state, after all, involves both public policy and organizational management.
2. Although the essay tries to be fair and facts based, some caveats are in order. The pandemic is still evolving and it is impossible to put a definite word on the relative performance of countries. The study of the virus is still ongoing and it is too early to judge what the facts are regarding things such as the
origin of the virus. The information regarding the inner work- ings of governments is restricted and limited, so what we can rely on are mostly publicly available materials.
3. Wenliang Li was infected of COVID-19 on his job fighting against the pandemic. He passed away on February 7. Later on, he was named “Outstanding Individual in Preventing and Controlling COVID-19” by the National Health Commission and awarded “May Fourth Medal” by the National Youth League.
4. According to Dr. Guang Zeng’s speech at the Seminar on Ten- Year Health Care Reform in China, at the China Development Research Center, June 15, Beijing.
5. Sun, L. Top White House official in charge of pandemic response exits abruptly. Washington Post, May 11, 2018.
6. Based on a CNBC report. https://www.cnbc.com/2020/05/13/ coronavirus-trump-says-faucis-warnings-about-reopening- are-not-acceptable.html
7. “They Call Him A Hero: Dr. Zhong Is The Public Face Of China’s War Against Coronavirus,” https://www.npr.org/sec- tions/goatsandsoda/2020/04/02/825957192/dr-zhong-is-the- supreme-commander-in-china-s-war-against-coronavirus
8. https://www.cebm.net/oxford-covid-19-evidence-service/ 9. https://www.nationalacademies.org/our-work/evidence-based-
practices-for-public-health-emergency-preparedness-and- response-assessment-of-and-recommendations-for-the-field
10. I surveyed a group of undergraduate public administration stu- dents regarding their opinion on Fang Fang. Almost all of them had a one-sided answer. Further inquiring their reasoning indi- cated that they did not go beyond the second level and some even were at the first level.
References
Aiken, H. (1962). Reason and conduct. Knopf. Bogenschneider, K., & Corbett, T. (2010). Evidence-based pol-
icy making: Insights from policy-minded researchers and research-minded policymakers. Routledge.
Bryson, J., Crosby, B., & Bloomberg, L. (2014). Public value gov- ernance: Moving beyond traditional public administration and the new public management. Public Administration Review, 74(4), 445–456.
Buss, T., & Buss, N. (2011). Four controversies in evidence-based pub- lic management. In A. Shillabeer, T. Buss, & D. Rousseau (Eds.), Evidence-based public management (pp. 17–45). M.E. Sharpe.
Cairney, P. (2016). The politics of evidence-based policy making. Palgrave Macmillan.
Cohen, M., March, J., & Olsen, J. (1972). A garbage can model of organizational choice. Administrative Science Quarterly, 17, 1–25.
Cooper, T. (2012). The responsible administrator (6th ed.). Jossey- Bass.
Davies, H., Butley, S., & Smith, P. (Eds.). (2000). What works? Evidence-based policy and practice in the public services. Policy Press.
European Advisory Committee on Health Research (EACHR). (2003). Considerations in defining evidence for public health. International Journal of Technology Assessment in Health Care, 19(3), 559–573.
European Centre for Disease Prevention and Control. (2019). The use of evidence in decision-making during public health emer- gencies.
712 American Review of Public Administration 50(6-7)
Friedersdorf, C. (2020, March 17). Trump defended cuts to pub- lic-health agencies, on video. The Atlantic. https://www. theatlantic.com/ideas/archive/2020/03/trump-defended-cuts- public-health-agencies/608158/
Hammersley, M. (2013). The myth of research-based policy and practice. SAGE.
Haskins, R., & Margolis, G. (2015). Show me the evidence. Brookings Institution Press.
Heinrich, C. (2007). Evidence-based policy and performance man- agement. American Review of Public Administration, 37(3), 255–277.
Ioannidis, J. (2020). A fiasco in the making? As the coronavirus pandemic takes hold, we are making decisions without reliable data. https://www.statnews.com/2020/03/17/a-fiasco-in-the- making-as-the-coronavirus-pandemic-takes-hold-we-are-mak- ing-decisions-without-reliable-data/
Jamison, D., Gellband, H., Horton, S., Jha, P., Laxminarayan, R., Mock, C., & Nugent, R. (2018). Disease control priori- ties: Improving health and reducing poverty. World Bank Group.
Jennings, E., & Hall, J. (2012). Evidence-based practice and the use of information in state agency decision making. Biosecurity and Bioterrorism, 9(2), 89–114.
Kahneman, D. (2013). Thinking, fast and slow. Farrar, Strauss, and Giroux.
Lewis, C., & Gilman, S. (2005). The ethics challenge in public ser- vice. Jossey-Bass.
Lipsitch, M. (2020). We know enough now to act decisively against Covid-19. https://www.statnews.com/2020/03/18/we-know- enough-now-to-act-decisively-against-covid-19/
Lipsitch, M., Finelli, L., Heffernan, R., Leung, G., & Redd, S. (2011). Improving the evidence base for decision making during a pan- demic: The example of 2009 Influenza A/H1N1. https://www. researchgate.net/publication/223778650_Improving_the_ Evidence_Base_for_Decision_Making_During_a_Pandemic_ The_Example_of_2009_Influenza_AH1N1
Maynard, R. (2006). Evidence-based decision making: What will it take for the decision makers to care? Journal of Policy Analysis and Management, 25(2), 249–265.
Miller, H. (2018). Intuition and decision making for crisis situa- tions. Taylor & Francis.
Parkhurst, J. (2017). The politics of evidence. Routledge. Pawson, R. (2006). Evidence-based policy: A realist perspective.
SAGE. Pfeffer, J., & Sutton, R. (2006). Hard facts, dangerous half facts
and total nonsense: Profiting from evidence-based manage- ment. Harvard Business School Press.
Schon, D. (1995). Frame reflection: Toward the resolution of intractable policy controversies. Basic Books.
Shillabeer, A., Buss, T., & Rousseau, D. (2011). Evidence-based public management. M.E. Sharpe.
Smith, K. (2013). Beyond evidence-based policy in public health. Palgrave Macmillan.
Stoker, G., & Evans, M. (2016). Evidence-based policy making in the social sciences. Policy Press.
Svara, J. (1997). The ethical triangle: Synthesizing the bases of administrative ethics. In J. Bowman (Ed.), Public integrity annual (pp. 33–41). Council of State Governments. Lexington, KY: Council of State Governments.
Vanlandingham, G., & Drake, E. (2012). Results first: Using evidence-based policy models in state policymaking. Public Performance & Management Review, 35(3), 550–563.
Weiss, C. (1978). Improving the linkage between social research and public policy. In L. Lynn (Ed.), Knowledge and policy: The uncer- tain connection (pp. 23–81). National Academy of Sciences.
Weiss, C. (1999). Research-policy linkages: How much influence does social science research have? In A. Kazancigil, & D. Makinson (Eds.), UNESCO, world social science report (pp. 194–205). United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation.
World Health Organization. (2016). Guidance for managing ethical issues in infectious disease outbreaks.
Wu, X., Howlett, M., & Ramesh, M. (2018). Policy capacity and governance. Palgrave Macmillan.
Author Biography
Kaifeng Yang is a professor in the Schools of Public Administration and Policy, Renmin University and Florida State University. He is the editor of Public Performance & Management Review. His research interests include public and performance management, citizen participation, and public governance.
Analysis tools/cid_tg_strategic_analysis_tools_nov07.pdf 1.2.pdf
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
1
Strategic Analysis Tools Topic Gateway Series No. 34
Prepared by Jim Downey and Technical Information Service October 2007
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
About Topic Gateways
Topic Gateways are intended as a refresher or introduction to topics of interest
to CIMA members. They include a basic definition, a brief overview and a fuller
explanation of practical application. Finally they signpost some further resources
for detailed understanding and research.
Topic Gateways are available electronically to CIMA Members only in the CPD
Centre on the CIMA website, along with a number of electronic resources.
About the Technical Information Service
CIMA supports its members and students with its Technical Information Service
(TIS) for their work and CPD needs.
Our information specialists and accounting specialists work closely together to
identify or create authoritative resources to help members resolve their work
related information needs. Additionally, our accounting specialists can help CIMA
members and students with the interpretation of guidance on financial reporting,
financial management and performance management, as defined in the CIMA
Official Terminology 2005 edition.
CIMA members and students should sign into My CIMA to access these services
and resources.
The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants 26 Chapter Street
London SW1P 4NP
United Kingdom
T. +44 (0)20 7663 5441 F. +44 (0)20 7663 5442 E. [email protected] www.cimaglobal.com
2
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
3
Strategic analysis tools
Definition and concept
Strategic Analysis is:
‘… the process of conducting research on the business environment within which
an organisation operates and on the organisation itself, in order to formulate
strategy.’
BNET Business Dictionary
‘… a theoretically informed understanding of the environment in which an
organisation is operating, together with an understanding of the organisation’s
interaction with its environment in order to improve organisational efficiency and
effectiveness by increasing the organisation’s capacity to deploy and redeploy its
resources intelligently.’
Professor Les Worrall, Wolverhampton Business School
Definitions of strategic analysis often differ, but the following attributes are
commonly associated with it:
1. Identification and evaluation of data relevant to strategy formulation.
2. Definition of the external and internal environment to be analysed.
3. A range of analytical methods that can be employed in the analysis.
Examples of analytical methods used in strategic analysis include:
• SWOT analysis
• PEST analysis
• Porter’s five forces analysis
• four corner’s analysis
• value chain analysis
• early warning scans
• war gaming.
An overview of these strategic analysis tools will be provided in this topic
gateway.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
4
Context
In the current CIMA syllabus, students will study and may be examined on
strategic analysis tools as part of the Management Level Paper 5, Integrated
Management. In addition, the tools are commonly used in many organisations
for strategic decision making. It is therefore an advantage to develop good
strategic analytical skills at an early stage.
Related concepts
Strategic planning; strategic management; business analysis; benchmarking;
balanced scorecard; competitor analysis; CIMA Strategic Scorecard™.
Application
Analytical methods and tools are key to ensuring that consistency and an
appropriate level of rigour is applied to the analysis.
There are a number of important considerations to be aware of when using
analytical tools:
1. The tool must help to answer the question that the organisation has asked.
2. The expected benefit of using the tool needs to be defined and it must be actionable. The more clearly the tool has been defined, the more likely the
analysis will be successful.
3. Many tools benefit from input and collaboration with other people, functions or even organisations. There should be sufficient time for collaboration and
advance warning given so that people can accommodate the analysis.
4. Proper use of analytical tools may be time consuming. It is important to ensure that key stakeholders, for example, the board, senior directors and
company departments are aware of this. Otherwise they may not be able to
provide the necessary commitment to complete the analysis.
The aim of the analytical tool is to sharpen the focus of the analysis and to
ensure a methodical, balanced approach.
All analytical tools rely on historical, backward looking data to extrapolate future
assumptions. It is important to exercise caution when interpreting strategic
analysis results. Otherwise the analysis may be unduly influenced by
preconceptions or pressures within the organisation which seek to validate a
particular strategic assumption.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
5
One of the key skills of a strategic analyst is in understanding which analytical
tools or techniques are most appropriate to the objectives of the analysis. Below
is an overview of some of the more commonly used strategic analysis tools.
SWOT analysis
A SWOT analysis is a simple but widely used tool that helps in understanding the
strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats involved in a project or business
activity.
It starts by defining the objective of the project or business activity and identifies
the internal and external factors that are important to achieving that objective.
strengths and weaknesses are usually internal to the organisation, while
opportunities and threats are usually external. Often these are plotted on a
simple 2x2 matrix.
SWOT analysis diagram
Strengths • What does your organisation do better
than others?
• What are your unique selling points? • What do you competitors and customers
in your market perceive as your
strengths?
• What is your organisations competitive edge?
Opportunities • What political, economic, social-cultural,
or technology (PEST) changes are taking
place that could be favourable to you?
• Where are there currently gaps in the market or unfulfilled demand?
• What new innovation could your organisation bring to the market?
Weakness • What do other organisations do better
than you?
• What elements of your business add little or no value?
• What do competitors and customers in your market perceive as your weakness?
Threats • What political, economic, social-cultural,
or technology (PEST) changes are taking
place that could be unfavourable to you?
• What restraints to you face? • What is your competition doing that
could negatively impact you?
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
6
When using SWOT analysis, it should be ensured that:
• Only specific, verifiable statements are used. An example might be ‘price is £1.50 per unit lower than competition’ rather than ‘good value for
money’.
• Internal and external factors are prioritised so that time is spent concentrating on the most significant factors. This should include a risk
assessment to ensure that high risk or high impact threats and
opportunities are clearly identified and are dealt with in priority order.
• Issues identified are retained for later in the strategy formation process.
• The analysis is pitched at the project or business activity level rather than at a total company level, which may be less actionable.
• It is not used in exclusivity. No one tool is likely to be completely comprehensive, so a mixture of option-generating tools should be used.
PEST analysis
PEST analysis is a scan of the external macro-environment in which an
organisation exists. It is a useful tool for understanding the political, economic,
socio-cultural and technological environment that an organisation operates in. It
can be used for evaluating market growth or decline, and as such the position,
potential and direction for a business.
Political factors. These include government regulations such as employment laws, environmental regulations and tax policy. Other political factors are trade
restrictions and political stability.
Economic factors. These affect the cost of capital and purchasing power of an organisation. Economic factors include economic growth, interest rates, inflation
and currency exchange rates.
Social factors. These impact on the consumer’s need and the potential market size for an organisation’s goods and services. Social factors include population
growth, age demographics and attitudes towards health.
Technological factors. These influence barriers to entry, make or buy decisions and investment in innovation, such as automation, investment incentives and the
rate of technological change.
PEST factors can be classified as opportunities or threats in a SWOT analysis. It is
often useful to complete a PEST analysis before completing a SWOT analysis.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
7
It is also worth noting that the four paradigms of PEST vary in significance
depending on the type of business. For example, social factors are more
obviously relevant to consumer businesses or a B2B business near the consumer
end of the supply chain. Conversely, political factors are more obviously relevant
to a defence contractor or aerospace manufacturer.
Porter’s five forces
Porter's five forces of competitive position analysis was developed in 1979 by
Michael E. Porter of Harvard Business School as a simple framework for assessing
and evaluating the competitive strength and position of a business organisation.
This theory is based on the concept that there are five forces which determine
the competitive intensity and attractiveness of a market. Porter’s five forces helps
to identify where power lies in a business situation. This is useful both in
understanding the strength of an organisation’s current competitive position, and
the strength of a position that an organisation may look to move into.
Strategic analysts often use Porter’s five forces to understand whether new
products or services are potentially profitable. By understanding where power
lies, the theory can also be used to identify areas of strength, to improve
weaknesses and to avoid mistakes.
The five forces are:
1. Supplier power. An assessment of how easy it is for suppliers to drive up prices. This is driven by:
• the number of suppliers of each essential input
• the uniqueness of their product or service
• the relative size and strength of the supplier
• the cost of switching from one supplier to another.
2. Buyer power. An assessment of how easy it is for buyers to drive prices down. This is driven by:
• the number of buyers in the market
• the importance of each individual buyer to the organisation
• the cost to the buyer of switching from one supplier to another.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
If a business has just a few powerful buyers, they are often able to dictate terms.
3. Competitive rivalry. The key driver is the number and capability of competitors in the market. Many competitors, offering undifferentiated
products and services, will reduce market attractiveness.
4. Threat of substitution. Where close substitute products exist in a market, it increases the likelihood of customers switching to alternatives in response to
price increases. This reduces both the power of suppliers and the
attractiveness of the market.
5. Threat of new entry. Profitable markets attract new entrants, which erodes profitability. Unless incumbents have strong and durable barriers to entry, for
example, patents, economies of scale, capital requirements or government
policies, then profitability will decline to a competitive rate.
Porter's five forces diagram
Threats of substitution e.g.
• Buyer switching cost • Buyer propensity to
substitute • Product differentiation
Rivaltry e.g. • Number of competitors • Size of competitors • Industry growth rate • Differentiation • Exit barriers
Threat of new entry e.g.
• Switching costs • Economies of scale • Learning curve • Capital requirements • Patents
Buyer power e.g. • Buyer information • Buyer volume • Buyer price sensitivity • Buyer switching costs • Bargaining leverage
Supplier power e.g. • Supplier concentration • Importance of volume
to supplier • Cost relative to selling
price
Based on Michael Porter's five forces of competitive position model
ww.businessballs.com/portersfiveforcesofcompetition.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
8
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
Four corner’s analysis
Developed by Michael Porter, the four corner’s analysis is a useful tool for
analysing competitors. It emphasises that the objective of competitive analysis
should always be on generating insights into the future.
The model can be used to:
• develop a profile of the likely strategy changes a competitor might make and how successful they may be
• determine each competitor’s probable response to the range of feasible strategic moves other competitors might make
• determine each competitor’s probable reaction to the range of industry shifts and environmental changes that may occur.
The ‘four corners’ refers to four diagnostic components that are essential to
competitor analysis: future goals; current strategy; assumptions; and capabilities.
A summary of Porter's four corner's analysis
Drivers • Financial goals • Corporate culture • Organisational structure • Leadership team backgrounds • External constraints • Business philosophy
Current strategy • How the business creates value • Where the business is choosing to
invest • Relationships and networks the
business has developed
Management assumptions • Company’s perceptions of its
strengths and weaknesses • Cultural traits • Organisational value • Perceived industry forces • Belief about competitor’s goals
Capabilities • Marketing skills • Ability to service channels • Skills and training to work force • Patents and copyrights • Financial strength • Leadership qualities of CEO
COMPETITOR’S FUTURE STRATEGY
MOTIVATION ACTIONS
9
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
10
Many organisations carry out basic SWOT analysis and have an appreciation for
their competitor’s strategies. However, motivational factors are often overlooked
and yet are generally the key drivers of competitive behaviour.
Understanding the following four components can help predict how a
competitor may respond to a given situation.
Motivation – drivers. Analysing a competitor’s goals assists in understanding whether they are satisfied with their current performance and market position.
This helps predict how they might react to external forces and how likely it is that
they will change strategy.
Motivation – management assumptions. The perceptions and assumptions that a competitor has about itself, the industry and other companies will
influence its strategic decisions. Analysing these assumptions can help identify
the competitor’s biases and blind spots.
Actions – strategy. A company’s strategy determines how a competitor competes in the market. However, there can be a difference between ‘intended
strategy’ (the strategy as stated in annual reports, interviews and public
statements) and the ‘realised strategy’ (the strategy that the company is following
in practice, as evidenced by acquisitions, capital expenditure and new product
development).
Where the current strategy is yielding satisfactory results, it is reasonable to
assume that an organisation will continue to compete in the same way as it
currently does.
Actions – capabilities. The drivers, assumptions and strategy of an organisation will determine the nature, likelihood and timing of a competitor’s actions.
However, an organisation’s capabilities will determine its ability to initiate or
respond to external forces.
Value chain analysis
Before making a strategic decision, it is important to understand how activities
within the organisation create value for customers. One way to do this is to
conduct a value chain analysis.
Value chain analysis is based on the principle that organisations exist to create
value for their customers. In the analysis, the organisation’s activities are divided
into separate sets of activities that add value. The organisation can more
effectively evaluate its internal capabilities by identifying and examining each of
these activities. Each value adding activity is considered to be a source of
competitive advantage.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
11
The three steps for conducting a value chain analysis are:
1. Separate the organisation’s operations into primary and support
activities. Primary activities are those that physically create a product, as well as market
the product, deliver the product to the customer and provide after-sales
support. Support activities are those that facilitate the primary activities.
2. Allocate cost to each activity. Activity cost information provides managers with valuable insight into the
internal capabilities of an organisation.
3. Identify the activities that are critical to customer’s satisfaction and market success. There are three important considerations in evaluating the role of each activity
in the value chain.
• Company mission. This influences the choice of activities an organisation undertakes.
• Industry type. The nature of the industry influences the relative importance of activities.
• Value system. This includes the value chains of an organisation’s upstream and downstream partners in providing products to end
customers.
Value chain analysis is a comprehensive technique for analysing an organisation’s
source of competitive advantage.
Early warning systems
The purpose of strategic early warning systems is to detect or predict strategically
important events as early as possible. They are often used to identify the first
scene of attack from a competitor or to assess the likelihood of a given scenario
becoming reality.
The seven key components of an early warning system are:
1. Market definition. A clear definition of the scope of the arena to be scrutinised. For example, is the arena a particular geographical region, brand
or market?
2. Open systems. An ability to capture a wide range of information on relevant competitors.
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
12
3. Filtering. Information that has been collected on the arena needs to be filtered according to significance. Expert interpretation is required in order to
identify particular events that signify strategic moves or shifts.
4. Predictive intelligence. Using knowledge of the forces driving a competitor to predict which direction they are likely to take. One technique is to build
likely scenarios and actively seek the signals that confirm the scenario. The
predictions need to be assessed for their probability of occurring and
potential impact.
5. Communicating intelligence. Ensuring that the right people in an organisation receive regular briefing on key signals.
6. Contingency planning. Events that have a high potential impact or probability of occurring may merit contingency plans, for example, a change
of strategy or mitigating actions.
7. A cyclical process. The process of scrutinising information for new warning signals should never stop. While the emphasis is on emerging threats and
opportunities, the process should be flexible enough to tackle unexpected
shorter term developments too.
War gaming
War games are a useful technique for identifying competitive vulnerabilities and
misguided internal assumptions about competitors’ strategies.
Simulations of competitive scenarios are used to explore the implications of
changes in strategy in a ‘no risk’ environment. They also encourage new ways of
thinking about the competitive context. War games are often particularly useful
for organisations facing critical strategic decisions.
A typical business war game has the following characteristics:
• an off-site venue
• senior managers representing a cross-functional mix of participants
• two to three full days’ duration
• four or more teams of between four to eight people each. Each team represents either the sponsoring company or one of its competitors
• preparation time in which each team receives a dossier describing the company they are representing, and its strengths and weaknesses
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
13
It also has the following characteristics.
• A structure where games comprise several ‘moves’ or decision rounds. Each move consists of a fixed, predetermined amount of time ranging from a
couple of months to several years. During each move, teams make and carry
out strategic decisions. After each move, teams assess their positions relative
to other teams.
• A ‘control team’ of facilitators who serve as the board of directors. They ensure that strategic plans are acceptable and legal. They also facilitate the
debrief, in which participants review the merit of each strategy.
Case studies
The Amway case study on The Times 100 website shows how Amway was able to move its business forward by choosing an appropriate marketing strategy. It
demonstrates the connection between Amway's own strategies and the defining
matrix of strategies developed by Ansoff in 'Strategies for Diversification'
published by Harvard Business Review in 1957. www.thetimes100.co.uk [Accessed 12 February 2008]
The Coursework4you.co.uk website provides a number of case studies which examine strategic analysis models describing PEST analysis, Porter's five forces,
value chain analysis, SWOT analysis and Boston Consulting Group (BCG) matrix
techniques. The validity of the analytical models is evaluated by applying them to
companies such as Diageo, Lastminute.com, Marks and Spencer, Ryanair and
Wal-Mart. www.coursework4you.co.uk/sprtbus53.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
The Corporate Strategy Board provides a number of case studies on the use of
strategic analysis tools in companies such as IBM, Procter and Gamble and Shell.
The website is available to registered users only.
www.csb.executiveboard.com/Public/Default.aspx [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
14
References
Articles
Comai, A. and Tena, J. Early warning systems for your competitive landscape.
Society of Competitive Intelligence Professionals, 2007. Volume 10, Number 3,
May-June 2007
Treat, J., Thibault, G. and Asin, A. Dynamic competitive simulation: war gaming
as a strategic tool. Strategy and Business, Second Quarter 1996, pp 46-54
Online articles
BNET Business Directory (2007). Strategic analysis.
http://dictionary.bnet.com/definition/Strategic+Analysis.html [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Boulton, Dr. W.R. (2001). Understanding the strategic analysis model.
www.auburn.edu/~boultwr/index.html [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Businessballs (2006). . PEST market analysis tool
www.businessballs.com/pestanalysisfreetemplate.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Businessballs (2006). Porter’s five forces model.
www.businessballs.com/portersfiveforcesofcompetition.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Mindtools (2007). SWOT analysis: discover new opportunities. Manage and
eliminate threats www.mindtools.com/pages/article/newTMC_05.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Quick MBA (2007). PEST analysis. www.quickmba.com/strategy/pest/ [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Quick MBA (2007). Porter’s five forces.
www.quickmba.com/strategy/porter.shtm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Skillsoft Corporation (2007). Value chain analysis.
http://rhi.skillport.com/SkillPortFE/login/login.cfm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
15
Books
Middleton, J. (2003). The ultimate strategy library: the 50 most influential
strategic ideas of all time. Oxford: Capstone
Porter, M.E. (2004). Competitive strategy: techniques for analyzing industries and
competitors. New York; London: Free Press
Porter, M.E. (1998). Competitive advantage: creating and sustaining superior
performance. New York; London: Free Press
Worrell, L. (1998). Strategic analysis: a scientific art. Wolverhampton:
Wolverhampton Business School
Further Information
Websites
The following websites provide a wide range of materials on the topic of
strategic analysis tools.
Businessballs.com
Businessballs.com is a free ethical learning and development resource for people
and organisations. It includes a number of free resources on strategic analysis,
including free materials, exercises, tools and templates.
www.businessballs.com/pestanalysisfreetemplate.htm [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Corporate Strategy Board
Subscription website offering information, case studies and tools on strategic
analysis. www.csb.executiveboard.com/Public/Default.aspx [Accessed 12 February 2008]
Institute for Strategy and Competitiveness (ISC)
Based at Harvard Business School, the ICS is led by Michael Porter and looks at
competition and its implications for company strategy, competitiveness and
solutions to social problems. www.isc.hbs.edu [Accessed 13 February 2008]
Mind Tools
Provides extensive high quality web content, including articles on strategic
analysis topics, which are freely available online. www.mindtools.com [Accessed 13 February 2008]
Strategic Analysis Tools
Topic Gateway Series
QuickMBA
An online knowledge resource for business administration. Topics are presented
as frameworks and summaries on the various subjects of business administration,
including strategic analysis. www.quickmba.com/strategy [Accessed 13 February 2008]
Society of Competitive Intelligence Professionals (SCIP)
SCIP is a global organisation for those involved in the practice of collecting
competitive intelligence. The society produces conferences, ‘Webinars,’ an online
archive of articles related to the field and a quarterly journal. www.scip.org [Accessed 13 February 2008]
Strategy + Business
Online magazine published by the global management and technology
consulting firm, Booz Allen Hamilton. S + B draws on a combination of
journalists, academics, consultants and corporate strategists to contribute articles.
www.strategy-business.com [Accessed 13 February 2008]
16
Copyright ©CIMA 2007
First published in 2007 by:
The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants 26 Chapter Street London SW1P 4NP United Kingdom
Printed in Great Britain
No responsibility for loss occasioned to any person acting or refraining from action as a result of any material in this publication can be accepted by the authors or the publishers.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means method or device, electronic (whether now or hereafter known or developed), mechanical, photocopying, recorded or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publishers.
Permission requests should be submitted to CIMA at [email protected]
Analysis tools/ebook how to apply bal scorcard in diff settings.pdf
How can you apply the Balanced Scorecard in different settings? Introduction
In this chapter we will describe how you can apply the Balanced Scorecard in different settings. We will start by tackling the issue of how to create a Balanced Scorecard that operates across the different levels of a business. We will then look at the issue of support functions (such as HR, finance, maintenance), where you are trying to align the activity of the function with the performance of the business. Finally, we will touch on the use of the Balanced Scorecard in the public and ‘not-for-profit’ sectors.
08 IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 161
very similar, you can deploy the same set of measures to all the branches. You can compare the performance of the different branches by their scorecards, and even create league tables of how well different branches are doing on different measures. You can then add up the performances of all the branches in a region, to create a regional scorecard, and you can add these regions up to create a business scorecard.
Creating a scorecard for a branch network can have many advantages:
1. Because all the branches are very similar, you can create a single scorecard that applies across all the branches. This means management time invested in creating that scorecard is well spent as it can be applied in multiple situations.
2. Most organisations want their customers to receive the same level of service at all their branches. The scorecard can reinforce this by measuring the key attributes of customer service against centrally set target levels.
3. Branches can be compared in league tables. This can create friendly rivalry, although it has to be managed carefully. The scorecard can also be used to identify best practice and motivate branch managers to improve the running of their part of the business.
However, there are a couple of issues to watch:
1. Be careful, as it is not possible to set the same targets for all branches. Your customer service targets may all be the same, but targets for turnover, profitability and return on investment will have to be set to reflect the local circumstances. If they do not, branch managers may not react positively to the scorecard.
2. You may have great efficiencies from creating a single scorecard that applies to all your branches, but do not forget that local buy in will be required if the scorecard is
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 163
Cascading the Balanced Scorecard
The Balanced Scorecard originally had its origins in creating a performance measurement dashboard for a business unit. A business unit is a relatively homogeneous organisation that has customers and usually operates as a profit centre. Most small companies comprise a single business unit, but it is also possible to have a very large company operating as a single business unit. The approach to creating a scorecard that we described in Chapter 3 assumes this.
But what happens if you are not developing a scorecard for a business unit? What happens if the business units form part of a larger organisation with a divisional structure? What happens if you want to cascade the Balance Scorecard to the functional departments?
We will address these issues here.
Branch structures
You only have to walk down the high street of any large town to see the local branches of larger businesses. The high street banks and retail outlets are ubiquitous, as are the fast food outlets, coffee shops and estate agents. But go off the high street just a little way and you will run into branches of national builders’ merchants, specialist car repairers, hotel chains and even serviced office suppliers. Many large organisations have branch networks, or operate a franchise service, which appears as though they have a branch network.
So how do you create a Balanced Scorecard for a branch network? One way of doing this is by treating the branch as the business
unit. By analysing the customers’ requirements and merging these with the requirements of the owners and other important stakeholders, you can create a success map that applies to any of the branches in your network. Assuming that all the branches are
162 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 162
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 165164 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
If you create branch scorecards that roll up to form regional scorecards and eventually to a business wide scorecard, you must always consider whether other factors need to be included at the corporate business level. Branch scorecards will reflect how the business operates, but there are usually other issues that need to be added at the corporate level.
Firstly, the business will have central support functions. These may include a central buying function, an HR department and an accounting and finance function. You will have to decide if you want to create scorecards for these departments, or risk people
In one kitchen, the measures were simply passed to the relevant managers, the data collected and reported back. In fact, very little changed.
In the other kitchen, the management team was annoyed with the imposition of the measures. We had a meeting and decided we could do better ourselves. So we set up a couple of half-day workshops where we looked at our business, how it was structured and what we should measure and report. At the end of the second workshop we compared what we had developed with what had been sent from head office. There were differences, but we soon realised that the differences were really very minor and we finally adopted the head office set of measures for running the business. We then deployed these measures to the various departments and reviewed our results in the management meetings on a weekly basis. Performance started to improve, and we published the results around the business. Interestingly, in this kitchen, the initial annoyance with the imposition of the measures from head office had created a process that allowed us to question and then understand why the new measures were appropriate. This process created the buy in that led to the performance measures being used to run the business very effectively.
going to be successful. You will need to invest time and effort to do this.
Getting the buy in The division of a builders’ merchant set out to create a Balanced Scorecard. This started with an introduction to performance measurement for the directors and senior managers at which the Balanced Scorecard was discussed, together with the approach that would be used to create and deploy a scorecard in their business. Following this initial launch, a smaller group comprising the directors and divisional managers worked together through a series of workshops, creating and refining their success map. Once this was agreed in outline, the results were presented back to the regional managers who were encouraged to review and critique what had been developed. This cemented the support for the scorecard at the senior level, but the approach still had to be rolled out to the branches. A conference was arranged with all branch managers and the new measurement system was presented. But this was only the start of the process: to ensure that all the branch managers in the business understood the scorecard, a ‘train the trainer’ programme was developed. Senior managers were trained to train the branch managers, and the branch managers were trained to train their own staff. In this way the scorecard was rolled out across an organisation with over several hundred branches.
Dumping the scorecard on others I worked for an international airline catering company with kitchens at Heathrow and Gatwick airports. One day we received a set of new performance measures from head office and were asked to report regularly on them.
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 164
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 167166 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
Cascading the scorecard down the organisation by creating sets of success maps at different levels is a time-consuming process. However, the approach has all the benefits of engaging with those managing the business. It creates an understanding of their objectives and how they fit into the objectives of the business. If you adopt this approach you will foster ownership of the success maps and the performance measures.
To quote Mark Bromley, Head of Business Performance of EDF Energy: ‘By taking a facilitated approach, I get 80% of the measures I want and 100% of the buy in. If I simply told them what to measure, I might get all the measures I want, but only 10% of the commitment to use them.’
Divisions and subsidiary companies
In a branch network it is usually the case that all the branches are doing similar activities, serving similar customers and following a single strategy. However, in many organisations, the corporate
NHBC NHBC (the National House-Building Council) provides warranties on new homes in the UK. As part of its activities, it also inspects the building of new homes and provides building control services. Creating a scorecard for NHBC has involved engaging each of the main service functions in developing their own success map. The claims team has created a success map that explicitly explained and measured how they contributed to NHBC’s success through the efficient and effective handling of customers and builders as well as the insurance claims. Similarly, success maps have been created for the inspection teams, building control teams and customer service teams.
seeing them as being ‘too lofty to be measured’. We describe how to create support function scorecards later in this chapter.
Secondly, there may be activities that are conducted at the business level but not in the branches. The management of key accounts may fall into this category, as will the management of key suppliers. In this situation, the branch scorecard may provide a useful point to start the process, but you will have to review the activities of the business in its wider setting before settling on a business level scorecard.
Cascading the scorecard down the organisation
Many organisations do not have a branch structure. In this case, the business unit itself is often structured functionally into sales and marketing, operations, product development, finance and HR. This necessitates the development of different scorecards for the different functions.
In our experience, the most effective way of doing this is to create success maps for each of the functions.
EDF Energy EDF Energy, who operate in the South and East of England, distribute electricity to over a quarter of the UK population. Each year EDF Energy’s networks branch creates a success map and a scorecard based on the company’s ambitions. Once this is created, it is cascaded to the next level. Each of the business units then takes the branch strategy map and uses it as the starting point for developing their own strategy map and scorecard. Using a similar process, they develop their objectives and measures so that they align with and support the branch goals. This process is then repeated with the functions and teams (see Figure 8.1).
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 166
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 169168 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
So, in developing a scorecard across divisions and subsidiary companies, it is important to define the role of the centre and of the subsidiary. Making all subsidiaries use the same set of measures can be counter-productive because the measures should reflect the strategic imperatives at the level of the organisation to which they are applied. The trick here is to balance the parent organisation’s need for homogeneity across its business with the level of local discretion you are going to allow in order to compete with local competition.
Allowing for difference An electronics company supplied Europe. The head office was in the UK, but there were four regions and subsidiary companies operating in each of the main countries. In creating a scorecard, we built a success map that described in principle what the organisation had to do to be successful. However, there were key differences in how this would be implemented in the different countries. At the time, in the UK, the internet was becoming an extremely important route to market. In other countries, developing the dealer network was much more important.
The solution was to create a scorecard that had common objectives and some common measures. For example, all the financial objectives and measures were common between the head office, region and country, as were the HR and people development measures and measures of customer satisfaction. There were then common objectives around developing channels to market, but the measures used for each country were developed specifically to align with the local strategy. In this way, we differentiated between those objectives that everyone in the group were charged with fulfilling and those over which local management had discretion.
As the group managing director put it: ‘I now have a framework that allows me to have a structured conversation about performance with any of my regional directors or any of my country managers.’
structure is very different. At the extreme, all the subsidiary companies have their own customers and strategies, and the principal role of head office is to provide finance and management control.
Obviously if all the companies are in the situation of managing their own destiny with little or no direction from the centre, then there is no need to have a Balanced Scorecard that is cascaded from one level in the organisation to the next. Most conglomerates in this situation simply ask for financial information to be provided on a regular basis, and occasionally key indicators of risk and compliance, such as health and safety figures or brand loyalty.
The norm, however, is where there is some alignment or co- ordination between the subsidiaries, and this is where the scorecard can help develop an understanding of exactly what is required, and how much freedom of action subsidiary companies have.
• Exec divisional level
A divisional strategy map A divisional score card
15 BU strategy maps 15 BU score cards
60 functional strategy maps 60 functional score cards
Team scorecards
Coaching for performance (11,000 approx)
Ambitions, divisional objectives, vision, corporate objectives,
business strategy and regulators’ objectives
• Business unit
• Team
• Individual
Figure 8.1: How EDF Energy cascade their scorecard (Adapted from Martinez et al, 2006)
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 168
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 171170 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
Figure 8.2: A maintenance scorecard
Figure 8.2 provides an example of a scorecard developed from taking this approach, but if you can only involve the service function managers without their internal customers you may still encounter the three challenges we outlined above.
The second approach is to create a success map. This overcomes most of the issues raised above by involving the support function managers and their internal customers. Figure 8.3 shows an example created for a maintenance function, which supported three operating units. In this case, the operating units were unhappy with the support they were receiving and the maintenance function felt unable to maintain the equipment properly.
Financial perspective
Objectives
Total spend
Targets
Within budget
Internal customer perspective
Objectives
Projects on time Machine up time
Targets
Milestones met 95%
Internal process perspective
Objectives
Project plan Maintenance schedule
Targets
Milestones met 95% adherence
Development perspective
Objectives
Staff skill completed
Targets
Skill matrix
Supplier perspective
Objectives
Machine availability for maintenance
Targets
95%
Support functions
The first question that is often asked is ‘should we measure our support functions’ performance?’ Every organisation we have dealt with has come to the conclusion that support functions should be treated in the same way as the rest of the business.
Aligning support functions with the rest of the business can be a challenge. Firstly, they do not always see how they fit in. Secondly, they often see their world in terms of their own functional specialism. Thirdly, there can be a real tension between how much the support function wants to spend and how much the functions being supported want to pay. Most support functions want to give a ‘Rolls Royce’ service, but this comes at a cost that other parts of the organisation do not want to bear.
We will describe two approaches here. The first approach is to create a simple scorecard by working with support function managers and considering the following questions:
1. What does the internal customer require from you and how will they measure your performance?
2. How will you know whether you are going to deliver what the internal customer requires and how will you measure this?
3. What services are you reliant on from other departments (including the internal customer) to deliver your service and how will you measure this?
4. What are the financial constraints and how will you measure these?
5. What skills and resources will you require to deliver the service and how will you measure this?
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 170
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 173172 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
Figure 8.3: Maintenance department success map.
Balanced Scorecard in the public and ‘not-for-profit’ sectors
Performance Measures in the public sector are very much in the public eye. School league tables, survival rates for surgery and detection rates for crime are frequently reported and commented upon. Measures are used for a variety of purposes – many of which are akin to those in the commercial sector – but some of which may be more connected with public relations. There are certainly sensitivities in the public sector to which most private sector organisations are not normally subjected.
Balanced Scorecards are used in the public sector. The way they are developed is by amending the presentation of the perspectives so the customer perspective appears at the top (see Figure 8.4)
O p
e ra
ti o
n m
e a
s u
re s
M a
in te
n a
n c
e m
e a
s u
re s
o f
p e
rf o
rm a
n c
e d
ri v
e rs
Max throughput per operating hour
Consistent product quality
Maximise planned plant availability
Maintenance cost per tonne
Value of stock held
Speed of response
Speed of repair
Mean time between breakdown
Plant availability for maintenance
K e y
m a
in te
n a
n c
e m
e a
s u
re s
Staff motivation (attendance)
Staff skills matrix
Accuracy of sales forecast
Cost of lost production
On-time deliveryThe maintenance success map We started the process by
asking the internal customer – in this case the production department – to identify their key objectives. These were output, quality and on-time delivery. We then asked them to highlight the key contribution the maintenance function made to achieving these goals. Maximising plant availability was identified as being the key contribution. Having established a dialogue between the two groups, we asked the maintenance team to create a success map to describe how this would be achieved. By engaging both the customer and the supplier in these debates, both gained an understanding of the other’s point of view Issues were raised, including maintenance’s concern that they were not always given access to the plant to do their work at the times planned, and the reliance on other departments for information, the sales forecast being the most important in this case.
Finally, we ran into the issue of the cost of maintenance. We resolved this by creating two factors that had to be balanced, the cost of lost production and the maintenance cost per tonne produced. Production had always complained about the cost of maintenance but had never considered the costs the organisation was incurring when the equipment was down. Maintenance had always provided a service, but had never had a guide as to how cost effective they were. Using the two cost indicators and keeping the ‘maximising plant availability’ objective in mind, we created a means of measuring the interface between the production operation and its support maintenance service. The success map we produced enabled both parties to understand how each had an impact on the other.
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 172
HOW CAN YOU APPLY THE BALANCED SCORECARD IN DIFFERENT SETTINGS? 175174 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
One of the key difficulties faced by managers in the public sector is that they have targets imposed on them by government. These are national targets and may or may not be appropriate at a local level. This is compounded in the local government setting by various government departments and agencies wanting different information from different departments within the local authority. Creating a top-level scorecard for a local authority then becomes extremely difficult, as there are so many competing demands.
In the ‘not-for-profit’ sector, most organisations will find that their scorecard will follow the example shown in Figure 8.4. But there are two important points to note.
1. When you undertake a review of customers’ requirements, you must remember that your organisation is not there to deliver all the customers’ needs. Therefore you should identify precisely which of the requirements you will endeavour to provide for and those you will not. You should make this very explicit to everyone involved so that the focus is clear. It will also remove hours of wasted argument.
2. A recent piece of research has shown that donors are increasingly asking for their own measures of performance as a prerequisite for the donation. Be very careful in this situation, as it will create a plethora of measures that confuse staff and undermine the performance of the organisation.
In fact all of these groups have a stake in the prison service and you could look at their requirements through the Balanced Scorecard framework above. But it is clear that wants and needs are very different and often conflicting so you need a process of creating a scorecard that resolves these issues.
Figure 8.4: The basic format of the Balanced Scorecard for public services
The biggest difference is that in the private sector the outcome of all the Balanced Scorecard activity is profits and returns for the owners or shareholders, whilst in the public sector, the emphasis is on getting the best outcomes for the customers (dare we say stakeholders) whilst operating within a limited financial budget.
The real difficulty with the Balanced Scorecard is that it is not a multiple stakeholder framework and so doesn’t lend itself easily to many public sector situations. The Performance Prism (which we will describe in Chapter 9) explicitly deals with multiple stakeholders and therefore adapts to use in the public sector more easily.
Customer Perspective
Financial Accountability Perspective
Internal Process Perspective
Learning and Growth Perspective
Who is the customer? Take a simple example of the prison service. Who is the customer? Is it the prisoners themselves who have committed the crimes? Is it the judiciary who have sent the individuals to gaol? Is it the government who have a policy of reducing crime? Or is it the general public who want to feel safer at home?
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 174
The tools and approaches we describe in this book are useful in the public and ‘not-for-profit’ sectors. Many of the issues are the same and the rigour of working through the processes with some commonsense adaptations is worthwhile. However, if your organisation is operating within these two sectors you should strongly consider the Performance Prism approach described in Chapter 9.
Conclusion
In this chapter we have described how the Balanced Scorecard can be used in a variety of organisational settings including single business units and groups of companies. We have also described how it should be cascaded down the organisation and applied to support service functions. Finally, we touched on the issues raised by the public and ‘not for profit’ sectors.
In the next chapter we will look at two other frameworks – the Performance Prism (which is particularly useful as an alternative to the Balanced Scorecard in a complex multi-stakeholder environment) and the process framework (which integrates the scorecard with your business processes).
176 INSTANT MANAGER BALANCED SCORECARD
INSTANT TIP
Adapt the scorecard to your situation and cascade it down
the organisation.
IM Balanced scorecard 18/3/08 9:16 am Page 176
Analysis tools/Fishbone analysis article.pdf
Supply Chain Risk Management Framework: A Fishbone Analysis Approach Kiran J. Desai, Louisiana Tech University
Mayur S. Desai, Texas Southern University
Lucy Ojode, Texas Southern University
Virtual corporations and global outsourcing activities have become a norm in today’s com petitive business environment so that firms can focus on their core competencies (Handfield and Nichols Jr., 2002). But there is a downside: They expose firms to ferocious hypercompeti- tive dynamics (D’Aveni, 1994) that are often heightened by global economic instability and unanticipated natural disasters. Consequently, firms tighten their networks to substitute and secure input sources in the upstream while stay ing watchful over revenue bases downstream. The result is extensive global sourcing of inputs, systems, and processes that give firms access to world-class suppliers with embedded flexibility, often at competitive rates. At the same time, ac cess to world-wide customers expands revenue streams, enabling firms to stay competitive. Such capabilities with complex networks are credited with enabling global manufacturers to bounce back much faster from disasters and uncontrol lable forces-as happened following the 2011 Japanese Tsunami. However, these advantages come with the challenge of coordinating diverse global sources and sustained value creation to world-wide customers. Furthermore, relating to such diverse external entities exposes firms to business and nonbusiness risks. Hence, the need for effective management of these relationships (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004).
Firms relate to upstream partners such as suppliers and downstream partners such as cus tomers through a supply chain - a network of suppliers, factories, warehouses, distribution centers, and retailers, through which raw mate rials are acquired, transformed, produced, and delivered to customers (Misra and Sinha, 2010).
34
The chain consists of activities associated with the flow and transformation of goods from raw materials through to the end user, including the associated material and information flows (Hand- field and Nichols Jr., 2002). Thus, supply chain encompasses all parties involved, directly or in directly, in fulfilling a customer request (Chopra and Meindl, 2004).
Given the diversity of entities and activities in a typical supply chain, firms need to manage the chain effectively to reap its benefits. Hence, the importance of supply chain management, that is, the set of synchronized decisions and activities that effectively integrate suppliers, manufac turers, transporters, warehouses, retailers, and customers. Effective management ensures that the right product or service is distributed in the right quantities and quality to the proper loca tions in a timely manner to the satisfaction of the customer (Misra and Sinha, 2010). Effective supply chain management integrates the man agement of entities in the chain and activities through cooperative relationships (Handfield and Nichols Jr., 2002). Indeed, there are indications that integrating effective business processes among supply chain member organizations and high levels of information sharing to create high- performing value systems can contribute to op eration and financial performance (Simchi-Levi, Kyratzoglou, and Vassiliadis, 2013). However, such performance-enhancing integration within a supply chain can expose a firm to risk from complex synchronized coordination of internal processes with networks of external entities. Through effective management, firms can reduce the form and magnitude of potential risks. That is, firms can pursue supply chain risk manage-
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
ment approaches through risk measurement and assessment; risk evaluation, risk mitigation and contingency plans; and risk control and monitor ing via data management systems (Tummala and Schoenherr, 2011). Alexandra used a confirma tory approach to measure risk in supply chains (2013); Yu et al. studied a conceptual model for supply chain and company risk propensity (Yubing Yu, 2015); Suharjiti and Marimin sug gested using DSS for risk balance in agriculture (Suharjito, 2015); Satyendra investigated risk mitigation strategies used in the Indian auto mobile industry (Satyendra Kr. Sharma, 2014); Cruz suggested using social responsibility to manage risks (2013); and Rajesh et al. identified that the supply chain risks are interlinked, so that one mitigating risk strategy may reduce overall supply chain risk (Rajesh, 2015).
In this theoretical paper we adopt a fishbone diagram as a supply chain risk management framework to identify potential sources of risk. It also maps the identified risks (problems) to a organizational responsibility matrix and suggests action plans. Although global supply chains also face nonbusiness risks, we focus on the business risks in this paper. We believe that the fishbone diagram works best for analyzing systematic risks, so we did not apply it to non-systematic risks that confront supply chains, such as natural disasters. The following section discusses the framework.
Fishbone Diagram Fishbone or Ishikawa diagrams, known for their appearance as the skeleton of a fish, are cause and effect models devised in the 1960s by Pro fessor Kaoru Ishikawa, a quality management pioneer. Such diagrams are graphical representa tions of causes of specific effects under investi gation. They allow potential causes of a problem to be broken down into basic elements, and direct a problem-solver to possible causes of the problem. A fishbone diagram approach employs graphical means, combining brainstorming with a type of concept map to diagnose potential causes of a problem. We adapt this approach to identify causes of typical business problems in a sup ply chain. Since typical business problems have multiple causes, the fishbone diagram provides a structured way to identify potential root causes. The diagram further helps in breaking down each cause to basic elements. The fishbone diagram approach is particularly ideal for a multi-prong problem because the graphical representation of the cause-effect provides a comprehensive and
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
holistic overview of the problem under investiga tion.
Fishbone diagram and supply chain risk management Potential risks (problems) in a supply chain are essentially embedded in multi-faceted relation ships since the global supply chain is a complex business phenomenon with interrelated inte grated components. Furthermore, any part of this complex relationships that function in a dynamic and volatile environment could compromise the whole chain. Some have likened contemporary supply chains to complex biological systems like the human body that is potentially “resilient and self-healing, yet vulnerable to some specific, seemingly small weakness” (Lohr, 2011). Since the fishbone diagram is a systematic approach to solving multi-factor complex problems, its ap proach to main causes makes it particularly suit able as a supply chain risk management tool. The global supply chain is predisposed to risks such as defective parts or products, counterfeit prod ucts, delays in delivery, compromised warehous ing and storage, and so on. Each of these could result from any number of causes and could lead to further compromise down the chain. Hence the need for a structured approach to analyzing relationships in the chain to pinpoint the link between the compromised portion and the rest of the chain to assess the damage. The fishbone diagram technique is ideal for such complex situations because it allows pictorial labels and displays each part of the chain for a systematic overview of potential effects and corresponding causes.
In this study we discuss four categories of potential effects: defect, delay, counterfeit, and general error. Each of these is potentially influ enced by several factors, as shown in Figures 1 -4 respectively. Each Figure is followed by a discussion of how a fishbone diagram is applied to the underlying causes or influential factors of the specific effect. We discuss these factors in the fishbone diagram as well as the correspond ing redress provided in the responsibility and action planning matrices (Tables 1-8). Each of the potential causes and effects is represented by a fishbone diagram-hence, the four diagrams in this study.
For each fishbone diagram, we developed responsibility and action planning matrices. A responsibility matrix is a tabular arrangement that lists each cause identified in the fishbone diagram with a description of each cause, the
35
Figure 1. SCR - Defect
DESIGN RAW
MATERIAL MANUFACTURING
entity responsible for handling the cause, the degree of control in managing the cause, and the action needed to address the problem. Simi larly, we developed a related action planning matrix, that is, a tabular arrangement that lists the actions identified in the responsibility ma trix detailing the means for redress, such as the responsible party, the deadline for redress, and resource allocation for implementation. In short, we developed a set of matrices for each of the effects in the fishbone diagrams. The rest of this paper discusses the fishbone diagrams and the corresponding matrices.
Methodology This section discusses how the fishbone diagram is used in analyzing cause and effect. In this study four causes are identified, and each cause and corresponding effects are represented by a fishbone and each is discussed.
Fishbone analysis of supply chain risk-defect We apply a fishbone diagram to investigate potential causes of product or raw material defects in a supply chain. Figure 1 shows six major categories and details of each category as potential sources of defect risk for a typical
manufacturer. These categories are then mapped onto a responsibility matrix (Table 1) that identi fies the organizational unit responsible for cor rective action. These are further mapped on to an action planning matrix (Table 2) that provides for the action to be taken, as identified in the responsibility matrix (Table 1). Table 2 further identifies the resources needed to support actions and offers an estimation of the resources needed to address the problems identified. Each of these categories is presented and discussed in the fol lowing section.
Responsibility and Action-Planning Matrices Design The design category in the fishbone diagram is the initial process for new product development. It is also the initial stage where a product defect could occur for a typical manufacturer. Possibili ties for product defects during design can occur due to inappropriate or poor quality materials or faulty design.
Input quality can cause product defects of poor durability, inconvenience, or poor quality if data and measurements collected are insuf ficient to inform the choice of appropriate raw
36 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Table 1. Responsibility Matrix
Supply Chain - DEFECT CAUSE DESCRIPTION RESPONSIBILITY DEGREE OF
CONTROL ACTION TO BE TAKEN
D E S IG N
W ro n g m aterials
M a terials th a t have high risk to cau se d efect
H ead o f new p ro d u ct R & D
D irect A p p ly S M A R T ap p ro ach
F au lty d esig n
D efec t ap p ears w hen m u ltip le co m p o n en ts fu n ctio n to g e th er
H ead o f new p ro d u ct R & D
D irect A p p ly S M A R T ap p ro ach
R A W M A T E R IA L
D efectiv e m aterial
Is th e m aterial u n ex p ected ly d efectiv e?
M an u factu rin g p ro cesses and serv ice co n d itio n s
D irect D etectio n o f d efect
L o w -q u a lity m aterial Is th e q u ality o f m aterial u n ex p e ct edly low ?
M an u factu rin g p ro cesses and serv ice co n d itio n s
D irect D ev elo p c o n s tru c tio n q u ality a s su ran ce, such as m o istu re co n ten t, th ick n ess, c o m p a c tion, g en eral finish
M A N U F A C T U R IN G
P ack ag in g A p ro cess to seal p ro d u ct, m ain tain in g q u ality assu ran ce an d safety
H ead o f O p eratio n s
D irect A p p ly Six Sigm a
E n v iro n m en t officially In d o o r tem p eratu re, clean lin ess, and airi ness w ith in facto ry
H ead o f O p eratio n s
D irect C o m p ly w ith the p o licy to reg u larly clean th e factory, a d ju st the te m p e ra ture, and k eep g ood airflow
W o rk eth ic D o w o rk ers h av e the rig h t values and re sp o n sib ility to m a n u factu re p ro d u cts?
H ead o f O p eratio n s
D irect D ev elo p g o o d p o licies, effectiv e strateg ies, an d m ajo r effo rt by top m a n ag em en t
E m p lo y ee w ith less ex p erien ce
E m p lo y e es lack the ab ility to so lv e som e p articu la r p ro b lem s
H ead o f O p eratio n s and train in g p ro g ram
D irect O ffer m ore train in g an d su p e rv isin g o f em p lo y ees
E q u ip m e n t It is u sed p ro p erly to p ro d u ce p ro d u cts? U p -to -d a te m a in te n an ce?
H ead o f O p eratio n s
D irect O ffer m ore train in g an d su p erv isin g o f em p lo y ee s, reg u lar m ain ten an ce
O v e r o rd erin g (“ B u llw h ip ” effect)
R eceiv in g m ore o rd ers than usual in a g iv en tim e
H ead o f O p eratio n s
D irect H ire ad d itio n al h u m a n reso u rces an d p u rch ase m ore eq u ip m en t
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 37
Table 1. Responsibility Matrix (continued)
TRAN SPO RTA TIO N
Overloading Loading more pack ages than regular in a given space
Departm ent of Transportation
Direct Com pletely im plem enting supervising and monitoring
Transportation safety
The traffic laws of m otor carriers
D epartm ent of Transportation
Direct Completely implementing, supervising, and good w ork ethic
Custom ized request Request o f tem pera ture, space, or speed limit
D epartm ent of Transportation
Direct Com pletely implementing supervising and the work ethic
Unexpected external factor
Natural disasters or route with no m ainte nance or repair
Some O bserving weather forecast and driving more carefully
IN SPECTION O F QUALITY
Em ployee with less experience
Em ployees lack the ability to solve some particular problems due to less experience
Head of Operations and training program
Direct O ffer more training and su pervising with employees
Fast pace Occurred due to over ordering
Head of Operations
Direct Each step is required and should be done correctly
Time limits Order should be done in a short time
Head o f Operations
Direct Each step is required and should be done correctly
Six Sigma Focusing on quality control
Head of Operations
Direct Developing designs is re quired to target on accurate performance
STORAGE
M aterial handling A process to move products in and out o f storage
H ead of Operations
Direct Training is required in terms o f operating, and m aintenance instructions, traffic rules in the loading and lifting
Overloading A policy that products can only be loaded no more than a certain num ber
Head o f Operations
Direct M ake a positive m ethod to stack products in terms o f indirect labor costs
Tem perature control Tem perature is controlled in a certain degree depend on the product’s condition
Head o f Operations
Direct M aintain a certain tem perature to avoid chem ical reaction. Basic training is necessary.
M ethod A way to manage the inventory when mov ing products in and out, such as FIFO or LIFO
Head of Operations
Direct Develop a product- and m aterial-distribution based on perishability
38 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Table 2. Action Planning Matrix
Supply Chain - DEFECT ACTION TO BE TAKEN
WHO WHEN RESOURCES
D E S IG N
A p p ly S M A R T ap p ro ach
H ead o f new p ro d u ct R & D
60 days In fo rm atio n reg a rd in g to m aterial featu re, testin g , and accurate m easu rem en t
R A W M A T E R IA L
D etectio n o f d efect M an u factu rin g p ro ce sses an d serv ice co n d itio n s
30 days E le ctro m a g n etic rad iatio n (X -rays, g am m a rays, v isib le lig h t o r infrared rad ia tio n ), so u n d w av es, electrical o r m ag n etic effects
D ev elo p a co n stru c tio n q u ality assu ran ce, such as m o istu re co n ten t, th ic k ness, co m p ac tio n , g en eral finish
M an u factu rin g p ro ce sses and serv ice co n d itio n s
30 days R eso u rces are d eterm in ed by th e featu res o f raw m aterials
M A N U F A C T U R IN G
A p p ly Six S ig m a H ead o f O p eratio n s 60 days T rain in g p ro v id ed by p ro g ram and boo k s sh o w in g the fu n d am en tals o f S ix Sigm a
C o m p ly w ith the p o licy to reg u la rly clean the facto ry , a d ju st the tem p eratu re, an d k ee p airiness
H ead o f O p eratio n s T w o w eeks A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
D ev e lo p g o o d p o licies, effec tiv e strateg ies, and effort by to p m anagem ent
H ead o f O p eratio n s T h re e w eeks A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
O ffer m o re train in g and su p e rv isin g o f em p lo y ees
H ead o f O p eratio n s an d train in g p ro g ram
30 days H u m an reso u rces
H ire ad d itio n a l h u m an reso u rce s an d p u rch ase m ore eq u ip m en t
H ead o f O p eratio n s 30 days H u m an reso u rce s an d in crease b u d g et to p u rch ase eq u ip m en t
T R A N S P O R T A T IO N
C o m p letely im p lem en tin g , su p e rv isin g , and m o n ito rin g
D ep a rtm en t o f T ran sp o rtatio n
30 days A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces already in place
C o m p letely im p lem en tin g , su p e rv isin g , an d in stillin g g o o d w o rk ethic
D ep a rtm en t o f T ra n sp o rtatio n
30 days A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
O b serv in g w ea th er fo re ca st an d d riv in g m ore carefu lly
2 w eeks A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 39
Table 2. Action Planning Matrix (continued)
INSPECTION OF QUALITY Offer more training and supervising of employees
Head of Operations and training program
1 month Internal and external training programs
Each step is required and should be done correctly
Head of Operations 1 month Administrative resources already in place
Developing designs are required to target on ac curate performance
Head of Operations 2 month Human resources
STORAGE Training is required in terms of operating and maintenance instructions, traffic rules in the loading and lifting
Head of Operations 30 days Internal training program
Make a positive method to stack products in terms of indirect labor costs
Head of Operations 2 weeks Administrative resources already in place
Maintain a certain tem perature to avoid chemical reaction. Basic training is necessary.
Head of Operations 1 week Administrative resources already in place
Develop a product- and material-distribution based on perishability
Head of Operations 30 days Administrative resources already in place
materials. Examples of product defects occa sioned by material quality include Apple iPhone 5 ’s scratch-prone aluminum cover that received cautious market response (Culpan et al., 2012). On the other hand, faulty design causes product defects when multiple components fail to func tion together. Specifically, each component may be in good condition and may function well, but a defect appears when the components are as sembled. Examples of faulty design include the 2010 case of unintended acceleration in Toyota vehicles, where it was claimed that they sud denly accelerated due to flaws in the electronic throttle control systems or the assembling of floor mat and pedal (Reed, 2013).
According to Siemens PLM Software (2009), appropriate metrics are essential tools in the de velopment of new products because inappropri ate metrics can lead to intuitive, non-data-based or non-evidence-driven decisions. Appropriate metrics in data-based decisions enable new product designers to use appropriate materials, protecting from this source of error and aiding
40
in identifying emerging defects (problems) from other sources. Effective metrics that reduce pros pects of defect are SMART, at is:
Specific - Goals or program metrics are spe cific and sufficiently clear for the design team to fully describe the purpose, importance, and requirements.
Measurable - Measurable goals enable design teams to determine benchmarks with accurate and complete data.
Actionable - Clear and understandable met rics enable design teams to assess the appropri ateness of a decision.
Relevant - Metrics should facilitate and assess pertinent decisions and also inform the timing and choice of resources.
Timely - metrics must specify a schedule for the completion of each step for the entire proj ect.
The SMART approach can be executed as follows: At the design stage, a team can specify a goal such as zero defect. Measurable bench marks can be used to assess that new designs
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
meet needs such as desirable durability. At the same time, actionable decisions about appropri ateness of the design or the chosen material can be determined. For relevance, the design team can determine pertinent metrics for the choice of materials or appropriate design. To be timely, collected data can be used to develop appropri ate schedules. The SMART approach, that can take as little as 60 days for training (depending on the industry standards), can enable a design team to reduce prospects of inappropriate or poor quality inputs or faulty design.
Raw material The second stage where product defects from defective or poor quality inputs can occur is at the raw material injection point (Figure 1). De fective inputs can end up in final products when not detected because of a lack of appropriate detection equipment or equipment malfunction. The type of equipment used to detect defec tive materials depends on the material or the product type. For example, most solid material defects can be detected through electromagnetic radiation (X-rays, gamma rays, visible light, or infrared radiation), sound waves, electrical or magnetic effects. Manufacturing units need to identify the size and attribution of each input, process, and service condition in order to adopt appropriate equipment that minimizes the risk of product defect.
Like defective materials, material quality that falls short of benchmarks (ISO 9000) can cause product defects. Manufacturing processes and service conditions need accurate measurements for detecting material quality. For instance, for unsealed road projects, construction quality as surance is recommended for testing and control of inputs such as moisture content, thickness, compaction, and general finish. As discussed in the “Design” section, appropriate equipment should be used for accurate measures.
Manufacturing The potential for product defect is highest during manufacture in areas such as packaging, envi ronmental, work ethics, inexperienced employ ees, equipment, and over ordering.
Packaging: Faulty packaging can undermine product quality and even cause unexpected hazards during unpacking by operators or cus tomers. For example, the edge on top of canned drinks should be flat, not sharp. Cans should cover drinks completely without leaks so that product quality is maintained. Since it offers
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
process improvement through identification and reduction of defect possibilities in manufactur ing and business processes, Six Sigma can be used to reduce defects from packaging. Opera tions can employ Six Sigma through the five stage processes of definition, measuring, analy sis, improvement, and control. Since Six Sigma programs encompass training resources, typical manufacturing units can complete implementa tion in 60 days.
Environment: Effective manufacture with minimal product defect requires a workplace that has appropriate indoor temperature and is clean, and airy. Irregular temperatures during manufacture can compromise output quality. For instance, high temperatures can cause food products to spoil, and cleanliness, airiness, and other environmental conditions can affect output quality. Examples include contemporary FDA recalls over food contamination. Operational policies should cover cleanliness, temperature, airiness, and other relevant environmental condi tions. Typical manufacturers in America in and other developed economies can establish ap propriate work environments in as little as a few weeks. However, appropriate redress is more complicated and costly for a global supply chain that includes developing economy partners. Po tential disruption in such a chain was illustrated in September 2007 when a Panamanian man's discovery triggered a global hunt for tainted toothpaste.
Work ethics: Product quality correlates more to work ethics that manufacturers establish than to individual ethics. Work ethics entail values and responsibility for how products are manu factured. Without good work ethics, workers may skip some necessary steps to finish work early, causing defects. It is important that prac tice is based on sound operational policies and incentives that promote quality and sound work ethics.
Inexperienced employees: Inexperience among employees can also contribute to defects. New employees or those with inadequate train ing or supervision are more likely to contribute to defects than experienced and skilled employ ees. Therefore, new and inexperienced employ ees need training and closer supervision.
Equipment: Regular maintenance and appro priate use of equipment are very important in controlling defects. Poor maintenance or inap propriate use of equipment can result in product defects relating to size or quantity, quality, and others. Consequently, operational procedures
41
should include regular equipment maintenance, revamping of technology, as well as regular training for production workers.
Over-ordering: Some industries over-order in busy seasons, causing their suppliers to ramp up production in a short time. This raises prospects of defects through missed components or poor quality. In such situations, operations should re align resources (provide more human and capital equipment) to match the high production. Firms can also channel excess orders through network partners. These approaches can help firms lower the risk of defects. Over-ordering can reflect the “bullwhip effect,” a result of an unmanage able, unstable supply chain. That is, demand fluctuations become greater as one moves up the supply chain away from the end customer, and small changes in customer demand result in large vacillations in orders placed upstream. Consequently, network fluctuations increase as each unit in the supply chain attempts to reduce costs. For instance, observers attribute the bull- whip effect of global oil price tumbles to the 2015 planned layoffs by upstream supply chain petrochemical partners, such as Baker Hughes and Schlumberger.
Transportation Even where production is defect-free, defects can occur during shipping. Shippers, who may be supply chain partners, often assume respon sibility during shipment that exposes products to potential defects through stacking, transporta tion safety, customized requests, and unexpected external factors (e.g., natural disasters).
Stacking: When loading products into a trans portation vessel, shippers should stack products as established by the industry. Appropriate stacking reduces the risk of damage that can occur with stacks that exceed recommendation and allow pressure build-up on products at the bottom of the pile. Over stacking also exposes products to damage during shipping. Firms need appropriate supervision and monitoring of ship per performance to reduce the risk of stacking- induced defects.
Transportation safety: Transportation safety not only keeps transporters safe but also guards against defects during shipping. Driving hab its such as speed, reaction time, or turning methods can contribute to shipment damage to product defects downstream and some attribute the 2014 Korean ship accident to overload or shift in cargo (Stella Kim, Jason Hanna and Ed Payne, CNN 2014). Corrective actions include
42
enhanced supervision and promotion of work ethics to ensure adherence to appropriate safety policies and standards.
Customized request: Customized requests are often made to reduce the risk of damage during shipping. Typical requests include temperature control for food and perishables, heightened safety for hazardous material, managed speed and extra cushion for delicate material, etc. Cor rective actions include enhanced supervision and promotion of work ethics to ensure adherence to appropriate safety policies and standards for handling customized requests.
Unexpected eternal factors: Uncontrollable factors such as natural disasters and conflict situ ations can disrupt a supply chain and predispose firms to product defects. Resilient firms that survive such disruptions adopt effective strate gies based on tested risk management capabili ties, information sharing, and built-in flexibility (Chopra and Sodhi, 2004; Simchi-Levi et al., 2013) . These strategies can also reduce prospec tive defects.
Quality inspection Quality inspection is the formal means of de fect detection in raw materials and in the final product. Inspection is highly important since some firms treat this as the last activity in the production process. During the inspection process, human or mechanical problems can arise in the form of equipment use, misuse, or inspector-induced. The type of equipment used for inspection depends on the product or the type of raw materials as well as inspection techniques employed. Earlier, we discussed the potential for equipment-induced defects that are similar to those caused by inspection equipment. There fore, we focus on the human factors that can cause defects during inspection: Inexperienced employees, pace of inspection, and time limits.
Inexperienced employees: Since quality in spection is often the last activity in the produc tion process, quality inspectors play a prominent role in ensuring that products meet quality standards. As described in the manufacturing section, inspectors must be skilled in the tech niques applied to defect detection. Firms should develop inspection skills and training programs and push for external or industry initiatives and innovations for defect reduction (Murphy, 2014) . This is particularly urgent as demands for supply chain scrutiny increase in connection with regulations, corporate social responsibility, sustainability, global terror management, and for
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
being able to trace jewels, minerals, and such products up the supply chain.
Inspection pace and time limits: Inspection pace and time limits refer to a period when more orders are received than usual, causing firms to ramp-up production and inspection - potentially reducing attention to the inspection process. De fects can occur when necessary inspection steps are skipped or inspection time is squeezed. The question arises of whether inspectors embrace appropriate work ethics to deal with increased pace or shortened time. To reduce prospects for defects, firms should develop effective plans with in-built slack to smoothen peak orders. Such efforts can be supplemented with appropri ate incentives and closer monitoring of the in spection process during peak periods. Six Sigma is particularly useful at this stage because it aims to improve the quality of process output, “reduc ing defects by developing designs that deliver a given target performance despite [potential] variations” (Vlahinos, 2008).
Storage (warehousing) Before raw materials are transformed into manu factured products and before finished products are shipped out, both are usually stored in ware houses. Following is a discussion of defects that can occur at these stages through human error or material handling and stacking, temperature control, and methods.
Material handling and stacking: Defects can occur due to negligence when moving products or raw materials in and out of storage. Fragile and delicate materials such as glass, horticulture, and microchips require more care to prevent damage. Similarly, products such as foods, drugs, and perishables require temperature con trol. To reduce defects, firms should pay atten tion to internal training programs for operating equipment, maintenance instructions, as well as rules for handling, loading, lifting, shipping, and storing. Firms should ensure employer adher ence to the relevant appropriate policies and procedures.
Inventory: The method of inventory control refers to the policy for moving raw materials and products from storage. Two common methods are first in, first out (FIFO) and last in, first out (LIFO). To reduce product defects, firms adopt the FIFO method to move perishable and high obsolescence materials and products from stor age, and they adopt LIFO to move imperishable materials and products whose quality does not erode as fast. It is critical that firms monitor and
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
workers adhere to established inventory policies. In addition to supervising their own inventory policies, firms must scrutinize and coordinate their policies with those of supply chain part ners. .
Fishbone Analysis of Supply Chain Risk-Counterfeit Well-defined, distinctive, protected, and rela tively self-sufficient national economies provide temporary insulation for some intellectual prop erty rights for firms. However, the rapid pace of globalization and economic interdependency in the face of widespread information technology, and the pressure for information sharing and integrated supply chains (Joakim and Naslund, 2014; Lin, 2014) have contributed to the erosion of such insulation and left firms vulnerable to the risk of counterfeits - particularly of intellectual property. The result is billions of dollars of lost revenues. Brand owners have responded with cooperative initiatives in and outside the supply chain as well as involving governments to com bat the challenge of counterfeiters (BASCAP, 2011). In this study, we propose the fishbone diagram analysis as a way to trace the internal and external points of vulnerability to counter feiters. Figure 2 is a fishbone diagram for the risk of counterfeit.
Design We use the fishbone diagram to discuss product design features that can predispose it to counter feit, typically basic design and color mixture.
Basic design and color mixture: A firm’s products can be counterfeited if the basic design is too simple or if it has a simple or common color mix. To combat counterfeiters, the basic design should be reviewed for customization into a more complicated design and color mix. These design features should be included in the trademark material and basic materials that dis tinguish a firm’s product from others. The action planning matrix indicates that the chief of design or design manager is directly responsible for reviewing and customizing the design and color mix. It is also the chief of design’s responsibility to work with the property rights protection unit to ensure that these distinguishing features are accurately captured in the trademark.
People This category includes those likely to be involved with counterfeit cases such as Counterfeiters, customers, and enforcement agents. They are in-
43
Figure 2. SCR - Counterfeit
MARKET PEOPLE DESIGN
eluded in a thorough responsibility matrix as con nected direct or indirectly with counterfeit cases.
Counterfeiters: Counterfeiters exist because of unmet demand for a firm’s products. To shut off counterfeit operations, firms should seek to fulfill as much identified demand for their prod ucts as possible. As indicated in the action plan ning matrix, firms need to make their products more available by expanding distribution chan nels and thwart counterfeiters who might creep in to satisfy unmet demand.
Customers: While unmet demand can mo tivate counterfeiters, potential customers are often drawn to counterfeits when they are indistinguishable from the genuine article. In such cases, marketing efforts should be geared toward increasing public awareness of a firm’s products, and prospective customers should be educated about a firm’s distinguishing product features. Potential customers might also resort to counterfeits when a firm has high brand positioning that discourages certain segments of a market. In such instances, a firm might re view its marketing strategy and consider stretch branding and other options that can help in combating counterfeits.
Enforcement agents: Usually public work ers such as police departments or government agencies in charge of law enforcement handle
counterfeits as well. As indicated in the action planning matrix, to combat counterfeits, collabo ration between industry and government should include provisions for appropriate training for counterfeit enforcement agents, as well as the development of effective counterfeit laws and sanctions. Through industry associations, such as the Business Action to Stop Counterfeiting and Piracy (BASCAP) and public relationship initiatives, firms can collaborate with enforce ment agents on counterfeit training.
Operations The operation category of the fishbone dia gram represents actual detailed processes and production activities such as cutting, stitch ing and assembling techniques. Unique and distinctive operational techniques should be employed to help reduce prospects for coun terfeiters, for instance, in cutting techniques. Similarly, using distinctive stitching and assembling techniques that are hard to im i tate can help distinguish a firm’s processes and designs. The fashion industry notes the hard-to-duplicate Oscar de la R enta’s unique stitching techniques. As indicated on the ac tion planning matrix, the design team should develop distinctive operational techniques to help circumvent counterfeits.
44 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Table 3. Responsibility Matrix
Supply Chain - COUNTERFEIT
CAUSE DESCRIPTION RESPONSIBILITY DEGREE OF CONTROL
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
D E S IG N
B asic d esign Is th e d esig n too sim ple
D esig n er M a n ag e r D irect R ev iew an d c u s to m ize the basic d esig n
M ix tu re o f c o lo r S im p le/co m m o n m ix tu re o f co lo r
D esig n er M a n ag e r D irect R ev iew an d c u s to m ize the m ix tu re o f co lo r
M A T E R IA L
T ra d e m a rk m aterials Is the trad em ark m aterial d ifferen t en o u g h ?
D esig n er M an ag er D irect R ev iew an d c u s to m ize trad em ark m aterial
B asic m aterials A re the basic m aterials av ailab le ev e ry w h e re ?
D esig n er M an ag er D irect R eview an d cu s to m ize basic m aterials
P E O P L E
C o u n terfe ite rs Is th ere a d em an d fo r u n rea ch ab le goods
T h em selv e s In d ire ct F ulfilled all d em an d
C o n su m ers L ow aw aren ess T h em selv es In d ire ct In crease p eo p le aw aren ess
P o lice officers A re the officers d o in g w ell fighting co u n terfe it?
P olice In d irect P ro p e r train in g to co m b at co u n terfeit
O P E R A T IO N
C u ttin g tech n iq u e Is th e cu ttin g te c h n ique to o sim ple?
O p eratio n s M a n ag e r D irect R ev iew an d cu s to m ize c u ttin g tech n iq u e
S titc h in g tech n iq u e Is the stitch in g te c h n ique to o sim ple?
O p eratio n s M a n ag e r D irect R ev iew an d c u s to m ize stitching tech n iq u e
A sse m b lin g tech n iq u e Is the assem b lin g tech n iq u e too sim ple?
O p eratio n s M a n ag e r D irect R ev iew an d c u s to m ize assem b lin g tech n iq u e
M A R K E T
C h a n ce fo r co u n terfe it Is th ere a sp ace for illeg al b u sin ess?
P olice In d irect C lo se all ch an ces fo r illeg al b u sin ess
B ran d p o sitio n in g B ran d in th e rig h t p o sitio n in g
M a n ag e m en t In d irect D o w n m a rk e t stretch
G O V E R N M E N T
L aw fo r co u n terfe it Is the law fo r c o u n te rfeit effectiv e?
G o v ern m en t In d irect D ev elo p m o re strict law s ab o u t c o u n ter feiting
S an ctio n fo r co u n terfe it A re the sanctions stro n g en o u g h ?
G o v ern m en t In d irect In crea se/set high san ctio n s fo r c o u n terfeitin g
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 45
Table 4. Action Planning Matrix
Supply Chain - COUNTERFEIT ACTION TO BE TAKEN
WHO WHEN RESOURCES
DESIGN
Review and custom ize the design
Design M anager 60 days Redesign with more com plicated pattern
Review and custom ize the mixture o f color
Design M anager 60 days D evelop new m ixture o f color hard to counterfeit
M ATERIAL
Review and customize tradem ark material
Design M anager 60 days Use m ore unique tradem ark material
Review and customize basic materials
Design M anager 30 days Use authentic basic materials not available in all markets
PEOPLE
Fulfilled all demand M arketing 180 days Open m ore stores
Increase people awareness Public Relation 180 days Events, banners, advertisem ent to increase awareness
Proper training to combat counterfeit
Police Department 30 days Help sponsor police training/activity to exterm inate counterfeit
OPERATION
Review and customize cutting technique
Operation M anager 30 days D evelop new cutting technique
Review and customize stitching technique
Operation M anager 30 days Develop new stitching technique
Review and custom ize as sem bling technique
Operation M anager 30 days Develop more com plicated assem bling technique
M ARKET
Close all chances for il legal business
Police Department 180 days Increase people awareness, support police program to exterm inate black market
Resetting brand position/ Down m arket stretch
M anagement 180 days Down market stretch branding
GOVERN M EN T
Develop stricter laws about counterfeiting
G overnm ent 180 days W orking together with governm ent to develop more strict law
Increase/set strong sanc tions for counterfeiting
Governm ent 180 days W orking together with governm ent to increase sanction for counterfeit
46 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Figure 3. SCR - Delay
PHYSICAL LAYOUT TRUCK MOVEMENT PLANNING
Fishbone Analysis of Supply Chain Risk-Delay Physical layout: Firms with multiple plant lo cations should design layouts closer to major customers to reduce transportation costs and prospects for delays. For instance, Toyota’s man agement of this aspect of its supply chain and re quirements of suppliers was viewed as critical to its competitive strategy in the 1980s (Carr, 1989; Cusumano, 1988). Toyota continues to pursue this strategy, an important consideration for its U.S. suppliers in 2014 as Toyota consolidates in Plano, Texas (Chappel 2014).
Configurations of factories also affect the efficiency of distribution to customers. In addi tion to potential reduction in delays, firms can also collaborate with shipping partners by using integrated information systems that offer cost and time efficiencies, such as the UPS logistical system (Rodrigue, 2013).
Planning: The risk of delay also increases with the number of marketing channels that a firm serves-online sales, franchise outlets, and such that-can raise prospects of over orders. It is critical that firms coordinate effective man agement of capacity, inventory, and production
scheduling with supply chain partners. To avoid excessive paperwork and bureaucracy, adopting appropriate information technology is necessary as well as providing for emergencies such as compromised information systems and power outages.
Fishbone Analysis of Supply Chain Risk-General Error A firm can end up with poor quality raw materi als or products due to errors at delivery, during dispatch, or at the receiving units. Accuracy of data or information relating to quantity, part de scription, format, and part numbers is critical in reducing the possibility of delivery error. There fore, all organizational units and supply chain entities need to maintain accurate data flows within and among the units. The fishbone dia gram addresses possible ways to reduce delivery errors.
Delivery units should provide for verification of orders before shipment to ensure the right parts or products are prepared for delivery to the right recipient (customer or unit). Sometimes raw materials or products reach a wrong address due to improper organization or arrangements in a shipping vessel. Similarly, when orders of
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 47
Table 5. Responsibility Matrix
Supply Chain - DELAY CAUSE DESCRIPTION RESPONSIBILITY DEGREE OF
CONTROL ACTION TO BE TAKEN
PH Y SICA L LAYOUT
Factories configuration Distribution o f facto ries is unreasonable
Headquarters Direct According to the customers distribu tion, find the optimum location
Poor internal factories circulation
No com m unication betw een factories to find the nearest to the customers
Headquarters Direct Collect sales o f data, and ship goods from the nearest factory
TRUCK M OVEM ENT
Limited capacity Truck shortage D epartm ent o f Transportation
Direct Purchase enough trucks
Lack o f ITS solutions to truck movements
Inefficiency task allocation
IT D epartm ent Direct Design Information system for truck movem ent
Accident Truck accident D epartm ent of Transportation
Direct Completely im ple menting safety drive and work ethic
PLANNING
Lack o f data collection Over order M arketing Department
Direct Tim ely collection o f sale data
O ver predict o f capacity Over expected productivity
Operations Department
Direct Tim ely calculations o f capacity
Inadequate stock N ot enough inventory
Operations D epartm ent
Direct Keep inventory at a safe level
STA FF M AN A G EM EN T
Personnel schedules A rrangem ents not flexible, absence rate increase
HR Direct Hire more workers and schedule accord ing their wish
L abor shortage Not enough labor for special condition
HR Direct Hire more workers and schedule accord ing their wish
INFO RM A TIO N M ANAG EM EN T
Excessive paperw ork
An order go through different department with different forms
Operations Departm ent
Direct Reduce paperwork
A ntiquated information system
Unfit information system
IT Departm ent Direct Tim ely system updates
Special circum stances
System breakdown IT Department Direct Tim ely backup copy
48 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Table 5. Responsibility Matrix (continued)
R A W M A T E R IA L
L a c k o f flexibility o f su p p lier
Single supply, in c re ase risk o f d elay
P u rch asin g D ep a rtm en t
D irect Increase num bers o f suppliers
In ad e q u ate h an d lin g N o t ap p ro p riate h an d lin g in crease d efectiv e rate
O p eratio n s D ep artm en t
D irect D ev e lo p a m aterials h an d lin g m eth o d
Table 6. Action Planning Matrix
Supply Chain - DELAY
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
W HO W HEN RESOURCES
P H Y S IC A L L A Y O U T
A cc o rd in g to th e cu s to m ers d istrib u tio n , find the o p tim u m lo catio n
H ead q u arters 360 days R e b u ild the facto ries
C o llec t sales d ata an d ship goo d s fro m the n earest facto ry
H ead q u arters 30 days D ev elo p a sale in fo rm atio n sy stem
T R U C K M O V E M E N T
P u rc h ase en o u g h trucks D ep a rtm en t o f T ran sp o rtatio n
30 days M ore b u d g et fo r tru ck p u rch ase
D esig n In fo rm a tio n sy s te m fo r tru ck m o v e m en t
IT D ep a rtm en t 180 days D ev elo p a tru ck m o v em en t in fo rm atio n sy stem
C om pletely im plem enting safety drive and w ork ethic
D ep artm en t o f T ra n sp o rtatio n
30 days P ro v id e m o re train in g o f d riv ers
P L A N N IN G
T im ely c o llec t sale d ata M ark etin g D aily D ev elo p s a sales in fo rm atio n system
T im ely ca lc u late cap acity O p eratio n s D ep artm en t
30 days M o n th ly calcu late total p ro d u ctio n
K eep in v en to ry at a safe level
O p eratio n s D ep artm en t
30 days T ra in in g w areh o u se su p erv iso r
S T A F F M A N A G E M E N T
H ire m ore w o rk ers an d sch ed u le acco rd in g to th e ir w ish es
H R D ep artm en t 180 days Increase b u d g et o f salary
IN F O R M A T IO N M A N A G E M E N T
R e d u ce p ap e rw o rk O p eratio n s D ep artm en t
30 days R e d esig n the p ro cess o f o rd er
T im e ly u p d ate sy stem IT D ep artm en t 60 days Increase b u d g et o f sy stem u pdate
T im e ly b ack u p co p y IT D ep artm en t D aily Increase w o rk h o u r on b ack u p copy
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 49
Table 6. Action Planning Matrix (continued)
RAW M ATERIAL
Increase numbers of suppliers
Purchasing Department
180 days Cooperation with more suppliers
Develop a m aterial handing method
Operations Department
60 days Training warehouse supervisor
raw materials or products are submitted to a supplier, the order needs to be matched with the request. Similarly, it is important to establish a systematic process for follow-up on the status of ordered materials to ensure that the ordered quantity reaches its destination in a timely man ner, according to the specification. Once this happens, the delivery should be matched to the order. Sometimes verification requires the use of equipment for specification, labels, or features. Procurement units need training programs and technical supervision over inbound logistics to reduce delivery errors. Similarly, sales units should monitor outbound logistics to reduce the risk of error in delivering orders.
Bill of materials A bill of materials is a list of parts or compo nents required to build a product. It provides the manufacturer’s part number and quantity needed for each component. Within a firm, the bill of materials serves as a way to track prod uct changes to maintain accuracy in the list of required components. A defect can occur in incompleteness, inconsistency, or incorrectness. Generally, incomplete data is the most common bill-of-materials defect. Omission of critical information such as quantity, part description, reference designation, or approved manufactur ers listing can occur. To avoid or reduce errors due to incomplete data, the procurement unit should clarify and ensure complete collection of information flows between units.
Sometimes bill-of-material information con flicts with those in the engineering drawings and design files. For example, if a firm always orders different amounts of raw materials from a par ticular supplier, the supplier might mix an order with a previous one, resulting in inconsistency. Another potential consistency problem is format. The format of the bill-of-materials, even from the same customer, can change from one transmis sion to the next, making it critical to match and confirm data. Training and monitoring is neces
50
sary to ensure consistency between orders and formats for raw materials or products.
Incorrect data can also cause problems. Errors can occur in the form of invalid manufacturer or supplier information, obsolete data, incorrect part numbers, inaccurate transcription of information from hard copies. To reduce errors due to incor rect data, each component’s description should be verified with supply chain partners, such as suppliers and customers. Mistakes in paperwork can also occur when information gets transferred from different departments-particularly if the process is complicated or cumbersome. Firms can reduce this risk by using appropriate infor mation systems that reduce reliance on paper work and manual data entry.
Communication The communication category of the fishbone dia gram represents the risk of error that can occur at any point of the communication process through the supply chain. An error can occur due to “noise” at the message point, the channel, suppli er, or customer. For instance, defects can occur if communication breakdown leads to delivery of inappropriate parts, or an unreliable channel leads to decoding error, or noise in the channel contaminates the message. Firms should improve communication systems and provide training programs to reduce the potential for communica tion errors. Due to the complexities of a typical supply chain, improving communication can not eradicate the risk of error. Sokol and Morris (2009) describe the traditional way most small and medium-sized enterprises receive orders from customers as involving the conversion of a customer technical data package consisting of computer aided design (CAD) models, material and process specifications, and related documents that typify requirements for specific products. Such conversion involves a laborious and costly process that is often prone to error and subject to omission. Yet, increased dependence on the supply chain makes the technical data package
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Figure 4. SCR - General Error
COMMUNICATION DELIVERY MANUFACTURING
Table 7. Responsibility Matrix
Supply Chain - GENERAL ERROR
CAUSE DESCRIPTION RESPONSIBILITY DEGREE OF CONTROL
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
DELIVERY
Delivery Man Check delivery orders before ship ping and make sure right products are received by the right companies
Head o f Transportation
Some Double-check if ordered material or products are what was ordered
Sender Double-check if the delivery orders match the request from receivers
Head of Operations
Some The sender has to system atically fol low up the status o f ordered m aterial to assure that the m ate rial arrives at the job site in the correct quantities and specifications
Receiver Double-check if the products or raw materials received match the orders
Procurem ent departm ent
Direct Develop a system atic exam ination in terms o f product specification, labels, or features
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 51
Table 7. Responsibility Matrix (continued)
BILL OF M ATERIALS
Com pleteness Data in terms o f quantity, part de scription, reference designation and ap proved m anufactur ers list
Procurem ent Department
Direct Data should be col lected completely and the depart ment should check inform ation is not om itted
Consistency Are the form at and inform ation o f product quantities or specifications consistent?
Procurement Department
Direct Develop a consistent order or form at for raw materials or products
Correctness D ata in light o f part numbers, m anufac turer’s parts number, and receipt o f infor mation
Procurement Department
Avoid incorrect data and common errors including invalid m anufacturer or supplier inform a tion, obsolete data and incorrect part numbers.
M ANUFACTURING
Information gathering M istakes occur when information trans fers from different departments
Plead of Operations Direct Using information systems to transfer information
Labeling and packaging Put product in the wrong package
Head o f Operations Direct Apply Six Sigma
Over ordering (“Bullw hip” effect)
Receiving more order than regular in a given time
Head o f Operations Direct Hire additional human resources and purchase more equipm ent
STORAGE
Inventory placem ent Inventory distribu tion unreasonable
Head o f Operations Direct Training is required in terms o f operating
Carrying M istake occur during transportation
D epartm ent of Transportation
Direct Label scanning technology
COM M UNICATION
Supplier Is the supplier re ceived order correctly
Information Technology M anager
Direct Im prove com m uni cation tools/skills
Noise Is the com m unica tion delivered clearly
Information Technology M anager
Direct Improve com m uni cation tools/skills
Buyer Is the buyer sent order correctly
Information Technology M anager
Direct Im prove com m uni cation tools/skills
52 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Table 7. Responsibility Matrix (continued)
IN S P E C T IO N O F Q U A L IT Y
E m p lo y e e w ith less ex p e rien c e
E m p lo y ees lack the ability to reco g n ize the p ro b lem w hen it appears
H ead o f O p eratio n s D irect O ffer m o re train in g an d su p erv isin g o f em p lo y ees
F ast pace O ccu rred d u e to o v er o rd erin g
H ead o f O p eratio n s D irect E ach p art should be rec h eck e d
Table 8. Action Planning Matrix
Supply Chain - W RONG
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
WHO W HEN RESOURCES
D E L IV E R Y
D o u b le ch e ck if o rd ered m aterial o r p ro d u cts are w h at the c o m p an y o rd ered b efo re d eliv ery
H ead o f T ra n sp o rtatio n
2 w eeks T ra in in g /su p erv isio n d ev e lo p e d fo r d eliv ery p erson
T h e se n d er has to sy s tem atically fo llo w up the status o f o rd ered m aterial to assu re th a t the m aterial arriv es at th e jo b site in the co rrec t q u an titie s and sp ecificatio n s
H ea d o f O p eratio n s 2 w eeks A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
D ev elo p a sy stem atic ex a m in a tio n in term s o f p ro d u ct specification, labels, o r featu re
P ro c u re m en t D ep artm en t
30 days T rain in g p ro g ram s, h u m an reso u rces, and eq u ip m en t if n ecessary
B IL L O F M A T E R IA L S
D ata should be collected co m p letely and the d ep a rt m ent should ch eck infor m ation is not o m itted
P ro c u re m en t D ep artm en t
A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
D ev e lo p a c o n s iste n t o rd er o r fo rm a t fo r raw m a te ri als o r p ro d u cts
P ro c u re m en t D ep a rtm en t
A d m in istra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
A v o id in c o rrec t d ata and c o m m o n erro rs in clu d in g in v a lid m a n u fa ctu re r o r su p p lie r in fo rm atio n , o b so lete d ata, an d in co rrect p art num bers.
P ro c u re m en t D ep a rtm en t
A d m in is tra tiv e reso u rces alread y in place
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015 53
Table 8. Action Planning Matrix (continued)
M A N U FACTURING
Using inform ation system to transfer information
Head o f IT Departm ent
180 days Develop the inform ation system
Apply Six Sigma Head o f Operations 60 days Training provided by program and books showing the fundam entals of Six Sigma
Hire additional human resources and purchase more equipm ent
Head o f HR 30 days Human resources and increase budget to purchase equipm ent
STORAGE
Training is required in terms o f operating
Head o f Operations 30 days Internal training program
Label scanning technology
Head o f Operations 30 days Purchase the label scanning equipm ent
COM M UNICATION
Improve com m unication tool
Information Technology M anager
60 days Increase budget for information technology and give proper training
IN SPECTION O F QUALITY
O ffer more training and supervising employees
Head o f Operations 30 days Internal and external training program
Each part should be rechecked
Head o f Operations 30 days A dm inistrative resources already in place
indispensable to smaller enterprises (ibid). To reduce communication error and still use the data package, Sokol and Morris (2009) recommend software tools for the data package management that “facilitate better composition, communica tion, and application of technical data at every level of the supply chain.” Such tools not only re duce communication error but provide enhanced efficiency and responsiveness to customers.
Other risk factors In addition to the risks identified in this article, several others could have been included. How ever, this article aimed to include some of the key risk factors and provide a framework that could be expanded to include additional risks. Other risks factors that need to be included are plant failures due to natural catastrophe, such as weather or earthquakes. Risks could also rise due to political unrest, riots in a country where the manufacturing facility is located, destruction
54
of plants by terrorists. The source of risks may also include hackers injecting vimses, stolen data from computer systems, and other malicious acts to jeopardize computer systems. In summary, these risks could be mapped into the fishbone diagram and analyzed to alleviate their impact on supply chain management.
C o n c lu s io n To combat hypercompetitive forces in the midst of uncontrollable factors such as global economic instability and man-made or natural disasters, firms seek to secure input sources in the upstream while searching for some control over revenue bases downstream. The global sourcing of inputs, systems, and processes gives them access to world-class suppliers, often at competitive rates. At the same time, access to world-wide custom ers extends their revenue streams beyond domes tic markets, enabling them to stay competitive. These advantages come with the challenge of 1)
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
coordinating diverse global sources, and 2) sus taining value creation to global customers. At the same time dealing with external entities exposes firms to potential risks that require effective sup ply management.
Effective supply chain management can en able firms to optimize on their relationships with global partners in creating sustainable value to world-wide customers. This study proposes a framework that uses a fishbone analysis approach to identify potential risks of supply chain value erosion and suggests strategies that can help miti gate these risks. We use the fishbone approach to identify potential sources of problems that can undermine supply chain value optimization and map these organizational units responsible for addressing these problems. We also suggest relevant action plans for addressing the identified problems.
A fishbone diagram is an excellent way to examine and visually depict the potential causes of a problem. Therefore, we applied this fishbone diagram to supply chains to help identify potential causes of common problems like defects, coun terfeits, delays, and errors that compromise sup ply chain value optimization. Since the fishbone approach is helpful in identifying of root causes of a problem, it can be used to pinpoint areas for remedial action, and that can help focus resources on the causes rather than symptoms of a problem. It can also be used to identify appropriate organi zational units responsible for addressing identified problems. Therefore, we mapped the problem areas identified in the supply chain to responsibil ity matrices that pinpoint the organizational unit responsible for addressing the problem identified in the fishbone diagram. Moreover, since the fishbone diagram can help managers determine the best possible actions, we also mapped the responsibility matrices for the identified problems to relevant action plan matrices.
We used the fishbone diagram framework to identify risks that can undermine value creation in a supply chain, we mapped identified risks (problems) to an organizational responsibility matrix, and we suggested action plans. Although global supply chains also face nonbusiness risks such as natural disasters, acts of terror, and civil unrest, our focus was business risks. We believe that the fishbone diagram works best for analyz ing systematic risks, such as those that occur in normal operations. We also believe that the framework is not well-suited for analyzing non- systematic or nonbusiness risks that confront supply chains, such as natural disasters. It is our
SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
conjecture, though, that despite the potentially grave effects of nonbusiness risks on a supply chain firms that position to manage business risks well through their supply chains, and manage to provide stakeholder value, are better positioned to weather nonbusiness risks than their counter parts that cannot manage business risks.
Dr. Kiran Desai, who focuses teaching and re search on supply chain management, has pub lished articles in this area and also concerning operations. Dr. Mayur Desai, a professor o f man agement information systems, has over 15 years o f experience in industry plus 17 in academia. His research involves outsourcing strategies, informa tion technology ethics, end-user development, curriculum assessment and student enrollment de velopment, and e-commerce and systems security. Dr. Ojode, a professor at Texas Southern’s School o f Business, taught previously at Indiana Univer sity. She holds CPA designation in Kenya, where she co-founded a CPA firm, Ojode & Associates, in the late 1980s.
REFERENCES A consumer alerts the world. Accesses on April
30, 2015, from http://www.nytimes.coin/video/ world/1194817107219/a-consumer-alerts-the-world. html.
Alexandru, C. (2013). Performance metrics in supply chain management. Evidence from Romanian economy. The Amfitecitru Economic Journal, 75(33), 170-179 (JEL, 1135).
BASCAP: Business Action to Stop Counterfeiting and Pi racy (2011). Estimating the global economic and social impacts of counterfeiting and piracy. BASCAP Report, February.
Carr, C. (1989). Britain's competitiveness: The manage ment o f the U.K. vehicle component industry. Routledge, Chapman and Hall, Inc.: New York, NY.
Chapel, Lindsay. Where Toyota goes, will support firms follow? Accessed on April 30, 2015, from http://www. autonews.com/article/20140505/RETAIL03/305059941/ where-toyota-goes-will-support- firms-follow?
Chopra, S., and Meindl, P. (2004). Supply Chain Man agement, Strategy, Planning, and Operations. Second Edition, Pearson, Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, New Jersey.
Chopra, S„ and Sodhi M. (2004, October 15). Managing risk to avoid supply chain breakdown. Sloan Review, MIT.
Cruz, J. M. (2013). Mitigating global supply chain risks through corporate social responsibility. International Journal o f Production Research, 3995.
Culpan, T., Ho, A., and Satariano, A. (2012, October 10). The iPhone 5’s aluminum DOES scratch too easily, and that’s why supply has limited sales. Accessed Novem-
55
ber 10, 2014, from http://www.businessinsider.com/ the-iphone-5s-aluminium-does-scratch-too-easily-and- thats-why-supply-has-limited-sales-2012-10.
Cusumano, M. A. (1988, October 15). Manufacturing inno vation: Lessons from the Japanese auto industry. Sloan Review, MIT.
D’Aveni, R. (1994). Hypercompetition: The Dynamics o f Strategic Maneuvering. Free Press: New York.
Ditahardiyani, P., and Ratnayani, A. M. (2008). The quality improvement of primer packaging process using six sigma methodology. Journal o f Technique Industry, 10(2), pp. 177-184.
Eisend, M., and Guler, P. S. (2006). Explaining counterfeit purchases: A review and preview. Academy o f Market ing Science Review, 12, 1-18.
Farooq, N. (2011). Counterfeiting of luxury brands. Ac cessed on May 2015, from http://brandingtodominate. blogspot.com/
FDA investigates Listeria monocytogenes in ice cream products from Blue Bell Creameries. Retrieved from http://www.fsis.usda.gov/wps/portal/fsis/topics/recalls- and-public-health-alerts/recall-case-archive
Handheld, R. B., and Nichols, E. L., Jr. (n.d.). Supply Chain Redesign, Supply Chain Redesign Textbook, FT Press Financial Times, an imprint of Pearson. Chapter 1, Page 3.
Hekmatpanah, M. (2011). The application of cause and ef fect diagram in Sepahan Oil Company. World Academy o f Science, Engineering and Technology, 54, 537-541.
Ishikawa, K. Fishbone diagram accessed on April 30, 2015. from http://www.mindtools.com /pages/article/ newTMC_03.htm
ISO 9000 - Quality Management accessed on April 27, 2015, from http://www.iso.org/iso/iso_9000
Joakim, K., and Naslund, D. (2014, March). Information sharing in supply chains, myth or reality? A critical analysis of empirical literature. International Journal o f Physical Distribution & Logistical Management, 179-200.
Kane, S., Liberman, E.. DiViesti, T., and Click, F. (2010). Toyota sudden unintended acceleration. Safety Research & Strategies, Inc., 34.
Kenya, N. (1998). Material selection and quality assurance for labor-based unsealed road projects. International Labor Organization, 9, 21.
Lin, Hsiu-Fen (2014). The impact of socialization mecha nism and technological innovation capabilities on part nership quality and supply chain integration. Information Systems and e-Business Management, 12(2), p. 285.
Lohr, S. (2011). Stress test for the global supply chain. Accessed April 29, 2015, from http://www.nytimes. com/201 l/03/20/business/20supply.html.
Mishra, P. K., and Sinha, A. Supply chain management of agricultural commodities through electronic spot exchanges (December 20, 2010). Accessed on May 1, 2015, from http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers. cfm?abstract_id=1728686
Monk, B. (2011). Mitigating the risk o f counterfeit prod ucts. Anti-counterfeiting operations.
Murphy, G. (2014, October). Supply chain complexity awaits technology solutions. Strategic Finance, 96(A), 56-57.
Rahman, H. A., Wang C., and Jackson, C. (2010). CTM Model using Ishikawa Diagram for quality management in design-and-build projects. Scientific Research and Essays, 6(25), 5442-5456.
Radon, A. (2012). Counterfeit luxury goods online: An investigation of consumer perceptions. International Journal o f Marketing Studies, 4(2), 74-79.
Rajesh, R., V. Ravi, and Venkatrao, R. (2015). Selection of risk mitigation strategy in electronic supply chains using Grey Theory and Digraph-matrix Approaches. Interna tional Journal o f Production Research, 53(1), 238-257.
Reed, P. (2013). (Reprinted on 4/7/2015). For Toyota own ers: Unintended acceleration lawsuit settlement. Ac cessed November 10, 2014, from http://www.edmunds. com/car-safety/for-toyota-owners-unintended-accelera- tion-lawsuit-settlement.html.
Rodrigue, Jean-P. (2013). The geography o f transport systems. Routledge: New York, NY.
Ross, K. (2008). Manufacturers versus component part and raw material suppliers: How to prevent liability. The Defense Research Institute’s Product Liability Commit tee, page 2.
Satyendra Kr. Sharma, Anil Bhat, and Srikant Routroy (2014). An empirical study on supply chain risk man agement strategies in Indian automobile industry. The IUP Journal o f Supply Chain Management, 7 (http:// www.iupindia.in/supplychain_management.asp)
Simchi-Levi, D., Kyratzoglou 1. O., & Vassiliadis, C. G. (2013). Supply chain and risk management. MIT Forum fo r Supply Chain Innovation and PwC.
Sokol, D. Z., and Morris R. (2009). Reducing errors in manufacturing: A variety of software tools can commu nicate technical data packages across the supply chain. Quality Digest: Accessed April 30, 2015 from http:// www.qualitydigest.com
Stella, K., Hanna, J., and Payne, E. (2014). CNN. Accessed April 29, 2015, from http://www.cnn.com/2014/05/06/ world/asia/south-korea-ship-sinking.
Suharjito, M. (2015). DSS for agricultural products supply chain risk balancing using stakeholder dialogues and fuzzy nonlinear regression. International Journal o f Hybrid Information Technology, 3(1), 11-26.
Tummala, R.. and Schoenherr, T. (2011). Assessing and managing risks using the supply chain risk manage ment process (SCRMP). Supply Chain Management: An International Journal, 16(6), 474-483.
Yubing Yu, W. X. (2015). A conceptual model of supply chain risk mitigation: The Role of supply chain inte gration and organizational risk propensity. Journal o f Coastal Research, Special Issue 73 - Recent Develop ment of Port and Ocean, 95-98.
56 SAM Advanced Management Journal — Summer 2015
Copyright of SAM Advanced Management Journal (07497075) is the property of Society for Advancement of Management and its content may not be copied or emailed to multiple sites or posted to a listserv without the copyright holder's express written permission. However, users may print, download, or email articles for individual use.
Analysis tools/How balance scorecard complements McKinseys 7S article.pdf
How the balanced scorecard complements the McKinsey 7-S model
Robert S. Kaplan
I n Search of Excellence, the 1982 best-selling book by McKinsey partners Tom
Peters and Robert Waterman, introduced the mass business audience to the firm’s
7-S model. The model, also influenced by an earlier collaboration between
McKinsey and management scholars Richard Pascale and Anthony Athos (The Art of
Japanese Management, 1980), describes the seven factors critical for effective strategy
execution[1]:
1. Strategy. The positioning and actions taken by an enterprise, in response to or
anticipation of changes in the external environment, intended to achieve competitive
advantage.
2. Structure. The way in which tasks and people are specialized and divided, and authority
is distributed; how activities and reporting relationships are grouped; the mechanisms by
which activities in the organization are coordinated.
3. Systems. The formal and informal procedures used to manage the organization, including
management control systems, performance measurement and reward systems,
planning, budgeting and resource allocation systems, and management information
systems.
4. Staff. The people, their backgrounds and competencies; how the organization recruits,
selects, trains, socializes, manages the careers, and promotes employees.
5. Skills. The distinctive competencies of the organization; what it does best along
dimensions such as people, management practices, processes, systems, technology,
and customer relationships.
6. Style/culture. The leadership style of managers – how they spend their time, what they
focus attention on, what questions they ask of employees, how they make decisions; also
the organizational culture ( the dominant values and beliefs, the norms, the conscious and
unconscious symbolic acts taken by leaders (job titles, dress codes, executive dining
rooms, corporate jets, informal meetings with employees).
7. Shared values. The core or fundamental set of values that are widely shared in the
organization and serve as guiding principles of what is important; vision, mission, and
values statements that provide a broad sense of purpose for all employees.
After a search for the ‘‘perfect’’ organizational structure, the authors, and others,
concluded that structure alone could not solve the problem of how to coordinate resource
allocation, incentives, and actions across large organizations. The 7-S model posits that
organizations are successful when they achieve an integrated harmony among three
‘‘hard’’ ‘‘S’s’’ of strategy, structure, and systems, and four ‘‘soft’’ ‘‘S’s’’ of skills, staff, style,
and super-ordinate goals (now referred to as shared values). While not all the companies
Peters and Waterman praised for ‘‘excellence’’ sustained their leadership performance
DOI 10.1108/10878570510594442 VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005, pp. 41-46, Q Emerald Group Publishing Limited, ISSN 1087-8572 j STRATEGY & LEADERSHIP j PAGE 41
Robert S. Kaplan is the Marvin
Bower Professor of Leadership
Development at Harvard
Business School
([email protected]). His recent
book, co-authored with
David P. Norton, Strategy Maps:
Converting Intangible Assets in
Tangible Outcomes (Harvard
Business School Press, 2004) is
a sequel to their classic The
Balanced Scorecard:
Translating Strategy into Action
(HBSP, 1996).
during the 1980s and 1990s, the 7-S model continues to be used in practice and in
business school teaching as a diagnostic and prescriptive framework for organizational
alignment.
Within the academic literature, economists and strategy scholars tend to focus on the more
tangible and measurable hard ‘‘S’s’’ of strategy, structure and systems through studies of the
impact of mergers, alternative organizational forms, and incentive and reward systems.
Scholars in other social sciences (organization behavior, psychology, sociology, and
anthropology) focus on the more intangible and difficult-to-measure softer ‘‘S’s’’ of skills,
staff, style, and shared values.
Ten years after Peters and Waterman introduced the 7-S model, Dave Norton and I
presented the balanced scorecard (BSC) (see ‘‘The balanced scorecard: measures that
drive performance,’’ Harvard Business Review, January/February, 1992), a new
measurement approach that organizes performance objectives and measures in four
perspectives:
1. The financial perspective describes the tangible outcomes of the strategy in traditional
financial terms, such as return on investment (ROI), shareholder value, profitability,
revenue growth, and lower unit costs.
2. The customer perspective defines the drivers of revenue growth. It includes generic
customer outcomes, such as satisfaction, acquisition, retention, and growth, as well as
the differentiating value proposition the organization intends to offer to generate sales and
loyalty from targeted customers.
3. The internal process perspective identifies the operating, customer management,
innovation, and regulatory and social process objectives for creating and delivering the
customer value proposition and improving the quality and productivity of operating
processes.
4. The learning and growth perspective identifies the intangible assets that are most
important to the strategy. The objectives in this perspective identify which jobs (the
human capital), which systems (the information capital), and what kind of climate (the
organization capital) are required to support the value creating internal processes.
Managers use the scorecard to describe and communicate their strategy, to align
business units and shared services to create synergies, to set priorities for strategic
initiatives, and to report on and guide the implementation of the strategy.
For more than a decade now, diverse organizations around the world ( manufacturing and
service, private sector and public sector, for profit and not-for-profit – have used that BSC to
achieve performance breakthroughs through focused and effective strategy execution. We
established the Balanced Scorecard Hall of Fame (http://bscol.com/bscol/hof/) to recognize
and publicize the organizations that have been most effective in implementing the concept
and realizing benefits from it.
As we studied the two models, we came to realize that the 7-S model and the BSC strategic
alignment models share many features in common. They both articulate that effective
strategy implementation requires a multi-dimensional approach. They both stress
interconnectedness. For example, the diagram for the 7-S model looks like a spider-web,
with each of the ‘‘S’s’’ connecting with all the other six; the BSC strategy map (see Figure 1)
illustrates cause-and-effect linkages across its four perspectives. Both models help
managers align their organization for effective strategy execution (see Table I).
‘‘ I believe that the BSC is not only fully consistent with the 7-S framework, but can also enhance it in use. ’’
PAGE 42jSTRATEGY & LEADERSHIPj VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005
Beyond these similarities, I believe that the BSC is not only fully consistent with the 7-S
framework, but can also enhance it in use. The BSC’s most obvious benefit arises when
managers use it to design a customized reporting and performance management system,
the ‘‘S,’’ that many organizations fail to align with their other six S’s. The BSC enables
management reports to focus on measures specifically selected to represent the
organization’s strategy. The BSC also influences other organizational systems when
managers use it to align their planning, budgeting, and resource allocation systems, and
their incentive and reward systems to strategy (as described in Kaplan and Norton, ‘‘Using
the balanced scorecard as a strategic management system,’’ Harvard Business Review,
January/February, 1996).
Often, senior executives pay insufficient attention to adapting and aligning their systems
even while they are introducing new strategies and structures. They continue to employ
traditional budgets and financial systems that are ill suited for the new strategies and
structures[2]. Some successful organizations, such as the pharmaceutical and medical
appliance giant Johnson & Johnson, cleverly use their traditional financial planning,
budgeting, and variance reporting systems in a highly interactive manner to foster alignment
to strategy and structure[3]. But most companies have learned that financial systems alone
cannot describe, communicate, guide, or evaluate their strategies. The BSC, by expanding
measurement systems to include the nonfinancial indicators of the organization’s strategy,
has given managers a new tool to design and customize their system – the third ‘‘S’’ ( to their
strategy.
For structure, the second ‘‘S,’’ companies face a complex choice among organizing by
function, product groups, technologies, channels, market segments, or regions, or some
Figure 1 BSC strategy map
����� ����� � � � ��� � ���� ����� � �� � ��� � � �� �� ������ � �� �� �
VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005 jSTRATEGY & LEADERSHIPj PAGE 43
combination thereof, such as in a matrix or networked organization. But even the best choice
cannot solve the complex trade-offs between specialized local expertise and cross-unit
integration and synergies. The BSC reduces the pressure on managers to find and install the
perfect structure. Whatever structural choice they make, when managers apply the
enterprise scorecard to functions and units, these units become better aligned with each
other and to the enterprise. The process starts by applying the BSC at a high level, and
letting the strategic objectives and themes cascade down to lower levels, where they are
interpreted and customized to the specific situation faced by lower level organizational units.
This is the process by which decentralized units become aligned with each other and to the
corporate strategy.
Executives can also use the comprehensive performance measures on the unit’s BSC to
assign clear responsibility and accountability for local and global performance. By using the
BSC as the primary organizational ‘‘system,’’ decentralized unit scorecards reflect both the
specific competencies and strategies of the unit for local success, and also how each unit
links with other units and the enterprise as a whole for the enterprise strategy to be achieved.
When strategy, structure and systems are tightly integrated, the odds for successful strategy
implementation are raised substantially. But the BSC need not be limited solely to
completing the alignment of the three ‘‘hard’’ S’s. It also contributes a great deal to the four
‘‘softer’’ S’s. The BSC’s learning and growth objective specifically links the staff, the
employees’ knowledge, capabilities and skills, to the strategy. The process to identify
strategic job families highlights those positions that have the highest impact on delivering
the organization’s distinctive value proposition[4]. Further, the strategic objectives for these
employees in the learning and growth perspective set the agenda that ensure the staff
develop the requisite knowledge, capabilities, and skills to perform the strategic processes
at the targeted levels.
Table I Comparing the 7-S model and BSC
7-S model BSC
Strategy Describes and measures the strategy, including balance between short-run cost savings and long-term revenue growth, the customer outcomes expected from a successful strategy, the customer value proposition at the heart of the strategy, and the critical internal processes that create and deliver the differentiated customer value proposition
Structure Applying BSCs to diverse, decentralized units allows alignment across these units and to the corporate value proposition that enables synergies to be created, along with accountability for contributing to local and global performance
Systems Organizations use the BSC to design their communication, reporting and evaluation systems for their unique strategy. Also, the BSC allows organizational systems such as incentive and reward, planning, budgeting, and resource allocation to be focused and aligned on successful strategy implementation
Staff The BSC’s learning and growth perspective identifies the critical job families that have the greatest impact on the strategy, and establishes measures for the knowledge, skills and experience of staff performing the most strategic internal processes
Skills The BSC’s internal process perspective measures the organizational skills, competencies, and processes that are most critical for the strategy to be effectively executed.
Style culture The BSC provides the agenda for leadership meetings, and keeps executives focused on the most important tasks for strategy implementation. Specific measures in the organizational capital component of the learning and growth perspective enable an organization to specify and measure the leadership style and skills it desires
Shared values Communicating the BSC throughout the organization creates shared understanding and commitment about the organization’s long-term objectives and its strategy for achieving them. Adherence to values and cultural norms can be measured within the learning and growth’s organizational capital component
PAGE 44jSTRATEGY & LEADERSHIPj VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005
The fifth ‘‘S,’’ skills, generally refers to organizational skills and competencies. These are
captured in the internal process perspective of the BSC, where organizations identify those
operating, customer management, innovation, and regulatory and social processes that:
create and deliver the distinctive customer value proposition; and lead to achieving the
financial perspective’s productivity objectives. In developing the strategic objectives and
measures for the BSC internal perspective, the organization enhances its skills by aligning
human, information, and organization capital (from the learning and growth perspective) to
critical processes, and also by selecting strategic initiatives specifically aimed at enhancing
the performance of the internal processes. Thus the BSC becomes a powerful tool for
aligning skills, the organizational competencies, to strategy.
The final two ‘‘S’s’’ are perhaps the most soft and intangible, yet they are still influenced by
the BSC. Leadership style generally refers to how executives spend their time and what they
pay attention to. The BSC keeps executives’ attention focused on a balance between
short-term operational improvements and the drivers of long-term value creation. In addition,
leadership attributes and style are captured in an organization capital component in the
learning and growth perspective[5]. Organizations differ in the leadership style that is most
effective for them. By defining the specific, measurable behaviors desired in leaders, the
BSC forces previously implicit choices to become explicit, actionable (developing the
leaders’style or choosing leaders with the desired style), and accountable. The organization
style is also included in the organization capital component when the enterprise selects
specific objectives for teamwork, knowledge-sharing, and organization culture and climate.
These choices are difficult to make and measure, but the robust framework of the BSC
enables the leadership and organization style dimension of the 7-S framework to be
highlighted and integrated into the strategic system.
We come finally to the seventh ‘‘S,’’ shared values (or, as it was called in the earlier 7-S
literature, super-ordinate goals). Vision, mission, value, and purpose statements are not
explicitly recognized in an organization’s BSC. These beliefs systems, though, should be the
starting point, the jumping off platform, for developing the organization’s strategy, which
articulates how it will deliver on its mission and achieve its vision, while living its core values
and statement of purpose. Some companies have put their shared values at the base of their
strategy map, below the learning and growth perspective, to signal that these are the
foundation for everything that the organization does. Similarly, they place the vision or
mission at the top of the strategy map to signify that ultimately the success of the strategy will
be judged by how it helps the organization achieve its vision and deliver on its mission.
Some organization establish explicit objectives and measures in the learning and growth
perspective, as an organization capital component, for whether employees are aware of and
understand the vision, mission, and values statements. They measure whether employees
believe they practice the principles in these statements in the workplace, and, most
importantly, whether they believe that their managers and co-workers are practicing these
principles. Thus, the BSC can translate even the most intangible ‘‘S’’ of them all into
quantifiable objectives that lead to action (education, training, and practice initiatives) and
feedback.
Even though the two strategy implementation frameworks were developed completely
independently from each other, the 7-S model and the BSC align remarkably well. Many
‘‘ The diagram for the 7-S model looks like a spider-web, with each of the ‘S’s’ connecting with all the other six. The BSC strategy map illustrates cause-and-effect linkages across its four perspectives. Both help managers align their organization for effective strategy execution. ’’
VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005 jSTRATEGY & LEADERSHIPj PAGE 45
organizations throughout the world are now using the BSC as their system for effective
strategy implementation. The application of the BSC to diverse organizational units aligns
companies’ structure to business unit and corporate strategy. The learning and growth
objectives integrate staff, style, and shared values to enhance organizational skills and
critical processes in the internal perspective. Thus, one can view the BSC as the
contemporary manifestation of the 7-S model, helping to explain its popularity as a practical
and effective tool for aligning all the organizational variables and processes that lead to
successful strategy execution.
Notes
1. Adapted from R. Waterman, T. Peters, and J. Phillips, ‘‘Structure is not organization,’’ Business
Horizons, June, 1980, and J. Clued, ‘‘Organizational alignment: the 7-S model,’’ HBS Case
9-497-045.
2. This is a long-standing problem, as described by Steve Kerr, ‘‘On the folly of rewarding A, while
hoping for B,’’ Academy of Management Executive, 1995, originally published in 1975; also R.S.
Kaplan and H.T. Johnson, Relevance Lost: The Rise and Fall of Management Accounting, HBS
Press, Boston, MA, 1986.
3. See R. Simons, ‘‘Control in an age of empowerment,’’ Harvard Business Review, March/April, 1995,
pp. 86-8.
4. R.S. Kaplan and D.P. Norton, ‘‘Measuring the strategic readiness of intangible assets,’’ Harvard
Business Review, February, 2004, and Strategy Maps, HBS Press, Boston, MA, 2004.
5. R.S. Kaplan and D.P. Norton, ‘‘Measuring the strategic readiness of intangible assets,’’ pp. 60-3;
also Strategy Maps, pp. 275-316.
PAGE 46jSTRATEGY & LEADERSHIPj VOL. 33 NO. 3 2005
Analysis tools/Insights into using bal scorecard.pdf
What is the balanced scorecard? (Mike) The textbook answer is a system that measures and manages an organisation’s progress towards strategic objectives, incorporating not only financial indicators but also three other perspectives: customer, internal business and learning/innovation. The scorecard shows how these measures are interlinked and affect each other, enabling an organisation’s past, present and potential performance to be tracked and managed. (Pippa) That is a good definition of what a scorecard is but rather loses what a scorecard does for the organisation and how central it can be for managing the business. I would say the process of designing and implementing a balanced scorecard enables you to decide what is vital for your business, to set appropriate goals and motivate your staff to achieve them.
When did you first become interested in it? (Mike) I first became interested in the balanced scorecard when I was filling the role of Director of People Development at Caterair in the UK in the 90s. We were sent a set of measures to use from Head Office in Washington DC, which went down initially like a lead balloon. However, when we looked at what they were proposing in more detail, it made a lot of sense and it was an effective tool when we started to use it.
How has it influenced the way you work? (Pippa) In the past I had always thought of performance measurement in terms of targets which should be linked to objectives. Now I see the process is far more complex – and also more fruitful. I am sensitive to the consequences of deciding exactly what you should measure and what targets you should set. Both will affect behaviour and morale for better or worse. That doesn’t mean to say you
shouldn’t set stretching targets or measure activities that are difficult to measure. It does mean you should do it with great care. At the Institute of Chartered Accountants where I now work, I am on the receiving end of targets set centrally (but with consultation). I think very carefully about how I will cascade these to my own regional team.
What is, in your view, the most compelling reason why organisations should use the balanced scorecard? (Pippa) This may seem a strange answer because most people think about the scorecard in terms of KPIs and target setting but I think it is about aligning your actions to your strategy and showing your people what is important and what is not. The UK finance director of Tesco and part of his performance team were kind enough to allow us to interview them for the Instant Manager Balanced Scorecard book. It provided a great example of how a very large organisation can communicate what should be done to a huge number of people in a variety of locations very quickly. Having used the example of a large business I know from my own experience it works in much smaller organisations just as well. (Mike) Actually, a well-constructed scorecard tells everyone in the organisation exactly where it is going and what they are trying to achieve. It clarifies the objectives and communicates them widely. That is why a scorecard is important.
Would you say it has become a well-established management tool since it was ‘popularised’ by Kaplan and Norton in 1992? (Mike) The scorecard is well established, with many organisations at least attempting to develop a scorecard. Some surveys show that the uptake is about 40 per cent in UK companies, but when my colleagues at the Centre for
professional managernov2007
R E P O R T30
Insights into using
strategy tool Tesco is a company that clearly knows where it’s going and one of the strategic tools
it uses is the balanced scorecard. Sue Mann interviews Mike and Pippa Bourne,
authors of the new Instant Manager Balanced Scorecard book, about what the
balanced scorecard is, what it does and how and when to use it
31
professional managernov2007
Business Performance at Cranfield University School of Management surveyed larger UK-based companies a couple of years ago, we found that 19 per cent were using the balanced scorecard to a “great extent”. Understanding of the basic four box scorecard model is now widespread.
How does it fit with other strategic management tools or is there nothing quite like it? (Mike) The scorecard is an effective strategy execution tool, but it is only one piece in the jigsaw. Companies still have to scan their business environment for opportunities and threats and analyse their competitors’ actions. They also need to manage process improvement, as without changes to the business processes improvements in performance aren’t sustainable. Finally, the scorecard has to align with the financial control systems.
In practical terms, what is the first step an organisation should take when considering using this tool? (Pippa) The first step is to think about what you want to achieve. To do it properly takes time - and you must do it properly or you can cause damage to your business. If you have not thought out what you want to achieve you will probably not design your balanced scorecard in a way that will achieve your aims.
Are there any drawbacks or pitfalls to look out for when using the balanced scorecard? (Mike) Yes. The scorecard is very powerful, but it can be quite frightening if you get it wrong. When you deploy a scorecard well you start to steer the organisation in a particular direction. So it is important to measure what really matters and to design the measures in the right way.
‘Most people
think about
the balanced
scorecard in
terms of KPIs
and target
setting but
I think it
is about
aligning
your actions
to your
strategy and
showing
your people
what is
important
and what is
not’
Pippa Bourne
Mike and Pippa Bourne
professional managernov2007
If you don’t manage either of these correctly, you can take the company in totally the wrong direction.
Do you know of any organisations that use it on an ongoing basis as part of their strategic management activities? (Mike) There are many organisations that claim to use a balanced scorecard, but fewer use it well. EDF Energy has a particularly good scorecard deployment across all their UK operations that engages everyone from management to front line staff. Belron – the parent company to Autoglass – have executed an effective scorecard and are rolling it out across their international operations. The example we give in the book is Tesco.
The ethos at Tesco is to keep things simple. Where many large companies will have a mission statement a paragraph long, followed by a page of values that no one can remember, Tesco states that its purpose is ‘to create value for customers to earn their lifetime loyalty’.
Tesco has just two key values, ‘no one tries harder for customers’ and ‘treat people as we like to be treated’. To some the business may seem highly complex. It has over 450,000 employees worldwide and a network of stores selling a wide range of products and services but somehow it seems to hold on to the idea that simplicity is best.
This is reflected in the way they use a version of the balanced scorecard, which they call the steering wheel, to manage the business. It was introduced in the late 1990s with four perspectives – customer, financial, operations and people. However, in 2006 it was amended to add a fifth perspective, community, reflecting the changing environment in which the company was operating.
The company structure comprises a simple chain of command, with clear roles and people who know what is required of them. The steering wheel plays an important part in communicating direction through the organisation.
The business plan is rolled out using the steering wheel and up to 50 per cent of the executive bonus is dependent on its results.
There is a ‘cascade’ of the steering wheel, with a global, UK, store group and an individual wheel for each store. The measures and targets are tailored to the context in which it is being used.
The results are communicated quarterly and management reviews also occur with that frequency, but there are weekly review meetings. Staff ‘buy in’ is important and there are town meetings and local reviews where objectives and tar- gets are discussed.
The steering wheel works in Tesco because it is absolutely central to the way they run their business. It is the tool they use to roll out their strategy, manage performance and reward their people.
R E P O R T32
Further information PROFESSOR MIKE BOURNE, BSc & BCom, MBA, PhD, ACMA, C. Eng, MIET, is Professor of Business Performance in the Centre for Business Performance at Cranfield University School of Management. Before his academic career, Mike spent 15 years in industry. He gained his PhD from the University of Cambridge in 2001, researching the design and implementation of balanced performance measurement systems and he currently works with companies supporting senior management teams through the process of designing, implementing and using their balanced scorecards and related performance management techniques. His current research activities are in the arena of corporate performance management, including the interface with the planning and budgeting and performance related pay. He is co-author of several books including Balanced Scorecard In a Week, Getting the Measure of your
Business and Change Management in a Week. Mike is also the editor of the Gee Handbook of Performance Measurement and the journal Measuring Business Excellence.
PIPPA BOURNE BA, MBA, MCIM, is Regional Director, East England, for The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales. She is a Chartered Marketer and has spent 15 years running profitable management education and training businesses in universities and professional bodies. She has used the balanced scorecard within these businesses and has been consulted by organisations on performance measurement and business performance. She writes practitioner articles on the subject and is co-author of two books - Balanced Scorecard In a Week, and Change Management In a Week - as well as being Associate Editor of the journal Measuring Business Excellence.
‘The scorecard is very powerful, but
it can be quite frightening if you
get it wrong. When you deploy a
scorecard well you start to steer
the organisation in a particular
direction. it is important to measure
what really matters and to design
the measures in the right way’
Professor Mike Bourne
professional managernov2007
33
This month readers have the opportunity
to purchase the first five Instant Manager
titles at the special price of £6.99 each,
with free postage and packing.
Each strikingly designed new title reflects
a current hot topic, addresses the top ten
most-asked questions about the subject,
and is written by leading experts with a
wide knowledge of the subjects they are
writing about.
The series strongly focuses on work/life
balance and this is reflected in the series
strapline: ‘Taking control of work and life’.
The new titles include the title featured
here – the Balanced Scorecard by Mike and
Pippa Bourne, plus Neuro Linguistic
Programming, Body Language, Finance for
Non Financial Managers and Business
Plans. The new series is co-published by
Hodder Education and the Chartered
Management Institute and is the sequel to
the massively successful In a Week series of
management pocketbooks.
To order the new titles at £6.99 per copy,
including free postage and packing - £2
below the recommended retail price of
£8.99 – visit www.pressoffers.co.uk/hod194
or call 0870 755 2122 quoting offer code
HOD194. Lines are open Monday-Friday,
between 9.00am and 5.00pm. Please note,
this offer closes on Wednesday 19
December 2007.
NEW BOOK SERIES FOR MANAGERS
pm
Is it possible to get a wrong or misleading output from it, how would you know and what is usually the cause if this occurs? (Pippa) If you are careful about the way you design your measures and define carefully the measurement process you minimise the risk of getting misleading output. You also need to think about the culture of your organisation. If there is a blame culture and people are afraid they will be ingenious about finding ways to make the figures look better. However, even with careful design and the best will in the world you cannot eliminate misleading output. The measures provide data which you have to interpret and from which you draw conclusions. Judgement is involved and it’s not an exact science, but it is a great deal better than having no evidence at all. (Mike) Yes I would agree with that, but add that quite often you get results from your scorecard that you don’t expect or understand. These can be misleading if you don’t fully investigate what is happening. A balanced scorecard is a great learning tool and these unexpected results are an opportunity to learn something new about how your business works.
Has its use been widened/adapted at all, for example, because of the increased focus on human capital management or corporate social responsibility? (Mike) Recently, the scorecard has developed to take account of intangibles, such as aspects of managing people, and the innovation and learning perspective has been updated to reflect this. Interestingly companies are often adding a fifth dimension, as in the case of Tesco which added community, as outlined above.
Is it a big company tool or something that smaller business can and do use? (Pippa) The beauty of the balanced scorecard is that it provides a flexible framework that you can apply and adapt for different circumstances and situations. I have used it in smaller organisations effectively to create change.
Can the balanced scorecard be equally applied by managers on individual projects, or in the management of a department or team for example? (Mike) Yes, but you need to think about what balance means in these different contexts. You obviously need a set of financial and non-financial measures in most situations, but you should ask if the traditional four perspectives are appropriate. (Pippa) We have a chapter in the book that focuses on scorecards at different levels of the organisation and in different organisational settings.
Have you ever met Kaplan and/or Norton? (Mike) Yes, we both met Bob Kaplan at a presentation in the US embassy. I also met him again when he gave the keynote speech at the PMA conference that the Centre for Business Performance ran in Boston, and earlier this year David Norton connected via a teleconference call with my Managing Organisational Performance MSc students.
Analysis tools/Porters 5 Forces Analysis.docx
`
Porter’s Five Forces - Assessing the Balance of Power in a Business Situation
The Porter's Five Forces tool is a simple but powerful tool for understanding where power lies in a business situation. This is useful, because it helps you understand both the strength of your current competitive position, and the strength of a position you're considering moving into.
With a clear understanding of where power lies, you can take fair advantage of a situation of strength, improve a situation of weakness, and avoid taking wrong steps. This makes it an important part of your planning toolkit.
Conventionally, the tool is used to identify whether new products, services or businesses have the potential to be profitable. However it can be very illuminating when used to understand the balance of power in other situations.
Understanding the Tool
Five Forces Analysis assumes that there are five important forces that determine competitive power in a business situation. These are:
Supplier Power: Here you assess how easy it is for suppliers to drive up prices. This is driven by the number of suppliers of each key input, the uniqueness of their product or service, their strength and control over you, the cost of switching from one to another, and so on. The fewer the supplier choices you have, and the more you need suppliers' help, the more powerful your suppliers are.
Buyer Power: Here you ask yourself how easy it is for buyers to drive prices down. Again, this is driven by the number of buyers, the importance of each individual buyer to your business, the cost to them of switching from your products and services to those of someone else, and so on. If you deal with few, powerful buyers, then they are often able to dictate terms to you.
Competitive Rivalry: What is important here is the number and capability of your competitors. If you have many competitors, and they offer equally attractive products and services, then you'll most likely have little power in the situation, because suppliers and buyers will go elsewhere if they don't get a good deal from you. On the other hand, if no-one else can do what you do, then you can often have tremendous strength.
Threat of Substitution: This is affected by the ability of your customers to find a different way of doing what you do – for example, if you supply a unique software product that automates an important process, people may substitute by doing the process manually or by outsourcing it. If substitution is easy and substitution is viable, then this weakens your power.
Threat of New Entry: Power is also affected by the ability of people to enter your market. If it costs little in time or money to enter your market and compete effectively, if there are few economies of scale in place, or if you have little protection for your key technologies, then new competitors can quickly enter your market and weaken your position. If you have strong and durable barriers to entry, then you can preserve a favourable position and take fair advantage of it.
These forces can be neatly brought together in a diagram like the one in figure 1 below:
Figure 1 – Porter's Five Forces
Using the Tool
To use the tool to understand your situation, look at each of these forces one-by-one and write down your observations. Brainstorm the relevant factors for your market or situation, and then check against the factors listed for the force in the diagram above.
Then, mark the key factors on the diagram, and summarize the size and scale of the force on the diagram. An easy way of doing this is to use, for example, a single "+" sign for a force moderately in your favour, or "--" for a force strongly against you (you can see this in the example below).
Then look at the situation you find using this analysis and think through how it affects you. Bear in mind that few situations are perfect; however looking at things in this way helps you think through what you could change to increase your power with respect to each force. What’s more, if you find yourself in a structurally weak position, this tool helps you think about what you can do to move into a stronger one.
This tool was created by Harvard Business School professor, Michael Porter, to analyse the attractiveness and likely-profitability of an industry. Since publication, it has become one of the most important business strategy tools. The classic article which introduces it is "How Competitive Forces Shape Strategy" in Harvard Business Review 57, March – April 1979, pages 86-93.
Example
Martin Johnson is deciding whether to switch career and become a farmer – he's always loved the countryside, and wants to switch to a career where he's his own boss. He creates the following Five Forces Analysis as he thinks the situation through:
Figure 2 – Porter's Five Forces Example: Buying a Farm
This worries him:
· The threat of new entry is quite high: if anyone looks as if they're making a sustained profit, new competitors can come into the industry easily, reducing profits.
· Competitive rivalry is extremely high: if someone raises prices, they'll be quickly undercut. Intense competition puts strong downward pressure on prices.
· Buyer Power is strong, again implying strong downward pressure on prices.
There is some threat of substitution.
Unless he is able to find some way of changing this situation, this looks like a very tough industry to survive in. Maybe he'll need to specialise in a sector of the market that's protected from some of these forces, or find a related business that's in a stronger position.
Key Points
Porter's Five Forces Analysis is an important tool for assessing the potential for profitability in an industry. With a little adaptation, it is also useful as a way of assessing the balance of power in more general situations.
It works by looking at the strength of five important forces that affect competition:
· Supplier Power: The power of suppliers to drive up the prices of your inputs.
· Buyer Power: The power of your customers to drive down your prices.
· Competitive Rivalry: The strength of competition in the industry.
· The Threat of Substitution: The extent to which different products and services can be used in place of your own.
· The Threat of New Entry: The ease with which new competitors can enter the market if they see that you are making good profits (and then drive your prices down).
By thinking about how each force affects you, and by identifying the strength and direction of each force, you can quickly assess the strength of your position and your ability to make a sustained profit in the industry.
You can then look at how you can affect each of the forces to move the balance of power more in your favour.
Source: Mindtools, accessed17.01.2016
Page 4
EH